sp8300 Manual

M132
SERVICE MANUAL
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2012 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN
M132 SP 8300DN Aficio SP 8300DN SP 8300DN
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 10/2012 Original Printing
M132 SERVICE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................................... 1-1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 PRINTER .......................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR
PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................... 1-4
1.4 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 1-5
1.4.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ................................................................... 1-5
1.4.2 PAPER PATH ................................................................................... 1-7
1.4.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... 1-8
2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 2-1

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ............................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ............................................... 2-3
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 2-4
2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION .............................................................. 2-5
2.2.1 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW ............................................................ 2-5
2.2.2 POWER SOCKET FOR PERIPHERAL ............................................ 2-6
2.2.3 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART........................................................ 2-7
2.2.4 MOVING THE MACHINE .................................................................. 2-7
2.2.5 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE .................................................... 2-7
2.3 1200-SHEET LCT INSTALLATION (D631) ................................................ 2-8
2.3.1 COMPONENT CHECK ..................................................................... 2-8
2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................ 2-9
2.3.3 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE ................................................ 2-11
2.4 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (D634).................................................... 2-12
2.4.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................... 2-12
2.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................... 2-13
2.5 1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588) .............................................................. 2-17
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-17
SM i M132
2.6 3000-SHEET FINISHER (D636) .............................................................. 2-21
2.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-21
Support Tray Installation .................................................................... 2-25
2.7 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (D570)..................................................... 2-26
2.7.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................... 2-26
2.8 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT INSTALLATION (B703)................................... 2-31
2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK LIST ........................................................... 2-31
2.9 TRAY HEATER ........................................................................................ 2-33
2.10 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER FEED UNIT) ............................ 2-35
2.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-35
2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................. 2-36
For installing the tray heater in the D580 (Two-tray paper feed unit).. 2-36
For installing the tray heater in the D581 (LCT) ................................. 2-38
2.11 EXTERNAL USB KEYBOARD INSTALLATION ................................. 2-42
2.11.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................. 2-42
2.12 CONTROLLER OPTIONS.................................................................. 2-44
2.12.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 2-44
Controller Options .............................................................................. 2-44
Board, SD Card Slots ......................................................................... 2-45
2.12.2 APPLICATION MERGE .............................................................. 2-47
Overview ............................................................................................ 2-47
Important Notes about SD Card Appli Move ...................................... 2-47
Move Exec ......................................................................................... 2-48
Undo Exec .......................................................................................... 2-49
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE..................................................... 3-1

3.1 PM TABLES ............................................................................................... 3-1
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 4-1

4.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS .............................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 USED TONER .................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ...................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ............................................................................. 4-2
4.2.2 LUBRICANTS ................................................................................... 4-2
M132 ii SM
4.3 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................ 4-3
4.3.1 FRONT DOOR, UPPER AND LOWER INNER COVER ................... 4-3
Upper Inner Cover ................................................................................ 4-3
Lower Inner Cover ................................................................................ 4-3
4.3.2 LEFT COVER ................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.3 REAR COVER .................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.4 RIGHT REAR COVER ...................................................................... 4-5
4.3.5 TOP RIGHT AND TOP REAR COVER ............................................. 4-6
4.3.6 OPERATION PANEL ........................................................................ 4-6
When Installing the New Operation Panel ............................................ 4-8
4.3.7 PAPER EXIT COVER ....................................................................... 4-8
4.3.8 OUTPUT TRAY ................................................................................ 4-8
4.4 LASER UNIT ............................................................................................ 4-10
4.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS ..................................................... 4-10
4.4.2 LASER UNIT ................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................ 4-12
4.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR .................................... 4-12
4.4.5 LD UNIT .......................................................................................... 4-13
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment ............................................................ 4-14
4.5 PCDU ....................................................................................................... 4-16
4.5.1 PCDU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT) ........ 4-16
Reinstallation...................................................................................... 4-17
4.5.2 DRUM ............................................................................................. 4-17
Re-installation .................................................................................... 4-18
4.5.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS.......................................................................... 4-19
Pick-off Pawl Position Adjustment ...................................................... 4-19
4.5.4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING ROLLER .............................. 4-20
4.5.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE ............................................................. 4-21
Re-installation .................................................................................... 4-21
4.5.6 ID SENSOR .................................................................................... 4-21
4.6 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................... 4-22
4.6.1 DEVELOPMENT FILTER ............................................................... 4-22
4.6.2 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER ............................................................. 4-22
Cleaning Procedure............................................................................ 4-23
4.6.3 DEVELOPER .................................................................................. 4-24
4.6.4 TD SENSOR ................................................................................... 4-27
4.7 TRANSFER.............................................................................................. 4-28
4.7.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ................................................................. 4-28
SM iii M132
4.7.2 TRANSFER BELT........................................................................... 4-29
4.7.3 TONER OVERFLOW SENSOR ...................................................... 4-31
4.7.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE........................................... 4-31
4.8 PAPER FEED .......................................................................................... 4-32
4.8.1 PAPER FEED UNIT ........................................................................ 4-32
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ............................................................................... 4-32
4.8.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS............................ 4-33
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ............................................................................... 4-33
4.8.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR........................................................................ 4-34
4.8.4 RELAY, TRAY LIFT, PAPER END AND PAPER FEED SENSORS 4-35
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ............................................................................... 4-35
4.8.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR ............................................................. 4-36
Reinstall the registration sensor ......................................................... 4-37
4.9 FUSING ................................................................................................... 4-38
4.9.1 FUSING UNIT ................................................................................. 4-38
4.9.2 WEB ROLLER UNIT ....................................................................... 4-39
4.9.3 BRAKE PAD ................................................................................... 4-40
4.9.4 WEB HOLDER ROLLER AND WEB ROLLERS ............................. 4-41
Installing a new web holder roller ....................................................... 4-42
Installing new web rollers ................................................................... 4-43
4.9.5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER .................................. 4-44
4.9.6 THERMOSTATS ............................................................................. 4-45
4.9.7 THERMISTOR ................................................................................ 4-46
4.9.8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS ............................................................ 4-47
4.9.9 FUSING LAMPS ............................................................................. 4-48
4.9.10 HOT ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER ................................ 4-50
4.10 PAPER EXIT ...................................................................................... 4-51
4.10.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT ..................................................................... 4-51
4.10.2 FUSING EXIT, PAPER OVERFLOW, AND PAPER EXIT SENSORS
4-52
4.10.3 JUNCTION JAM SENSOR ......................................................... 4-53
4.10.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR ................................................................ 4-53
4.11 DUPLEX ............................................................................................. 4-54
4.11.1 DUPLEX UNIT ............................................................................ 4-54
4.11.2 RIGHT DOOR COVER ............................................................... 4-56
4.11.3 DUPLEX DOOR SENSOR.......................................................... 4-57
4.11.4 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR ................................................. 4-57
4.11.5 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR ............................................................ 4-58
M132 iv SM
4.11.6 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR....................................................... 4-60
4.11.7 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR .................................................... 4-61
4.12 BY-PASS ............................................................................................ 4-63
4.12.1 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/BY-PASS PAPER LENGTH
SENSOR .................................................................................................. 4-63
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor ............................... 4-65
4.12.2 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR .............................................. 4-66
4.12.3 BY-PASS PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER, TORQUE
LIMITER ................................................................................................... 4-66
4.12.4 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH .......................................................... 4-67
4.13 DRIVE AREA ..................................................................................... 4-68
4.13.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH.............................................................. 4-68
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ............................................................................... 4-68
4.13.2 DEVELOPMENT PADDLE MOTOR ........................................... 4-68
4.13.3 TRANSFER/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR ...................................... 4-69
4.13.4 DRUM MOTOR ........................................................................... 4-69
4.13.5 FUSING MOTOR ........................................................................ 4-70
4.13.6 WEB MOTOR ............................................................................. 4-71
4.13.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR ............................................................... 4-72
4.13.8 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR ...................................... 4-72
4.13.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR........................................................... 4-73
4.13.10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR ........................................................ 4-74
4.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .......................................................... 4-75
4.14.1 CONTROLLER UNIT .................................................................. 4-75
4.14.2 CONTROLLER BOARD.............................................................. 4-75
Before Replacing the Controller Board in the Model without HDD ..... 4-75
Replacement Procedure..................................................................... 4-75
When Installing the New Controller Board.......................................... 4-77
4.14.3 AFTER INSTALLING THE CONTROLLER BOARD ................... 4-77
4.14.4 MOTHER BOARD ...................................................................... 4-78
4.14.5 BCU ............................................................................................ 4-81
When installing the new BCU ............................................................. 4-81
4.14.6 BRIDGE BOARD ........................................................................ 4-82
4.14.7 IOB ............................................................................................. 4-82
4.14.8 PSU ............................................................................................ 4-83
4.14.9 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ........................................... 4-83
4.14.10 FUSING EXHAUST FAN .......................................................... 4-84
When installing the fusing exhaust fan ............................................... 4-84
SM v M132
4.14.11 CONTROLLER FAN ................................................................. 4-84
When installing the controller fan ....................................................... 4-84
4.14.12 SD USB BOARD....................................................................... 4-85
4.14.13 LCDC BOARD .......................................................................... 4-86
When Installing the New LCDC Board ............................................... 4-87
4.15 PRINT ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................... 4-88
4.15.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 4-88
4.15.2 PRINTING................................................................................... 4-88
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side .......................................... 4-88
Blank Margin ...................................................................................... 4-89
Main Scan Magnification .................................................................... 4-91
Parallelogram Image Adjustment ....................................................... 4-91
4.15.3 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION .............................................. 4-92
5. SERVICE TABLES ...................................................................... 5-1

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE .................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION ..................................... 5-1
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 ENTERING SP MODE ...................................................................... 5-1
If The Power is Already On: ................................................................. 5-1
If The Power is Already Off: ................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............................................ 5-2
Service Table Key ................................................................................ 5-2
5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ..................................................... 5-3
5.2.1 SP TABLES ...................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 SERVICE MAIN SP TABLES ..................................................................... 5-4
5.3.1 SP1-XXX ........................................................................................... 5-4
5.4 ENGINE MAIN SP TABLES-1.................................................................. 5-14
5.4.1 SP1-XXX: FEED ............................................................................. 5-14
5.5.1 SP2-XXX: DRUM ............................................................................ 5-23
5.6.1 SP3-XXX: PROCESS ..................................................................... 5-28
5.8.1 SP5-XXX: MODE ............................................................................ 5-30
5.9.1 SP6-XXX: PERIPHERALS.............................................................. 5-80
5.10 ENGINE MAIN SP TABLES-7 ............................................................ 5-86
M132 vi SM
5.10.1 SP7-XXX: DATA LOG ................................................................ 5-86
5.11 ENGINE MAIN SP TABLES-8 .......................................................... 5-100
5.11.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2 ............................................................ 5-100
5.12 ENGINE MAIN SP TABLES-9 .......................................................... 5-127
5.12.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE ............................................................. 5-127
Copier............................................................................................... 5-127
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor .......................................................... 5-130
Table 2: Paper Size Switch .............................................................. 5-130
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ............................................... 5-131
APS Original Size Detection............................................................. 5-132
3000-Sheet Finisher (D636) ............................................................. 5-133
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 5-136
5.12.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ......................................................... 5-137
Copier............................................................................................... 5-137
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 5-142
5.12.3 3000-SHEET FINISHER (D636) ............................................... 5-143
5.13 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE .......................................................... 5-145
5.13.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN .............................................................. 5-145
5.13.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE ........................................................... 5-146
Preparation....................................................................................... 5-146
Updating Procedure ......................................................................... 5-146
Error Messages ................................................................................ 5-147
Firmware Update Error ..................................................................... 5-148
Recovery after Power Loss .............................................................. 5-148
5.13.3 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS ........................... 5-149
Error Message Table ........................................................................ 5-149
5.14 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA ............................... 5-151
5.14.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-824) ................................... 5-151
5.14.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-825)............................. 5-152
5.15 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ............................................................. 5-153
5.15.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON ........................... 5-153
5.15.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TEST FLOW ............................................ 5-154
5.15.3 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ................................... 5-154
5.16 USING THE DEBUG LOG ............................................................... 5-155
5.16.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................. 5-155
5.16.2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ....... 5-155
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10......................................................... 5-158
Key to Acronyms .............................................................................. 5-159
SM vii M132
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD .......................................... 5-160
5.17 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION................................................ 5-161
5.17.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................. 5-161
SMC List Card Save ......................................................................... 5-161
5.17.2 PROCEDURE ........................................................................... 5-161
5.17.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS ............................. 5-163
5.17.4 ERROR MESSAGES ................................................................ 5-163
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-1

6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 SUMMARY ....................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................. 6-2
SC Tables: SC1xx ................................................................................ 6-2
SC Tables: SC2xx ................................................................................ 6-3
SC Tables: SC3xx ................................................................................ 6-6
SC Tables: SC4xx ................................................................................ 6-9
SC Tables: SC5xx .............................................................................. 6-11
SC Tables: SC6xx .............................................................................. 6-20
SC Tables: SC7xx .............................................................................. 6-27
SC Tables: SC8xx .............................................................................. 6-41
SC Tables: SC9xx .............................................................................. 6-63
6.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................. 6-68
6.2.1 SENSORS ...................................................................................... 6-68
6.2.2 SWITCHES ..................................................................................... 6-72
6.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................. 6-73
6.4 FUSES ..................................................................................................... 6-74
7. ENERGY SAVING ....................................................................... 7-1

7.1 ENERGY SAVE ......................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES ............................................................... 7-1
Timer Settings ...................................................................................... 7-1
Return to Stand-by Mode ..................................................................... 7-2
Recommendation ................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.2 ENERGY SAVE EFFECTIVENESS .................................................. 7-2
7.2 PAPER SAVE ............................................................................................ 7-3
7.2.1 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX/COMBINE FUNCTION .................. 7-3
1. Duplex: ............................................................................................. 7-3
2. Combine mode: ................................................................................ 7-3
3. Duplex + Combine:........................................................................... 7-4
M132 viii SM
How to calculate the paper reduction ratio ........................................... 7-5
SM ix M132
READ THIS FIRST
Safety Notices
Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the main machine and peripherals, make sure
that the power cord of the main machine is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the
main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven
components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the machine completes the warm-up period (the Start key
starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away from the mechanical and the
electrical components as the machine starts making prints as soon as the warm-up period is
completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is
operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
 To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases,
and aerosols.
Health Safety Conditions

1. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it
may cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If
unsuccessful, get medical attention.
2. This machine, which uses a high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High ozone
density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a
well-ventilated room.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
1. This machine and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who
has completed the training course on those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced
incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends
replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be
handled in accordance with local regulations.
Handling Toner
 Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid
spilling toner on clothing or the hands.
 If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well
ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
 If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
 If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If there are
signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
 If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner. If there
are signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
 If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water. Never
use hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric.
 Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages, cartridges,
and bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges) out of the reach of
children.
 Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location that is
not exposed to direct sunlight.
 Do not use a vacuum cleaner to remove spilled toner (including used toner). Vacuumed
toner may cause a fire or explosion due to sparks or electrical contact inside the cleaner.
However, it is possible to use a cleaner designed to be dust explosion-proof. If toner is
spilled over the floor, sweep up spilled toner slowly and clean up any remaining toner with
a wet cloth.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed
to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic
photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than
100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to
chemical reactions and heat build-up.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical
units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the
requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer
Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore
directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when
replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
 Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
 Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics
Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
Conventions in this Manual
Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:
See or Refer to
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:
 FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY

OR DEATH.
 Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
 This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
PRODUCT INFORMATION
Specifications
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
Information
Product
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
See "Appendices" for the following information:

 General Specifications
 Optional Equipment
SM 1-1 M132
Machine Configuration
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1.2.1 PRINTER
Key: Symbol: U: Unique option, C: Option also used with other products
Item Callout Key Machine Code
Main
M132 [1] - M132
Frame
Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit [2] C D580
2000-sheet LCT [3] C D581
1200-sheet LCT [4] C D631
External Bridge Unit [5] C D634

Options
1000-sheet Finisher (See Note 1) [6] C D588
3000-Sheet Finisher (See Note 1) [7] C D636
D570-00 (2/3-hole)
-Punch Unit (See Note 2) - C
(NA)
M132 1-2 SM
Machine Configuration
Item Callout Key Machine Code
Information
Product
D570-01 (2/4-hole)
(EU)
D570-02 (4-hole)
(Scandinavia)
-Output Jogger Unit (See Note 2) [8] C B703
HDD - U M416
Memory Unit 512 MB - C D594
IPDS Unit - C M416
Netware - C M416
Internal VM Card - C D640

Options
Font SD Card - C D641 (EU)
G874 (EU)
Gigabit Ethernet - C
M394 (NA)
IEEE 802.11a/g, g - C M344
IEEE 1284 - C B679
NOTE:
1. The finisher requires the bridge unit and two-tray paper feed unit or 2000-sheet LCT. The
1000-sheet finisher and 3000-sheet finisher cannot be installed together.
2. The punch unit and output jogger unit requires the 3000-sheet finisher.
SM 1-3 M132
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
1.3 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH
PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
The M132 series are successor models to the G179 series. If you have experience with the
predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual.
Different Points from Predecessor Products
M132 G179
Controller Type GW+ Controller GW Controller
Operation Panel 4.3” touch panel includes 4-line LCD

USB/SD slot
USB2.0/SD Slot Standard Not supported
Light Detect Function Available Not supported
SMC data SD card down load or printing Printing only
Safety Shut Down Available Not Available

Function
PDF Direct Standard Not supported
Data Overwrite Standard Option

Security
HDD Encryption Standard Option
M132 1-4 SM
Overview
1.4 OVERVIEW
Information
Product
1.4.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 Paper Exit Sensor 17 By-pass Feed Roller
2 Paper Overflow Sensor 18 By-pass Separation Roller
3 Junction Gate 1 19 Duplex/by-pass transport roller
4 Junction Jam Sensor 20 Upper Relay Belt
5 Duplex Inverter Gate 21 Feed Roller
6 Junction Gate 2 22 Separation Roller
7 Duplex Entrance Sensor 23 Pick-up Roller
8 Duplex Inverter Roller 24 Bottom Plate
SM 1-5 M132
Overview
9 Hot Roller 25 Development Unit
10 Pressure Roller 26 Charge Roller
11 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 27 F Mirror
12 Duplex Transport Roller 28 Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL)
13 Transfer Belt 29 Polygonal Mirror Motor
14 OPC Drum 30 Laser Unit
15 Registration Roller 31 Toner Bottle Holder
16 By-pass Pick-up Roller 32 Fusing Exit Sensor
33 Exit Roller
M132 1-6 SM
Overview
1.4.2 PAPER PATH
Information
Product
1 Duplex Unit
2 By-pass Tray
3 Large Capacity Tray (LCT: 1200-sheet)
4 Paper Tray Unit
5 Two-Tray Finisher
6 Bridge Unit
SM 1-7 M132
Overview
1.4.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
1 Paper Exit Motor 9 Paper Feed Clutch 2
2 Fusing Motor 10 Paper Feed Clutch 1
3 Web Motor 11 Feed Motor
4 Transfer/Development Motor 12 By-pass Paper Feed Clutch
5 Drum Motor 13 Registration Motor
6 Development Paddle Motor 14 Duplex/By-pass Motor
7 Tray Lift Motor 1 15 Transfer Belt Contact Motor
8 Tray Lift Motor 2 16 Duplex Inverter Motor
M132 1-8 SM
INSTALLATION
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Installation
 Install the machine in a safe place for keeping security.
 Make sure that the operation instructions are kept at a customer's hand.
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 90°F)
Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.)
Ventilation: Room air should turn at least 30 m3/hr/person
Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10/6 oz/yd3)
SM 2-1 M132
1. Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:

1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
2. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
3. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
4. Place the main machine on a strong and level base. Inclination on any side should
be no more than 5 mm (0.2").
5. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
M132 2-2 SM
2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the main machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
Installation
 Front [A]: Over 75 cm (29.6")
 Left [B]: 10 cm (4")
 Rear [C]: 10 cm (4")
 Right [D]: 55 cm (21.7")
 The 75 cm (29.6") recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out the paper tray
only. If the operator stands at the front of the main machine, more space is required.
SM 2-3 M132
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
 Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and easily accessible. Make sure
the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
 Avoid multi-wiring.
 Be sure to ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:
North America 120 V to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A
Europe/Asia 220 V to 240V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 7 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation:
For printing images For operating
North America +8.66 / -10 % +8.66 / -15 %
Others +/-10 % +/-15 %
3. Never set anything on the power cord.
M132 2-4 SM
Main Machine Installation
2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION
2.2.1 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW

The installation procedures of the following items are in the Operating Instructions:
Main Machine and Hardware Options
Installation
 Printer M132 (main machine) Installation
 Paper Feed Unit: D580
 LCIT PB3140: D581
Controller Options
 HDD: M416
 Data Storage Card: D594
 IEEE1284 Interface Board: B679
 IEEE802.11a/g Interface Unit: M344
 Gigabit Ethernet: G874 (EU only), M394 (NA only)
 VM Card: D640
 IPDS Unit: M416
 SD Card for Netware Printing: M416
 SD Card for fonts: D641 (EU only)
 The bridge unit (D634) and either the 2,000-sheet LCT (D581) or the paper tray (D580)
must be installed before the finisher SR3120 (D636) or SR3090 (D588) is installed.
The installation procedures of the following options are in this service manual:
Hardware Options
 LCIT RT3020: D631
 Bridge Unit: D634 (for Finisher SR3120 and SR3090)
 Finisher SR3120: D636
 Punch Unit: D570 (for Finisher SR3120)
 Jogger Unit: B703 (for Finisher SR3120)
 Finisher SR3090: D588
SM 2-5 M132
2.2.2 POWER SOCKET FOR PERIPHERAL
 Rating voltage for peripheral: Make sure to plug the cable into the correct socket.
M132 2-6 SM
2.2.3 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART
Installation
2.2.4 MOVING THE MACHINE
This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See
the section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer
distance.
1. Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT.
2.2.5 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

1. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a
sheet of paper and tape.
2. Do one of the following:
 Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
 Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
SM 2-7 M132
1200-sheet LCT Installation (D631)
2.3 1200-SHEET LCT INSTALLATION (D631)
2.3.1 COMPONENT CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
No. Description Q'ty
1 Front Bracket 1
2 Rear Bracket 1
3 Stud Screw 4
4 Joint Pin 2
5 LCT 1
M132 2-8 SM
2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
 Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
 The Paper Tray Unit (D580) or LCT 2000-sheet (D581) must be installed before installing
Installation
this 1200-sheet LCT.
1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes.

2. Remove the stand covers [A].
3. Release the locks [B] of the front and rear caster stands.
4. Remove the caster stands [C].
5. Remove the paper path cover [A], connector cover [B] and six hole covers [C].
SM 2-9 M132
6. Insert the joint pins [A].

7. Attach the front [B] and rear brackets [C]. ( x2 each)
8. Pull out the front and rear rails [A], and then hang them on each bracket [B].
9. Connect the LCT cable [C] to the main machine.
10. Slide the LCT [D] into the main machine.
11. Make sure that the front and rear sides of the LCT are closely attached to the main machine.
M132 2-10 SM
2.3.3 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE

1. Open the right door of the LCT.
2. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position.
Installation
3. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] ( x 1 each).
4. Install the side fences in the correct position (A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF).
5. Pull the end fence [A] for B5 size paper as shown ( x 1) if the side fences are adjusted for
B5 size paper.
6. Close the right door.
7. Turn on the main power switch, and then go into the SP mode.
8. Input the correct paper size for the 1200-sheet LCT with SP5181-017.
SM 2-11 M132
Bridge Unit Installation (D634)
2.4 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (D634)

No. Description Q’ty
1 Bridge Unit 1
2 Frame Cover 1
3 Knob Screw 1
4 Long Knob Screw 1
5 Holder Bracket Cover 1
6 Guide 2
M132 2-12 SM
 Unplug the power cord of the main machine before starting the following procedure.
 If you will install the finisher unit (D588, D636) on the machine, install it after installing the
Installation
bridge unit (D634).
1. Remove all tapes.
2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it into the machine.
3. Remove the operation panel cover [A] ( x 1).
4. Remove the inner tray [A].
SM 2-13 M132
5. Remove the connector cover [B] ( x 1).
6. Attach the two guides [A] to the cutouts in the paper exit.
1) Place the lower hook of the guide in the cutout of the paper exit.
2) Attach the guide as shown until the two side hooks hold the paper exit.
3) Press the guide.
4) Press down the guide as shown.
M132 2-14 SM
Installation
7. Install the bridge unit [A] in the machine.
8. Secure the bridge unit with the long knob screw [A].
9. Open the bridge unit cover [A].

10. Secure the bridge unit with knob screw [B].
SM 2-15 M132
11. Attach the frame cover [A].

12. Close the bridge unit cover.
13. Reinstall the machine.
14. Install the optional finisher (refer to the finisher installation procedure).
 The holder bracket [A] is used in the installation procedure of the finisher (D588,
D636). Do not install it at this time.
15. Pull out the extension tray [A] only if the 1000-sheet finisher (D588) will be installed on the
main machine.
16. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
17. Check the bridge unit operation.
M132 2-16 SM
1000-sheet Finisher (D588)
2.5 1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588)
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
Installation
No. Description Q'ty For this model
1 Grounding Plate 1 Yes
2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 Not used
3 Front Joint Bracket 1 Yes
4 Rear Joint Bracket 1 Yes
5 Copy Tray 1 Yes
6 Screw - M3 x 8 1 Yes
7 Screw - M4 x 13 4 Yes
8 Knob Screw - M3 x 8 1 Yes
9 Knob Screw - M4 x 10 1 Yes
10 Screw - M4 x 25 3 Not used
11 Staple Position Decal 1 Not used
SM 2-17 M132
If this finisher is installed, the Bridge Unit (D634) and Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT (D581) must
be installed before installing this finisher.
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
 Be sure to keep screw [A]. It will be needed to secure the grounding plate in step 3.
M132 2-18 SM
Installation
2. Install the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2; M4 x 13) and front joint bracket [B] ( x 2; M4 x 13).
 Holder bracket [C] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [B]. This bracket is
provided with the Bridge Unit (D634).
3. Install the grounding plate [A] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 8)
SM 2-19 M132
 Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box.
4. Open the front door [B]. Then pull the locking lever [C].
5. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever.
6. Secure the locking lever ( x 1; knob M3 x 8) and close the front door.
7. Install the copy tray [D] ( x 1; knob M4 x 10).
8. Connect the finisher cable [E] to the main machine as shown above.
9. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation.
M132 2-20 SM
2.6 3000-SHEET FINISHER (D636)
2.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
Installation
1 Rear joint bracket 1
2 Front joint bracket 1
3 Ground (earth) plate 1
4 Tapping screws - M4 x14 4
5 Tapping screws - M3 x 8 1
6 Tapping screws - M3 x 6 6
7 Upper output tray 1
8 Support Tray 1
9 Cushion (with double-sided tape) 1
10 Small Ground (earth) plate 2
SM 2-21 M132
If this finisher is installed on this machine, the following options must be installed before installing
this finisher.
 Bridge Unit (D634)
 Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCIT (D581)
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher.
2. Open the front door, and then remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the
finisher.
M132 2-22 SM
Installation
3. Pull out the jogger unit [A], and then remove all tapes and retainers.
4. Attach the cushion [A] to the finisher.
 Make sure that the cushion is placed within 0 to 1 mm from the edge of the cover.
5. Install the ground plate [B] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 6).
6. Install the small ground plates [C] on the finisher( x 2; M3 x 6 each).
SM 2-23 M132
7. Attach the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2; M4 x 14).

8. Attach the front joint bracket [B] and the holder bracket [C] ( x 2; M4 x 14).
 Holder bracket [C] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [B]. This bracket is
provided with the Bridge Unit (D634).
9. Pull the lock lever [A] ( x 1).

10. Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine, keeping its front door open until the
brackets [B] [C] go into their slots.
11. Push the lock lever [A], and then secure it ( x 1).
12. Close the front door of the finisher.
13. Connect the finisher connector [D] to the machine.
M132 2-24 SM
Installation
14. Install the upper output tray [A] ( x 1; M3 x 8).
15. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
16. Check the finisher operation.
Support Tray Installation
If a stacking problem occurs several times on the upper output tray [A], put the support tray [B] on
the tray as shown.
SM 2-25 M132
Punch Unit Installation (D570)
2.7 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION (D570)
The Punch Unit D570 can be installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher D636.

1 Punch-out Waste Unit 1
2 Slide Drive Unit 1
3 Punch Waste Hopper 1
4 Wire harness: short-circuit 1
5 Screws (M3 x 6) 5
6 Side-to-Side Detection Unit 1
7 Punching Unit 1
M132 2-26 SM
 Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If the
3000-sheet finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
1. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
Installation
2. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect the power connector [A] and separate
the finisher from the machine.
3. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2) and open the front door.
 At the base of the back cover, be sure to disconnect the tabs that fasten the cover to
the frame.
4. Remove the guide plate [C] ( x 2).
SM 2-27 M132
5. Remove the shipping retainer [A] ( x 2) from the punch unit.
6. Move the punch unit [A] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that the pin engages
correctly at the front and rear.
7. Connect the cables [B] of the finisher to the connectors (CN601 and CN602) on the punch
unit board ( x 2, x 1).
 The cables [B] are coiled and attached to the PCB.
8. Attach the slide drive unit [A] to the finisher and connect it to the punch unit ( x 2, x 1).
Push in the slide drive unit at when you attach the screw .
9. Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws.
M132 2-28 SM
10. Put the side-to-side detection unit [A] in the machine. Make sure that the two pins are
engaged correctly at the front.
11. Make sure that the side-to-side detection unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make
sure that the rails are aligned with their grooves.
12. Attach the side-to-side detection unit and connect it at the rear ( x 2, x 1, x 1).
13. Pull the short connector out of the connector [B], then connect the cable of the finisher ( x
Installation
1).
 This is the 3-pin connector.
14. Connect "Wire harness: short-circuit" [A] to the CN110 connector.
15. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [A] of the cover.
16. Install the punch-waste transport unit [B] in the finisher.
17. Make sure that the punch-waste transport unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not,
make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves.
18. Remove the short connector from the connector [C].
SM 2-29 M132
 This is the 4-pin connector.

19. Connect the cable to connector [C] and attach the punch-waste transport unit ( x 1, x 1,
x 1).
20. Set the hopper [A] in its holder.

21. Reassemble the finisher, and then install it on the main machine.
22. Connect the power cord to the outlet, and then turn the main power switch on.
23. Check the punch unit operation.
M132 2-30 SM
Output Jogger Unit Installation (B703)
2.8 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT INSTALLATION (B703)
2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK LIST

Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Installation
1 Jogger Unit 1
2 Tapping Screws M3x6 2

The Output Jogger Unit B703 is installed only on the 3000-Sheet Finisher D636.
 Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following
procedures.
1. Turn the main machine switch off.
2. Disconnect the finisher from the main frame.
SM 2-31 M132
Output Jogger Unit Installation (B703)
3. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A].
4. Remove the cover plate [A] ( x 2). Keep the screws.
5. While holding the jogger unit with the connector on the left, put the hooks on the frame of the
jogger unit [A] into the holes in the left and right side of the finisher frame.
6. Connect connector [B] to the socket ( x 1).
7. Attach the jogger unit [C] to the finisher ( x 2).
8. Reattach the jogger unit cover [D] to the jogger unit ( x 2).
M132 2-32 SM
Tray Heater
2.9 TRAY HEATER
Installation
1. Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine.
2. Connect the connector [A] of the heater to the connector [B] of the main machine.
3. Install the heater [C] inside the machine ( x 1).
4. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).
SM 2-33 M132
Tray Heater
5. Release the heater relay connector [A] ( x 1).

6. Connect the heater relay connector to the connector [B] (front side) of the main frame ( x
1).
7. Reassemble the machine.
M132 2-34 SM
Tray Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit)
2.10 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER FEED UNIT)
Installation
No. Description Q'ty For this model
1 Tray heater 1 Yes
2 On-standby decal 1 Not used
3 Harness 2 1 Not used
4 Harness 1 1 Yes
5 Screw M4 x 10 2 Yes
- Installation procedure 1 Yes
SM 2-35 M132
 Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
For installing the tray heater in the D580 (Two-tray paper feed unit)
1. Pull out the two trays from the optional paper feed unit.
2. Install the tray heater [A] in the optional paper feed unit ( x 1).
3. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe.
4. Replace the shoulder screw [A] with the washer screw [B], using the securing bracket [C] (
x 1).
M132 2-36 SM
Installation
5. Remove the two securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [B] of the
optional paper feed unit ( x 2).
6. Connect the harness [A] to the connector [B] of the tray heater.
7. Route the harness [A] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
8. Connect the harness [A] to the connector [C] of the mainframe.
SM 2-37 M132
10. Release the optional heater relay connector [A] ( x 1).

11. Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector [B] (rear side) of the main frame
( x 1).
12. Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit.
For installing the tray heater in the D581 (LCT)

1. Remove the rear cover of the mainframe ( x 6).
2. Pull out the LCT drawer.
 If the right tray comes out with the left tray, push the right tray into the LCT.
3. Left tray [A] ( x 2)
M132 2-38 SM
Installation
4. Remove the right tray [A] while pressing down the stopper [B].
 When reinstalling the right tray, set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully push
the tray in, making sure to keep the tray level.
5. Install the tray heater [A] in the optional LCT ( x 1).

6. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe.
SM 2-39 M132
7. Replace the shoulder screw [A] with the washer screw [B], using the securing bracket [C] (
x 1).
8. Remove the two securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [B] of the
optional LCT ( x 2).
9. Connect the harness [A] to the connector [B] of the tray heater.
10. Route the harness [A] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
11. Connect the harness [A] to the connector [C] of the mainframe.
12. Reassemble the rear cover of the optional LCT.
M132 2-40 SM
Installation
14. Release the optional heater relay connector [A] ( x 1).
15. Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector [B] (rear side) of the main frame
( x 1).
16. Reassemble the mainframe and optional LCT.
SM 2-41 M132
External USB Keyboard Installation
2.11 EXTERNAL USB KEYBOARD INSTALLATION

Customers can use an external USB keyboard when the software keyboard is shown on the
operation panel, if an external USB keyboard is connected to the USB port at the side of the
operation panel or the controller box USB port.
If customers would like to use an external USB keyboard, execute the following steps to enable
this feature.
1. Connect the external keyboard to the USB port at the right side of the operation panel or the
controller box USB port.
 The external keyboard that is available in this machine is principally for the Windows
OS. However, no compatibility check is done, and there is no warranty.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Select “Engine” SP.
4. Select “5075 USB Keyboard”.
5. Press [10Key] to open the number entry screen.
6. Enter “1” then press [OK]. This switches the USB Keyboard feature on.
7. Exit the SP mode and turn the main power off and on.
M132 2-42 SM
External USB Keyboard Installation
Installation
8. Select a language type for the external USB keyboard with [User Tools] > [System Settings] >
[General Features] > [External Keyboard].
9. Press [OK] to set it.
10. Turn the main power off and on.
SM 2-43 M132
Controller Options
2.12 CONTROLLER OPTIONS
2.12.1 OVERVIEW
This section describes the installation procedures for controller options for M132 series machines.
Controller Options
No. Item Slots
Gigabit Ethernet Board Type A

G874
(EU only)
Gigabit Ethernet Board Type C

M394
(NA only)
IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Unit Type L Board Slot. Only one of these
-or- boards can be installed at one time.
M344 IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type M

-or-
IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type P
B679 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A
M416 IPDS Unit Type 8300 SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot)
D640 VM Card Type U SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot)
M416 SD Card for NetWare printing Type N SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot)
SD Card for Fonts Type D

D641 SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot)
(EU only)
M416 Hard Disk Drive Option Type 8300

Controller Board
D594 Memory Unit Type L 512MB
 If more than one SD card application is required, the applications must be moved to one
SD card with SP5873-1. For more details about merging applications from SD card Slot 2
(Lower Slot) to Slot 1 (Upper Slot), see “Application Merge” in this section.
M132 2-44 SM
Controller Options
Board, SD Card Slots

The machine controller box has one board slot and two SD card slots.
Only one interface board option can be installed.
Only two SD cards are available for applications and maintenance.
Installation
No. Name Description
1 USB-A Both USB slots are used for a card authentication device.
2 USB-B Built-in for connection of USB devices (USB 2.0)
3 SD Card Slot 1 For options provided on SD cards. The application SD

(Upper Slot) card can be installed in Slot 1 (Upper Slot). If two or more
applications are to be used, move the applications to the
same SD card with SP5873-1.
4 SD Card Slot 2 For servicing.

(Lower Slot)
5 Ethernet Standard LAN connection point.

100BASE-TX/10BASE-T LAN
 Orange LED: Lights when 100BASE-TX is operating.
 Green LED: Lights when 10BASE-TX is operating.
6 Board Slot Optional interface boards are installed here.
SM 2-45 M132
Controller Options
 Only two SD Card slots are available for applications.

 To install more applications, they must be moved onto one SD Card.
 Board Slot:
The following optional interface boards are available. There is only one board slot so only one
can be installed.
No. Interface Board
G874 Gigabit Ethernet Board Type A (EU)
M394 Gigabit Ethernet Board Type C (NA)
IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Unit Type L

-or-
M344 IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type M
-or-
IEEE 802.11g Interface Unit Type P
B679 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A
 Only one of these boards can be installed at one time.

 SD Card Slot:
The following options are provided on SD cards.
 Two SD card slots are available.
 Options provided on SD cards should be installed in Slot 1 (Upper Slot). If more than one
application is required, applications can be moved onto one SD card with SP5873-1.
No. SD Card Applications
M416 IPDS Unit Type 8300
M416 SD card for NetWare printing Type N
D641 SD Card for Fonts Type D (EU only)
D640 VM Card Type U
M132 2-46 SM
Controller Options
2.12.2 APPLICATION MERGE
Overview
This machine has two SD card slots only. However, more than two optional applications are
supplied for this machine. Always keep SD card Slot 2 (Lower Slot) vacant for servicing. Because
of this, SD card merge is required if a customer wants to use many applications.
Installation
The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) lets you to copy application programs from
one SD card to another SD card.
You can move application programs from Slot 2 (Lower Slot) to Slot 1 (Upper Slot).
Important Notes about SD Card Appli Move

1. Consider the following limitations when you try to merge SD cards.
The destination SD card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD cards.
Refer to the following table for the memory size of each SD card.
SD Card Options SD Card Size
IPDS Unit Type 8003 128 MB
SD card for NetWare printing Type N 128 MB
VM Card Type U 256 MB
SD Card for Fonts Type D (EU only) 128 MB
2. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD
card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the
application program from one card to another card.
3. Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer. Normal operation is
not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
SM 2-47 M132
Controller Options
4. Remove the lower inner cover [A] ( p.4-3 "Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover"),
and then keep the SD card in the place [B] after you move the application program from one
card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:
 The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application
program.
 You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
5. Before storing the card from which an application has been copied, label it carefully so that
you can identify it easily if you need to do the undo procedure later.
Move Exec
The menu “Move Exec” (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original SD
card to another SD card.
 Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on
the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1).

3. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot). The application program is
copied into this SD card.
4. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
The application program is copied from this SD card.
5. Turn the main switch on.
6. Start the SP mode.
7. Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.”
8. Touch “Execute”.
9. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
11. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
M132 2-48 SM
Controller Options

13. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
Check that the application programs run normally.
 User Tools > Printer Features > List / Test Print > Configuration Page
All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.
14. Turn the main switch off again, and then reattach the SD card slot cover.
Installation
Undo Exec
The menu “Undo Exec” (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card
to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied
some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
 Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on
the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot). The application program is copied
back into this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 1 (Upper Slot).
The application program is copied back from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-002 “Undo Exec.”
7. Touch “Execute”.
8. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
10. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
 This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the
machine.
12. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option.
13. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
Check that the application programs run normally.
 User Tools > Printer Features > List / Test Print > Configuration Page
All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.
14. Turn the main switch off again, and then reattach the SD card slot cover.
SM 2-49 M132
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PM Tables
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 PM TABLES

 PM Tables
Maintenance
Preventive
SM 3-1 M132
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
SECTION 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT REVISION HISTORY
Page Date Added/Updated/New

83 01/14/2016 Updated PSU Caution
83 ~ 84 11/25/2015 Added PSU Caution
General Cautions
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
 To avoid damage to the transfer belt, drum, or development unit when it is removed or
re-installed, never turn off power switch while electrical components are active.
 Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the
procedures in this section.
4.1.1 LASER UNIT

1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing. Doing so
would throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the factory.
and
3. The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very sensitive to dust. Do not open the optical
housing unit.
4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands.
5. After replacing the LD unit, do the laser beam pitch adjustment.
4.1.2 USED TONER

Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner into an open flame,
for toner dust may ignite.
SM 4-1 M132
Special Tools and Lubricants
4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
4.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number Description Q’ty
A2309003 Adjustment Cam – Laser Unit 1
A2309004 Positioning Pin – Laser Unit 1
B6455010 SD Card 128MB 1
B6455020 SD Card 1GB 1
G0219350 Loop Back Connector: Parallel *1 1
B6795100 Plug - IEEE1284 Type C 1
*1 “Loop Back Connector: Parallel” requires “Plug - IEEE1284 Type C”.
 A PC (Personal Computer) is required for creating the Encryption key file on an SD card
when replacing the controller board for a model in which HDD encryption has been
enabled.
4.2.2 LUBRICANTS
Part Number Description Q’ty
A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1
52039502 Silicone Grease G501 1
M132 4-2 SM
Exterior Covers
4.3 EXTERIOR COVERS
4.3.1 FRONT DOOR, UPPER AND LOWER INNER COVER

1. Left Cover ( p.4-4)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Open and remove the front door [A] (pin x 2).
Upper Inner Cover

1. Open the front door [A].
2. Upper inner cover [B] ( x 2)
Lower Inner Cover

1. Remove the front door [A] (pin x 2)
2. Shield glass cover [C]
3. Shield glass [D] ( x 2)
4. Lower inner cover [E]
SM 4-3 M132
Exterior Covers
4.3.2 LEFT COVER
1. Left cover [A] ( x 6)
4.3.3 REAR COVER
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 6)
M132 4-4 SM
Exterior Covers
4.3.4 RIGHT REAR COVER

1. Rear cover ( p.4-4)
2. Top right and top rear cover ( p.4-6)
3. Open the right door [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Right rear cover [A] ( x 4)
SM 4-5 M132
Exterior Covers
4.3.5 TOP RIGHT AND TOP REAR COVER
1. Remove the screw caps [A].

2. Top right cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Top rear cover [C] ( x 3)
4.3.6 OPERATION PANEL

2. Top right cover ( p.4-6 "Top Right and Top Rear Cover")
M132 4-6 SM
Exterior Covers
3. Operation panel cover [A] ( x 1)
4. Operation panel unit [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Operation panel bracket [A] (small x 3)
6. Operation panel [A]
SM 4-7 M132
Exterior Covers
When Installing the New Operation Panel

Do the touch screen calibration after you replace the operation panel. ( p.4-92 "Touch Screen
Calibration")
4.3.7 PAPER EXIT COVER

1. Top right cover ( p.4-6 "Top Right and Top Rear Cover")
2. Operation panel unit ( p.4-6 "Operation Panel")
3. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1)
4.3.8 OUTPUT TRAY

1. Left cover ( p.4-4)
2. Upper inner cover ( p.4-3 "Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover")
3. Paper exit cover ( p.4-8)
4. Top rear cover [A] (screw cap x 1, x 3)
M132 4-8 SM
Exterior Covers
5. Connector cover [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Inner rear cover [A] ( x 2)
7. Output tray [A]
SM 4-9 M132
Laser Unit
4.4 LASER UNIT
 Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the
procedures in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
4.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below. (See the next page for
removal instructions.)
M132 4-10 SM
Laser Unit
4.4.2 LASER UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the front door.
and
2. Front door [A] (pins x 2)
3. Upper inner cover [B] ( x 2)
4. Glass cap [C]
5. Shield glass [D]
6. Lower inner cover [E] ( x 2)
7. Laser unit connectors [E] ( x 3, x 1)
 Do not disconnect the harnesses on the LD board [F] unless the LD unit has to be
replaced. This board is precisely adjusted in the factory.
8. Laser unit [G] ( x 2)
SM 4-11 M132
Laser Unit
 When sliding out the laser unit, do not hold the LD board. Hold the laser unit.
4.4.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR
1. Laser unit ( p.4-11)

2. Laser unit cover [A] ( x 4)
3. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1)
4. After replacing the polygon mirror motor, do the image adjustment ( p.4-88 "Print
Adjustments").
4.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR

2. Laser synchronization detector [A] ( x1, x1)
M132 4-12 SM
Laser Unit
4.4.5 LD UNIT
Replacement
2. Upper spring plate [A] ( x 1)
Adjustment
3. Lower spring plate [B] ( x 1)
and
4. LD unit [C] ( x 1, x1, spring x 1)
 To avoid damaging the LD board, hold it securely when disconnecting the connectors.
Hold the laser unit casing.
5. After replacing the LD board, do the "Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment" (described in the
following section). Keep the lower inner cover removed before doing this adjustment because
you need to adjust the adjustor screw [D] on the LD unit with a screwdriver.
SM 4-13 M132
Laser Unit
Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment
1. Install a (new) LD unit [A] with the left side of the LD unit being lower than the right side. (This
makes this adjustment easier.)
2. Print the test pattern "Hounds Tooth Check (Horizontal)" (No. 16 in SP2109-001).
3. Check if the vertical stripes appear on the second pattern (counted from the leading edge) of
the printout.
 Correct: No vertical stripes appear (see the sample following this procedure.)
 Wrong: Vertical stripes appear (see the sample following this procedure.)
4. Turn the adjustor screw [B] by 90 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise).
 If the image of the printout is getting worse, try reverse rotation (clockwise
counterclockwise)
5. Print the test pattern and check it out.
6. Try steps 2 to 4 again until you get an image with no vertical stripes.
7. Reassemble the machine after completing this adjustment.
M132 4-14 SM
Laser Unit
Correct: No vertical stripes appear
Incorrect: Vertical stripes appear
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-15 M132
PCDU
4.5 PCDU
4.5.1 PCDU (PHOTOCONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT)


3. Release the lock lever [B].
4. Pull out the PCDU [C] and place it on a clean flat surface.
 When you pull out the PCDU, push the security lock [A] of the PCDU. If the lock is
not pressed, the PCDU will be stuck in the machine and cannot be pulled out
completely. The lock prevents the PCDU from coming out accidentally.
 You don’t need to push the security lock when installing a PCDU.
5. Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface.
M132 4-16 SM
PCDU
 Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid attraction to the
magnetic development roller.
Reinstallation
Open the right cover before you install the PCDU in the machine.
4.5.2 DRUM
1. Remove the PCDU ( p.4-16)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Toner cap [A]
3. Insert cap [A] into the opening of the PCDU [B].
 Make sure that the cap is inserted completely into the opening.
4. Open the PCDU [C] ( x 2).
SM 4-17 M132
PCDU
5. Bracket [D] ( x 1)
6. Pull the drum [E] towards the front (the left side in the illustration) while releasing the
charge roller [F] using the release levers [G], and then remove the drum .
 Never touch the drum surface with bare hands.
Re-installation
1. Replace the drum and close the PCDU ( x 2).
2. Put the opening cap [A in the previous procedure] back in its original place.
3. After replacing the drum, do these SPs:
 SP 2001: Charge Bias Setting – make sure that this is at the default setting
 SP 3001-2: P Sensor Initial Setting (P sensor = ID Sensor)
 SP 2805: Process Setting
 SP 2810-1: Grayscale Setting
M132 4-18 SM
PCDU
4.5.3 PICK-OFF PAWLS

1. Drum ( p.4-17)
2. Pawl assembly [A]
Replacement
3. Pick-off pawl [B] (spring x 1, spur x 1)
Adjustment
and
Pick-off Pawl Position Adjustment
If the pick-off pawl has marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can be adjusted
using either method:
 Changing the spur position
 Changing the pick-off pawl assembly position
SM 4-19 M132
PCDU
4.5.4 CHARGE ROLLER AND CLEANING ROLLER

1. Drum ( p.4-17)
2. Push the charge roller holder [A] toward the front of the drum ( x 2) and remove the spring
[B].
3. Charge roller [C].
 Disengage the charge roller on the right side to remove it. Try to avoid touching the
charge roller.
4. Cleaning roller [D]
 Disengage the cleaning roller on the left to remove it.

5. After replacing the charge roller and cleaning roller, check the value of SP2001-001. If it is not
at the standard value (1500), set SP2001-001 to "1500".
 If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the charge roller
voltage will be too high.
M132 4-20 SM
PCDU
4.5.5 DRUM CLEANING BLADE

1. Drum ( p.4-17)
2. Charge roller and cleaning roller ( p.4-20)
3. Remove drum cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
Re-installation
and
Put toner on the edge of cleaning blade and the mylar at the back side of cleaning blade before
re-installing this blade.
4.5.6 ID SENSOR
1. PCDU ( p.4-16)
2. Fusing unit ( p.4-38)
3. ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

4. ID sensor [B] ( x 1)
 Do SP3-001-002 to initialize the ID sensor after replacing.
SM 4-21 M132
Development
4.6 DEVELOPMENT
4.6.1 DEVELOPMENT FILTER

1. PCDU ( p.4-16)
2. Open the PCDU. ( p.4-17 "Drum")
3. Upper development cover [A] ( x2)

4. Development filter [B]
4.6.2 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER

1. PCDU ( p.4-16)
3. Upper development cover ( p.4-22 "Development Filter")
4. Development roller [A]
 Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
M132 4-22 SM
Development
Cleaning Procedure
1. PCDU ( p.4-16)
2. Remove the two screws [A] and open the PCDU as shown above.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Remove the upper development cover [A] ( x 2).
4. Fold up a sheet of copy paper [A] to fit the width of the uncovered area of the development
roller, as shown below.
5. Slide the paper [A] along the length of the roller to clean the toner off the surface.
SM 4-23 M132
Development
6. Rotate the development roller [A] in the direction of the arrow until the section you cleaned is
no longer visible.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have cleaned the entire surface of the roller.
8. Reassemble the PCDU and install the PCDU into the machine.
4.6.3 DEVELOPER
1. PCDU ( p.4-16)
3. Development roller ( p.4-22)
4. Joint bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

5. Development unit [B]
M132 4-24 SM
Development
6. Tip out the old developer [C].

7. Turn drive gear [D] to ensure that no developer remains in the unit or on the developer roller.
 Dispose of the used developer in accordance with local regulations. Work carefully to
avoid scratching or nicking the development roller.
8. Clean the development roller with a dry cloth.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
9. Pour approximately 1/3 of the developer [E] evenly along the length of the development unit.
10. Rotate the drive gear [F] to work the developer into the unit.
11. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until all toner is in the unit and level with the edges.
12. Re-install the development roller.
 Make sure that the seals at the both sides of the development roller are set inside the
case after you re-install the development roller.
SM 4-25 M132
Development
13. Place a piece of paper [G] over the toner entrance hole. This prevents used toner falling from
the drum into the development unit during the TD sensor initial setting and interfering with the
Vref setting (toner density reference voltage)
14. Secure the drum [H] to the development unit, to close the PCDU ( x 2).
15. Install the PCDU in the machine and close the front and right doors.
16. Turn on the main power switch, and wait for the machine to warm up.
17. Do SP2801 to initialize the TD sensor and enter the developer lot number.
18. After performing the TD sensor initial setting, remove the sheet of paper from the PCDU.
M132 4-26 SM
Development
4.6.4 TD SENSOR
1. PCDU ( p.4-16)
2. Empty all developer from the development unit. ( p.4-24 "Developer")
Replacement
3. Seal
Adjustment
4. TD sensor [A] ( x1)
and
 The TD sensor is attached to the casing with double-sided tape [B]. Pry it off with the
flat head of a screwdriver. Use fresh double-sided tape to re-attach the sensor.
5. Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial setting using
SP2-801.
 When performing the TD sensor initial setting, cover the toner entrance hole with a
piece of paper.
SM 4-27 M132
Transfer
4.7 TRANSFER
4.7.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
 To avoid exposing the drum to strong light, cover it with paper if the right cover will be
open for a long period.

2. Release the lever [B].
3. Transfer belt unit [C]
 Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.
M132 4-28 SM
Transfer
4.7.2 TRANSFER BELT

1. Transfer belt unit ( p.4-28)
2. Connector [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Remove the springs (front and rear) [B].
4. Release the hooks (front and rear) [C].
5. Transfer belt with rollers [D]
SM 4-29 M132
Transfer
6. Lay the transfer belt with rollers on a flat clean surface, and fold the unit [E] to release the
tension on the belt ( x 2).
7. Transfer belt [F]
 Avoid touching the transfer belt surface.

 Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and shafts with alcohol to
prevent the belt from slipping.
 When reinstalling the transfer belt, make sure that the belt is under the pin [F].
 To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation, manually turn the rollers and
make sure that the new transfer belt is not running over the edges of any of the
rollers.
M132 4-30 SM
Transfer
4.7.3 TONER OVERFLOW SENSOR

2. Toner overflow sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4.7.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Transfer belt ( p.4-29)
3. Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
 Avoid touching the edge of the new blade. Check the new blade for dust or damage.
SM 4-31 M132
Paper Feed
4.8 PAPER FEED
4.8.1 PAPER FEED UNIT
Tray 1 and Tray 2

1. Right rear cover ( p.4-5)
2. Duplex unit ( p.4-54)
3. Pull out tray 1 and tray 2.
4. Paper guide plate [A] (hook x 2)
5. Harness cover [A] ( x 1)
M132 4-32 SM
Paper Feed
6. Paper feed unit [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4.8.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
Tray 1 and Tray 2

1. Paper feed unit ( p.4-32)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1)
3. Pick-up roller [B]
4. Feed roller [C]
5. Separation roller [D] and torque limiter [E] ( x 1)
SM 4-33 M132
Paper Feed
4.8.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

2. Tray lift motor 1 or 2 [A] ( x 2, x 3)
M132 4-34 SM
Paper Feed
4.8.4 RELAY, TRAY LIFT, PAPER END AND PAPER FEED

SENSORS
Tray 1 and Tray 2

3. Paper feed unit ( p.4-32)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Tray lift sensor [A] ( x 1)
5. Paper end feeler [B] and paper end sensor [C] (hook, x 1 each)
6. Relay sensor bracket [D] ( x 1)
7. Relay sensor [E] ( x 1, hook)
8. Paper feed sensor bracket [F] ( x 1)
9. Paper feed sensor [G] ( x 1, hook)
SM 4-35 M132
Paper Feed
4.8.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR

3. Paper feed unit for tray 1 ( p.4-32 "Paper Feed Unit")
4. Paper Trays 1 and 2
5. Paper dust box [A]

7. Pull out the paper dust container [B].
8. Remove two screws [C].
M132 4-36 SM
Paper Feed
 This makes the paper guide [D] tilt a little bit. Now you can access the screw [E].
9. Dust container rail [F] ( [E] x 1)
10. Sensor bracket [G] ( x 1)
 You can only access the screw on the sensor bracket from the inside (paper tray
location) of the machine.
11. Registration sensor [H] ( x 1, hooks)
Reinstall the registration sensor

It is very difficult to secure the sensor bracket to the frame. First attach the sensor bracket with
tape temporarily.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-37 M132
Fusing
4.9 FUSING
4.9.1 FUSING UNIT
 Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of
the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns.
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Open the right door.
3. Pull up the lock levers [A].

4. Pull the fusing unit [B] until you hear a click.
 The lock levers lock the fusing unit again at this time to prevent the fusing unit from
falling down.
5. Pull up the lock levers [A] again, and then remove the fusing unit [B].
M132 4-38 SM
Fusing
4.9.2 WEB ROLLER UNIT

2. Web roller unit [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-39 M132
Fusing
4.9.3 BRAKE PAD

1. Web roller unit ( p.4-39)
2. Web left cover [A] ( x 1, stepped screw x 3)

3. Web top frame [B] ( x 2)
4. Web left frame [C] ( x 2)

5. Brake pad [D]
M132 4-40 SM
Fusing
4.9.4 WEB HOLDER ROLLER AND WEB ROLLERS

2. Web left cover ( p.4-40 "Brake Pad")
3. Web top frame ( p.4-40 "Brake Pad")
4. Web left frame ( p.4-40 "Brake Pad")
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Front gear bracket [A] ( x 2)
and
6. All gears and bushings (rear side) [B] ( x 2)
7. Rear gear bracket [C] ( x 2)

8. All gear and bushings (rear side) [D] ( x 2, spring x 1)
9. Front bracket [E] ( x 2)
SM 4-41 M132
Fusing
10. Web holder roller [F] (holder x 2, spring x 2)

11. Web take up roller [G] ( )
12. Web supply roller [H] ( )
Installing a new web holder roller
The holder [A] has a one-way clutch. Make sure that the holder [A] is set at the front side.
M132 4-42 SM
Fusing
Installing new web rollers
1. Install the web supply roller [A] first ( ). Make sure that the web sheet is under the pin
[B].
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Install the web take up roller [C] ( ). Make sure that the printed number [D] is outside
and
the web take up roller.
3. Reinstall the rear gear bracket ( p.4-41 "Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers").
4. Reinstall the front and rear gears and bushings ( p.4-41 "Web Holder Roller and Web
Rollers").
5. Reinstall the rear gear bracket ( p.4-41 "Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers").
6. Turn the rear gear [E] in the arrow direction to remove the slack in the web sheet.
7. Reinstall the front gear bracket [F] ( p.4-41 "Web Holder Roller and Web Rollers").
8. Turn the coupling [G] in the arrow direction to remove the slack in the web sheet.
9. Reinstall the web unit.
10. If you install a new cleaning web, reset SP 7806-008 (press "Execute" on the LCD).
SM 4-43 M132
Fusing
4.9.5 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER

2. Fusing exit guide [A] (lock x 2)

3. Fusing front upper cover [B] ( x 3)
4. Fusing rear upper cover [C] ( x 3)
5. Fusing outer guide [D] (front: x 1, rear: stepped screw x 1)
6. Cleaning roller unit [E] ( x 4)

7. Pressure roller cleaning roller [F] (spring x 2, holder x 2)
M132 4-44 SM
Fusing
4.9.6 THERMOSTATS
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Fusing top cover [A] (front: x 1, rear: stepped screw x 1)
and
4. Thermostat holder [B] ( x 2)
5. Thermostat cover [C] ( x 2)
6. Thermostat [D] (terminal x 2)
SM 4-45 M132
Fusing
4.9.7 THERMISTOR
3. Fusing top cover ( p.4-45 "Thermostats")
4. Pull the two tabs [A].

5. Disconnect the two terminals [B].
6. Sensor stays [C] ( x 1 each)
7. Thermistors [D] ( x 2, x 1)
M132 4-46 SM
Fusing
4.9.8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS

Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Fusing top frame [A] ( x 5)
 The cords on this frame are still connected to the fusing unit at this time. Be careful
not to damage the cords when removing the hot roller stripper [B].
5. Hot roller stripper [B] (spring x 1)
SM 4-47 M132
Fusing
4.9.9 FUSING LAMPS

4. Connector cover [A] ( x 2)

5. Fusing top frame with connector [B] ( x 9)
6. Fusing front lower cover [C] ( x 2)

7. Fusing front frame [D] ( x 3)
8. Fusing rear lower cover [E] ( x 2)
9. Fusing rear frame [F] ( x 5)
M132 4-48 SM
Fusing
10. Terminal bracket [G] ( x 4)

11. Front holder bracket [H] ( x 1)
12. Terminal base [I] ( x 3)
13. Rear holder bracket [J] ( x 1)
14. Fusing lamp-Center (550W) [K]
Replacement
Adjustment
15. Fusing lamp-End (750W) [L]
and
SM 4-49 M132
Fusing
4.9.10 HOT ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER

1. Fusing lamps-Center and End ( p.4-48 "Fusing Lamps")
2. Hot roller [A] (snap ring x 2, gear x 2, bushing x 2)

3. Pressure roller [B] ( x 2, bushing x 2)
M132 4-50 SM
Paper Exit
4.10 PAPER EXIT
4.10.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT

2. Fusing exhaust fan duct ( p.4-84 "Fusing Exhaust Fan")
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Paper exit unit [A] ( x 3, x 2)
SM 4-51 M132
Paper Exit
4.10.2 FUSING EXIT, PAPER OVERFLOW, AND PAPER EXIT

SENSORS
1. Paper exit unit ( p.4-51)

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Paper exit sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
4. Paper overflow sensor [C] ( x 1, hooks)
5. Sensor bracket [D] ( x 2)
6. Fusing exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 1)
M132 4-52 SM
Paper Exit
4.10.3 JUNCTION JAM SENSOR

2. Paper guide [A] ( x 3)
Replacement
3. Junction jam sensor [B] ( x 1)
Adjustment
and
4.10.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR
2. Motor cover [A] ( x 1)

3. Exit motor [B] ( x 2, x 2, x 1)
SM 4-53 M132
Duplex
4.11 DUPLEX
4.11.1 DUPLEX UNIT

2. Open the lower right cover [A] at the duplex unit.

3. Release the tab [B] and remove the lower door (spring x 2).
5. Release the front link [C] ( x 1).
6. Keep the right door fully open.
M132 4-54 SM
Duplex
7. Push up the duplex unit a little bit, while pressing the bracket [D] to lock the spring [E].
 Do not let the duplex unit open fully before releasing the wire (step 8). Otherwise, the
lock for the spring [E] is released.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
8. Wire [F] ( x 1)
9. Push the projection [G].
10. Duplex unit ( x 3, x 1, ground cable x 1)
SM 4-55 M132
Duplex
4.11.2 RIGHT DOOR COVER
1. Open the duplex door [A] and by-pass tray.
2. Right door cover [A] ( x 4)
M132 4-56 SM
Duplex
4.11.3 DUPLEX DOOR SENSOR

1. Right door cover ( p.4-56)
2. Duplex door sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
4.11.4 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Duplex entrance guide [A] ([B]: x1, [C]: Stepped screw x 2)
4. Duplex entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
SM 4-57 M132
Duplex
5. Duplex entrance sensor [A] (hooks)
4.11.5 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR

2. Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3)
3. Remove the shaft [B] ( x 1).
M132 4-58 SM
Duplex
4. Transfer belt unit holder [C] ( x 1, x 1)
 When re-installing the transfer belt unit holder, make sure that the spring [D] correctly
hooks onto the frame.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Guide plate [E] (two hooks)
6. Duplex exit sensor [F] ( x 1, hooks)
SM 4-59 M132
Duplex
4.11.6 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR

3. Frame [A] ( x 4)
4. Duplex/By-pass motor bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
5. Duplex/By-pass motor [C] ( x 4, bushing x 8, timing belt x 1)
M132 4-60 SM
Duplex
4.11.7 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR

Replacement
Adjustment
3. Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3)
and
4. Duplex door [B]

5. Duplex guide plate [C] ( x 3)
SM 4-61 M132
Duplex
6. Bracket [D] ( x 2)
7. Duplex inverter motor [E] ( x 3, x 1)
M132 4-62 SM
By-pass
4.12 BY-PASS
4.12.1 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR/BY-PASS PAPER LENGTH

SENSOR
1. Open the lower right cover [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Disconnect the connector and clamp.
3. Open the by-pass tray [A].
SM 4-63 M132
By-pass
4. Move the side fences to the center.

5. By-pass tray cover [A] ( x 4)
6. By-pass paper size sensor [A] ( x 1)

7. By-pass paper length sensor [B] ( x 1)
M132 4-64 SM
By-pass
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor
1. Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered).
2. Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the
projection [C] of the left side fence bar.
4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Check this switch operation with SP5803-024 (By-pass: Paper Size Sensor< Input Check).
and
- Display on the LCD -
Paper Size Display Paper Size Display
A3 SEF 00001110 A5 SEF 00001011
B4 SEF 00001100 B6 SEF 00000011
A4 SEF 00001101 A6 SEF 00000111
B5 SEF 00001001 Smaller A6 SEF 00001111
SM 4-65 M132
By-pass
4.12.2 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR

2. By-pass feed unit cover [A] ( x 2).

3. By-pass paper end sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
4.12.3 BY-PASS PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER,

TORQUE LIMITER
2. By-pass feed unit cover ( p.4-66 "By-pass Paper End Sensor")
3. By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook)

4. By-pass feed roller [B] ( x 1)
5. By-pass separation roller [C] ( x 1)
6. Torque limiter [D]
M132 4-66 SM
By-pass
4.12.4 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH

2. Right door rear cover ( p.4-58 "Duplex Exit Sensor")
4. Transfer belt unit holder ( p.4-58 "Duplex Exit Sensor")
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. By-pass feed clutch holder [A] ( x 2)
6. By-pass feed clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1)
SM 4-67 M132
Drive Area
4.13 DRIVE AREA
4.13.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH
Tray 1 and Tray 2

2. Clutch bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, bushing x 1)

3. Paper feed clutch [B] ( x 1)
4.13.2 DEVELOPMENT PADDLE MOTOR

2. Development paddle motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
M132 4-68 SM
Drive Area
4.13.3 TRANSFER/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR

Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Transfer/development motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
4.13.4 DRUM MOTOR

2. Drum motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
SM 4-69 M132
Drive Area
4.13.5 FUSING MOTOR

2. Fusing motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
M132 4-70 SM
Drive Area
4.13.6 WEB MOTOR

2. Bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Web motor [A] ( x 1)
SM 4-71 M132
Drive Area
4.13.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR

3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4.13.8 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR

3. Transfer belt contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
M132 4-72 SM
Drive Area
4.13.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR

Replacement
3. Registration motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1)
Adjustment
4. Registration motor [B] ( x 2, x 1)
and
SM 4-73 M132
Drive Area
4.13.10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR

2. Upper inner cover ( p.4-3 "Front Door, Upper and Lower Inner Cover")
3. Output Tray ( p.4-8)
4. Exhaust duct [A] ( x 2)

5. Toner supply motor [B] (hooks, x 1)
M132 4-74 SM
Electrical Components
4.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
4.14.1 CONTROLLER UNIT
1. Controller unit [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
4.14.2 CONTROLLER BOARD
Adjustment
and
 The battery on the control board can explode if replaced incorrectly.
 Dispose of the old battery in accordance with the instructions.
Before Replacing the Controller Board in the Model without HDD

When you replace the controller board in a machine without a HDD, address book data can be
copied from an old controller board to a new controller board using an SD card.
Copy the address book data to an SD card from the flash ROM on the controller board with
SP5846-051 if possible.
Replacement Procedure
1. Controller unit ( p.4-75)
2. HDD unit (if it has been installed.)
SM 4-75 M132
3. Controller right bracket [A] ( x 4)
4. Controller board assembly [A] ( x 4)
5. NVRAM [A]
6. Interface rails [B] (hooks each)
7. DIMM-RAM (If it is installed.)
8. Controller board [C]
M132 4-76 SM
When Installing the New Controller Board
1. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old controller board.

2. Install it on the new controller board after you replace the controller board.
3. Replace the NVRAM if the NVRAM on the old controller board is defective.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board. Insert the
NVRAM in the NVRAM slot with the “half-moon” pointing [B] to the right side.
 Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP (Mode Data List)" and "Logging Data")
before you replace the NVRAM.
 Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity
can damage NVRAM data.
 Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board.
 Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old controller board are the same for
the new controller board. Do not change the DIP switches on the controller board in
the field.
4.14.3 AFTER INSTALLING THE CONTROLLER BOARD

1. For a model without a HDD, do SP5846-052 to copy back the address book to the flash ROM
on the controller board from the SD card to which you have already copied the address book
data if possible.
2. If the customer is using the data encryption feature, the encryption key must be restored.
3. Do the touch screen calibration. ( p.4-92 "Touch Screen Calibration")
4. Turn the main power switch off/on.
SM 4-77 M132
4.14.4 MOTHER BOARD

2. Controller unit ( p.4-75)
3. Exhaust fan duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4. Screw of the top rear cover ( x 1)
M132 4-78 SM
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Controller box [A] ( x 8, x 4, x 3)
6. Controller light bracket [A] ( x 2)
SM 4-79 M132
7. Controller box right cover [A] ( x 4)
8. Mother board bracket [A] ( x 1, hook x 2)
9. Mother board [A] ( x 6)
M132 4-80 SM
4.14.5 BCU
1. Controller box ( p.4-78 "Mother Board")
2. BCU [A] ( x 4, x 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Remove the NVRAM [A] from the old board and install it on the new board.
4. Set the DIP switches on the new BCU board to the same settings as the old board.
 Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in the
NVRAM slot with the "half-moon" pointing [B] to the left side.
When installing the new BCU

1. Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU.
2. Install the NVRAM on the new BCU after you replace the BCU.
4. Turn on the main power switch.
5. Enter the serial number with SP5-811-004.
6. Turn the main power switch off and on.
7. Do the touch screen calibration. ( p.4-92 "Touch Screen Calibration")
SM 4-81 M132
 Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP (Mode Data List)" and "Logging Data")
before you replace the NVRAM.
 Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage NVRAM data.
4.14.6 BRIDGE BOARD

2. Bridge board [A] ( x 6, x 7)
4.14.7 IOB
2. IOB [A] ( x 6, x all)
M132 4-82 SM
Rev. 01/14/2016 Electrical Components
4.14.8 PSU
⇒
NEVER touch the areas outlined in red in the photos below to prevent electric shock caused by
residual charge.
Residual charge of about 100V-400V remains on the PSU board for several months even when
the board has been removed from the machine after turning off the machine power and
unplugging the power cord.
The areas outlined in red on the bracket mean

the residual charge of about 100V-400V
remains on the PSU board under the bracket.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. PSU [A] ( x 4, x all)

3. Two clamps [B] (These clamps will be used for the new PSU.)
4.14.9 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

SM 4-83 M132
Electrical Components Rev. 11/25/2015
3. High voltage power supply board [A] ( x 5, x all)
4.14.10 FUSING EXHAUST FAN

2. Fusing exhaust duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)

3. Separate the duct (hooks).
4. Fusing exhaust fan [B]
When installing the fusing exhaust fan

Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine.
4.14.11 CONTROLLER FAN

2. Fan cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Controller fan [B] ( x 1)
When installing the controller fan

Make sure that the controller fan is installed with its decal facing upward.
M132 4-84 SM
4.14.12 SD USB BOARD

1. Operation panel ( p.4-6)
2. SD USB board bracket [A] (small x 2, x 2, x 3)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. SD USB board [A] ( x 3)
SM 4-85 M132
4.14.13 LCDC BOARD

1. SD USB Board ( p.4-85)
2. Operation panel inner bracket [A] (small x 4)
3. LCDC bracket [A] (small x 6)
M132 4-86 SM
4. LCDC board [A] (small x 4, x 3)
When Installing the New LCDC Board

Do the touch screen calibration after you replace the LCDC board. ( p.4-92 "Touch Screen
Calibration")
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-87 M132
Print Adjustments
4.15 PRINT ADJUSTMENTS
4.15.1 OVERVIEW
Perform these adjustments after replacing any of the following:
 Polygon Mirror Motor
 Paper Side Fence
 Memory All Clear
4.15.2 PRINTING
1. Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments.
2. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-1, No. 14) to print the test pattern for the following
procedures.
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
1. Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper type and paper feed station, and adjust
it with following SP modes.
SP No. Specification
Tray: Plain SP1-001-1
Tray: Thick 1 SP1-001-2
Tray: Thick 2 SP1-001-3 0 ±9.0 mm
By-pass: Plain SP1-001-4
By-pass: Thick 1 SP1-001-5
M132 4-88 SM
Print Adjustments
By-pass: Thick 2 SP1-001-6
Duplex: Plain SP1-001-7
Duplex: Thick 1 SP1-001-8
2. Check side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust with the following
SP modes.
By-pass SP1-002-1
Tray 1 SP1-002-2
Replacement
Tray 2 SP1-002-3
Adjustment
and
Tray 3 SP1-002-4 0 ±4.0 mm
Tray 4 SP1-002-5
LCT SP1-002-6
Duplex SP1-002-7
Blank Margin
 If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within specifications,

adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
SM 4-89 M132
Print Adjustments
1. Check the trailing edge [A], right edge [B], leading edge [C] and left edge [D] blank margins,
and adjust them with the following SP modes.
Leading Edge SP2-103-1

3.0 mm [0.0 to 9.0 mm]
Trailing Edge SP2-103-2
Left SP2-103-3
2.0 mm [0.0 to 9.0 mm]
Right SP2-103-4
Duplex: Trailing Edge:

SP2-103-5 1.0 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
L Size: Plain

SP2-103-6 0.8 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
M Size: Plain

SP2-103-7 0.6 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
S Size: Plain
Duplex: Left: Plain SP2-103-8

0.3 mm [0.0 to 1.5 mm]
Duplex: Right: Plain SP2-103-9

SP2-103-10 0.8 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
L Size: Thick

SP2-103-11 0.6 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
M Size: Thick

SP2-103-12 0.4 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm]
S Size: Thick
Duplex: Left: Thick SP2-103-13

0.1 mm [0.0 to 1.5 mm]
Duplex: Right: Thick SP2-103-14
 L Size: Paper length is 297.1 mm or more.

 M Size: Paper length is 216.1 to 297 mm
 S Size: Paper length is 216 mm or less.
M132 4-90 SM
Print Adjustments
Main Scan Magnification

1. Use SP2-109-001 no 5 (Grid Vertical Line) to print a single dot pattern.
2. Check magnification, and then SP2-102-001 (Magnification Adjustment Main Scan) to adjust
magnification if required. Specification: ±1%.
Parallelogram Image Adjustment

Do the following procedure if a parallelogram prints while adjusting the printing registration or
printing margin using a trimming area pattern.
The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side registration for each
paper tray station.
Use SP2-109-001 No. 14 (Trimming Area) to determine whether a parallelogram image appears.
If the parallelogram pattern appears, perform the following procedure.
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Laser unit [A] and
2. Bracket [B] ( x2)

3. Install adjustment cam [C] (P/N: A2309003).
4. Secure positioning pin [D] (P/N A2309004) with the two screws removed with the bracket [B].
Do not tighten the screws at this time.
5. To adjust the position of the laser unit [E]
1) Adjust the laser unit position by turning the adjustment cam. (See the illustration above.)
2) Tighten the adjustment bracket.
3) Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If the results are not satisfactory, repeat
steps 5-1) to 5-3).
SM 4-91 M132
Print Adjustments
4.15.3 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

Do the following procedure to calibrate the touch screen after you clear the memory, replace the
operation panel, LCDC board or NVRAM, or if the touch panel detection function is not working
correctly.
 Do not attempt to use items [2] to [5], and [7] on the Self Diagnostic Menu. These items
are for design use only.
1. Turn on the main switch.
2. Press the “Simple Screen” key 4 times, the “Suspend” key one time, and then the “Simple
Screen” key 4 times to open the Self Diagnostic menu.
3. On the touch panel screen, press “[1] Touch Screen Adjust”.
4. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the mark that appears in the upper left, lower right,
lower left, center, and upper right in turns on the LCD panel.
5. Press “[#] OK”.

6. Press “[6] Touch Screen Test” on the Self Diagnostic menu.
M132 4-92 SM
Print Adjustments
Replacement
Adjustment
7. Touch the nine points circled in red in the illustration above, and make sure that each point
and
(both x and y) is within +/- 5 dots of the original “+” displayed.
8. When you are finished, press “[#] OK” on the screen.

9. Touch “[#] Exit” on the screen to close the Self Diagnostic menu and save the calibration
settings.
SM 4-93 M132
SERVICE TABLES
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
1 01/15/2013 Added Entering SP Mode.
72 5/9/2013 SP5749 Import/Export
98 2/25/2014 SP7952
187 ~ 193 5/9/2013 SP5749 Import/Export
Rev. 01/14/2013 Service Program Mode
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
 Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED
indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the
machine to process the data.
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate
the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that
work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then
set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > [System Settings] > [Administrator Tools] > [Service Mode Lock] > [OFF]
 This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
 The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on.
Service
It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is
Tables
turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1".
3. After machine servicing is completed:
 Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
 Turn the machine off and on.
 Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
 The administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
⇒ 5.1.2 ENTERING SP MODES
If The Power is Already On:

Press the "Home" and “Simple screen" keys at the same time for more than 3 seconds,
and then press the "User tool" key.
If The Power is Already Off:

Press the "Home" and "Suspend" keys at the same time while turning the main switch on.
SM 5-1 M132
Service Program Mode
5.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

Please note these general changes in this section:
 Group 8 (Data Log 2) is a new group of counters.
 Along with the addition of Group 8, many of the Group 7 counters have been removed.
Service Table Key
Notation What it means
Example: [-9 to +9 / 0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be

adjusted in the range ±9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM
[range / default / step]
reset, and the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with
each key press.
Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value

*
(factory setting) is restored.
DFU Denotes "Design or Factory Use". Do not change this value.
The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this

Japan only
value.
SSP This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode.
M132 5-2 SM
Service Program Mode Tables
5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5.2.1 SP TABLES
There are the most commonly used SP codes in the “Service Main SP Tables” and "Engine Main
SP Tables - 1 to - 9" of "Main Chapters".
 Service SP Tables
 Engine SP Tables
Service
Tables
SM 5-3 M132
Service Main SP Tables
5.3 SERVICE MAIN SP TABLES
5.3.1 SP1-XXX
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will
never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the
edges of the printable area.
M132 5-4 SM
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Normal

Collate Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not
already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
 If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
Service
Tables
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as

HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")
will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
SM 5-5 M132
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Increases printing speed but simplex pages may be printed on the
back side of the sheet.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 IPDS support tools 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Enables the port for IPDS support tools.
M132 5-6 SM
1001 Bit Switch
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and

"Punch Type" buttons on the operation Disable Enable
panel.
bit 0 If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and
Punch Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on
the device and configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type 0: Disable

1: Enable
mismatch occurs (Single
(Multiple copy)
copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple

copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this Bit Switch, the
device can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch
occurs.
Service
Tables
bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering
0: Disable 1: Enable
the contents of a job
If this switch is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print
data. This is achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a
module called the "GPS Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this switch is for troubleshooting the effects of
SDK applications on data.
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
SM 5-7 M132
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs Disable Enable (1000)
to 1000 jobs. (100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the
HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 Method for determining the image

rotation for the edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation
jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 1: Enable
Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable
(Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.

If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex
job are not routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems
with letterhead/pre-printed pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.
1001 Bit Switch
006 Bit Switch 6 DFU - -
M132 5-8 SM
1001 Bit Switch
Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only)

bit 0 and the last page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are
always routed through the duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths
increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 3
PCL edge to edge printing setting 0: Disable 1: Enable

(Standard) (BMS)
Service
Tables
bit 4
Switches the edge to edge printing setting for custom-made machines
(BMS).
bit 5
DFU - -
to 7
SM 5-9 M132
1001 Bit Switch
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs

"Disabled "Enabled
submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE
(Immediately)" (10 seconds)"
1284).
bit 0
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device
whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled

Enabled
(Not
(Cancelled)
cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might
result in problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation

(SEF/LEF)
This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous

generations. It only takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" =
"Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the
bypass tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch,
the MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by
the MFP bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
bit 4 Response to PJL USTATUS when

multiple collated copies are printed
M132 5-10 SM
When enabled, if multiple collated copies are printed, the device no longer
responds to PJL USTATUS with the number of pages in the current copy.
Instead the device will return the total number of pages for all copies.
Bit 5 DFU
- -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 4
bit 5 List / Test Print Lock 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, you can lock or unlock the [List/Test Print] items under the
Pinter Features menu when the Store and Skip Errored Job Function is
on.
Bit 6 Optional charge machines - -
If enabled, you can use the optional charge

machines when the Store and Skip Errored 0: Disable 1: Enable
Service
Tables
Job Function is on.
Bit 7 DFU - -
SM 5-11 M132
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 List / Test Print menu 0: Disable 1: Enable
When enabled, the [Multiple Lists] menu is displayed in [List / Test Print]
under the Printer Features menu.
bit 1 Interrupt printing 0: Job 1: Page
Selects the units for the interrupt printing function.

When you select "0," you can interrupt printing of a job while being
processed.
When you select "1," you can interrupt printing of a page while being
processed.
Bit 2 DFU
- -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 7
1003 [Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System

1003 001
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1003 003 Delete Program
1004 [Print Summary]
Print Printer Summary

1004 001
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
M132 5-12 SM
1005 [Display Version]
Printer Version
1005 002
Displays the version of the printer application.
1007 [Supply Info.]
[0 to 1 / 1 ]
1007 001 0: Displays the info.
1: Does not display the info.
1110 [Media Print Device Setting]
1110 002 0: Disable 1: Enable Selects the setting for the media print device.
1111 [All Job Delete Mode]
Select whether to include an image

0: Excluding New Job
1111 001 processing job in jobs subject to full
1: Including New Job
cancellation from the SCS job list.
Service
Tables
SM 5-13 M132
Engine Main SP Tables-1
5.4 ENGINE MAIN SP TABLES-1
5.4.1 SP1-XXX: FEED
Leading Edge Registration
1001* Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch
operation timing.
001 Tray: Plain
002 Tray: Thick 1
003 Tray: Thick 2
004 By-pass: Plain

[–9 to 9/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 By-pass: Thick 1
007 Duplex: Plain
008 Duplex: Thick 1
Side-to-Side Registration
1002* Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the laser main scan start
position for each mode.
001 By-pass
002 Tray 1
003 Tray 2
004 Tray 3 [–4 to 4/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 Tray 4
006 LCT
007 Duplex
M132 5-14 SM
Registration Buckle Adjustment
1003* Adjusts the paper feed motor timing. Paper feed motor timing determines
the amount of paper buckle at Registration. (A "+" setting causes more
buckling.)
001 Tray 1: Plain
002 Tray 1: Thick 1
003 Tray 1: Thick 2

[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
004 Tray 2, 3, 4: Plain
005 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick1
006 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick2
007 By-pass: Plain
008 By-pass: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -2 /1 mm step]
010 Duplex: Plain [-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
011 Duplex: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -3 / 1 mm step]
Service
Tables
012 LCT: Plain
013 LCT: Thick1 [-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
014 LCT: Thick2
By-pass Paper Size Detection

1007*
Controls paper size detection for the by-pass feed table.
001 Detection Timing [-15 to 15 / 0 / 5 mm step]
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 LG Detection
0: LT SEF, 1: LG
SM 5-15 M132
Fusing Temperature Adjustment
Allows adjustment of the hot roller temperature at the center and ends of the
roller for the quality or thickness of the paper. The hot roller in this machine
has two fusing lamps: one heats the center of the roller, the other heats both
1105* ends. Each fusing lamp can be adjusted separately.
The "re-load temperature" is the "print ready temperature". When the fusing
temperature exceeds this setting, the machine can operate. Do not set up a
re-load temperature (Re-load Temp. = Fusing. Temp – SP Value.) that is
higher than the SP1-105-2 setting.
Roller Center [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]

001
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller.
Roller Ends [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]

002
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller.
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Center [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller. This setting
depends on the target temperature.
003 Reload temp. = Target Temp – This SP Setting
 Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 1
(Roller Center: Trays)
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Ends [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the ends of the hot roller. This setting depends
on the target temperature.
(Roller Ends: Trays)
005 to The following SPs adjust the fusing temperature at the center or ends of the
022 hot roller for each paper type.
005 Roller Center: M-Thick [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
M132 5-16 SM
006 Roller Ends: M-Thick [100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg]
007 Roller Center: Thick 1

[100 to 170 / 130 / 1 deg]
008 Roller Ends: Thick 1

[100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
010 Wait Temp: Center Minus
011 Wait Temp: Ends Minus [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
012 Roller Ends: Thin [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
013 Roller Center: OHP: Plain [100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
014 Roller Ends: OHP: Plain

[100 to 170 / 155/ 1 deg]
015 Roller Center: OHP: Thick
016 Roller Ends: OHP: Thick [100 to 170 / 160/ 1 deg]
017 Roller Center: Special 1 [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]
018 Roller Ends: Special 1 [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
Service
Tables
023 Feed Waiting: Plain Turns the feed waiting mode on or off for
each paper type.
024 Feed Waiting: M-Thick
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025 Feed Waiting: Thick 1 0=Off, 1=On
The paper waits at the registration roller
026 Feed Waiting: Thick 2
until the fusing temperature reaches the
prescribed temperature (adjustable with
SP1105-028 to -37).
027 Feed Waiting: Thin If you enable this feature, also set SP
1105-38 to a convenient value for the
customer.
SM 5-17 M132
028 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Plain
029 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Plain
030 Feed Wait: Center Minus: M-Thick
031 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: M-Thick

Adjusts the offset value for each re-load
032 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 1 temperature to exit the feed waiting
033 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 1 mode.

[0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
034 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 2
035 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 2
036 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thin
037 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thin
Sets the maximum feed waiting time.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]
The paper is fed when the time specified
038 Feed Waiting: Maximum Time with this SP has passed even though the
fusing temperature has not reached the
prescribed temperature.
0: Disabled.
1106 Fusing Temperature Display
001 Roller Center Displays the temperature of the fusing

unit.
002 Roller Ends [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
003 Machine Inside at Power On Displays the temperature inside the

machine.
004 Machine Inside [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
M132 5-18 SM
MotorSpeedAdjust
Adjusts the speeds of each motor. Each step decreases or increases motor
speed in 0.05% increments
Regist: Registration motor, Feed: Feed motor,
1801* Duplex: Duplex/By-pass motor, Inverter: Duplex inverter motor,
Exit: Paper exit motor, Bridge: Bridge unit drive motor,
OpcMot: Drum motor, TransferMot: Transfer/Development Motor,
FusingMot: Fusing motor,
DevPuddleMot: Development Paddle motor
001 Regist: 90: Thick 2

[-2 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.05 %]
003 Regist: 180: Plain
005 Feed: 90: Thick 2

[-2 to 2 / -0.4 / 0.05 %]
007 Feed: 180: Plain
Service
Tables
[-2 to 2 / -1 / 0.05 %]
009 Duplex_CW: 90: Thick 2

[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
011 Duplex_CW: 180: Plain

[-4 to 4 / -2.3 / 0.1 %]
013 Duplex_CCW: 90: Thick 2

[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]
015 Duplex_CCW: 180: Plain

[-4 to 4 / -0.2 / 0.1 %]
017 Inverter_CW: 90: Thick 2

[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
SM 5-19 M132
019 Inverter_CW: 180: Plain
021 Inverter_CCW: 90: Thick 2
023 Inverter_CCW: 180: Plain
025 Exit_CW: 90: Thick 2
027 Exit_CW: 180: Plain
029 Bridge: 90: Thick 2
031 Bridge: 180: Plain
033 OpcMot:90
034 OpcMot:154
035 OpcMot:180
036 OpcMot:230
037 TransferMot:90
038 TransferMot:154 [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %]
039 TransferMot:180
040 TransferMot:230
041 FusingMot:90
042 FusingMot:154
043 FusingMot:180
M132 5-20 SM
044 FusingMot:230
045 DevPuddleMot [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
1902* Cleaning Web Setting
Web Consumption [0 to 120 / 0 / 1 %]

001
Displays the consumed amount of the web roll.
Web Motor Interval [3 to 130 / 6.7 / 0.1 sec]

002
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation.
Web Motor Time [0.3 to 10 / 4.2 / 0.1 sec]

003
Adjusts the rotation time of the web motor.
EU [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %]
Web Near End Setting
004 ASIA/NA [0 to 100 / 92 / 1 %]
Adjusts the threshold for web near end.
Web Motor Interval: Thick 1 [3 to 130 / 11.2 / 0.1 sec]

005
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation (thick 1).
Service
Tables
006
Paper Interval Time [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]
007 Adjusts the threshold for paper feeding. When the time between trailing
edge detection and leading edge detection is within the value of this setting,
the machine determines that the paper is still being fed.
Web Motor Setting: Web End [0 to 60 / 27 / 1 sec]

008
Adjusts the motor rotation time after the web end.
Web Motor Rotation: Power On [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 times]

009
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the re-load state.
SM 5-21 M132
Web Motor Interval: Pre-idle [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]

010
Adjusts the motor waiting time after the fusing motor idling.
Web Motor Rotation: Pre-idle [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 times]

011
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the fusing idling state.
Tray Lock at Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON

1950*
Not used
M132 5-22 SM
5.5.1 SP2-XXX: DRUM
2005* Bias Control
Bias Correction 1 [0.1 to 1 / 0.85 / 0.05 step]
001 Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction.
When the value of VSDP/VSG is greater than this value, the charge roller
voltage increases by 30 V (e.g., from –500 to –530).
002 Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction.
voltage decreases by 30 V (absolute value).
Bias Adjustment 1 [1000 to 2000 / 1500 / 10 vol]

003
Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction.
Service
Tables
004
Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction.

005
Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size.
Erase Margin Adjustment
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.

2103* L Size: 297.1 mm or more (length)
M Size: 216.1 to 297 mm (length)
S Size: 216 mm or less (length)
001 Leading Edge

[0 to 9 / 3 / 0.1mm]
002 Trailing Edge
003 Left [0 to 9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
SM 5-23 M132
004 Right
005 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
006 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
007 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
008 Duplex Left: Plain

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
009 Duplex Right: Plain
010 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
011 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
012 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1mm]
013 Duplex Left: Thick

[0 to 1.5 / 0.1 / 0.1mm]
014 Duplex Right: Thick
LD Power (DFU)
2105* Adjusts the LD power for each mode.

Each LD power setting is decided by the process control.
001 Process control

[–50 to 79 / 35 /1 ]
002 Process control
003 Print
[–50 to 79 / 5 /1 ]
004 Print
M132 5-24 SM
2109 Test Pattern
[0 to 24 / 0 /1 ]
001 Pattern Selection
Test pattern of the GAVD
0: None
13: Independent Pattern (4 dot)
1: Vertical Line (1 dot)
14: Trimming Area
15: Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
3: Horizontal Line (1 dot)
16: Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
17: Black Band (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line
18: Black band ( Vertical)
6: Grid Horizontal Line
19: Checker Flag Pattern
7: Grid pattern small
20: Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
8: Grid Pattern Large
21: Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
9: Argyle Pattern Small
22: Two Beam Density Pattern
10: Argyle Pattern Large
23: Full Dot Pattern
11: Independent pattern (1 dot)
24:All white Pattern
[0 to 15 / 15 /1 ]
002 Density Set the density of the test pattern which is output in
Service
Tables
SP2109-001. This SP is not used for the Grayscale
patterns.
Vref Setting
Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref). Change this value after
replacing the development unit with another development unit that contains
toner.
[1 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 ]
2220* 1. Check the value of SP2-220 in both the machine containing the test unit
and the machine that you are going to move it to.
2. Install the test development unit, and then input the VREF for this unit
into SP2-220.
3. After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2-220
back to the original value.
SM 5-25 M132
Reverse Interval Drum,Transfer [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheets]
2221* Adjusts the threshold for the reverse rotation of the drum and
development/transfer motors. This helps the drum and transfer belt cleaning
operations. This reverse rotation will interrupt a multiple printing job.
TD Sensor Initial Setting Initialization
Performs the TD sensor initial setting and allows the service technician to
enter the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the
edge of the developer package.) This SP mode controls the voltage applied
2801* to the TD sensor to make the TD sensor output about 3.0 V. Press
"Execute" to start. After finishing this, the TD sensor output voltage is
displayed.
Use this mode only after installing the machine, changing the TD sensor, or
adding new developer.
Toner Overflow Sensor [0 = OFF, 1= ON]

2960*
Selects whether or not the toner overflow sensor is activated.
Grayscale Limit (SSP)
2972* Controls the halftone density level to prevent deterioration of the OPC. The
halftone density is detected by the ID sensor, and the machine adjusts the
intensity of the LD beam according to the upper/lower limit setting.
Upper Limit [0 to 100 / 63 / 1vol ]
Defines the upper limit for grayscale.

001 A larger value allows a wider range of halftones at the pale end of the scale.
If the image contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark
areas, reduce this value to make the borders clearer.
Lower Limit [0 to 100 / 57 / 1vol ]
002 Defines the lower limit for grayscale.

A smaller value allows a wider range of halftones at the dark end of the
scale.
M132 5-26 SM
Grayscale Cycle (SSP) [0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 sheets ]
2973* Set s the halftone operation interval in order to prevent deterioration of the
OPC. If the number of copies exceeds this setting, at the end of the job, or if
the door is opened and closed, charge correction is executed.
2974* Image Density
Adjustment Mode [1 to 5 / 3 / 1 ]
001 Adjusts image density. Changing this setting adjusts development bias and
ID sensor output voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density.
Charge Counter [0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 sheets ]
Set the number of pages to print after toner and carrier initialization before
the charge input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in
2980* the polarity of the carrier.
The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually
decrease and cause lower charge output. Setting the charge output to
increase after a specified number of copies can compensate for this effect.
Service
Tables
SM 5-27 M132
5.6.1 SP3-XXX: PROCESS
3001 P Sensor Setting
Current [0 to 43 / 13 / 0.1 mA ]
001* Allows you to reset the PWM of the ID sensor LED to avoid a service call
error after clearing NVRAM or replacing the NVRAM.
The PWM data is stored by executing SP-3001-2.
Initialization -
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. ID sensor output for the bare drum
002 (VSG) is adjusted automatically to 4.0 ±0.2 V.
Press "Execute" to start. Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the
ID sensor, replacing the drum, or clearing NVRAM.
3045* Toner End Setting DFU
001 ON/OFF [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=Off, 1=On
3902* New PCU Detection (Not used)
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
ON/OFF Setting
0: On, 1: Off
001
Turns on or off the new unit detection for the transfer belt unit and fusing
unit.
M132 5-28 SM
There are no Group 4 SP modes for this machine.
Service
Tables
SM 5-29 M132
5.8.1 SP5-XXX: MODE
5009* Add Display Language Bit SW
Adds language available in user choice. (Only the languages registered in

the machine) The available languages are shown below.
List Num. language List Num. language
1 Japanese 15 Czech
3 US English 16 Finnish
4 French 17 Traditional Chinese
5 German 18 Simplified Chinese
6 Italian 19 Thai
7 Spanish 20 Russian
201,202,203,204 8 Dutch 22 Hebrew
9 Norwegian 23 Greek
10 Danish 24 Korean
11 Swedish 25 Catalan
12 Polish 26 Turkish
13 Portuguese 27 Brazilian Portuguese
14 Hungarian
Check the list number of the language to add from the list above.
And then change the bit switch settings of the SP5009-201, -202, -203, or
-204 refer to the table below.
M132 5-30 SM
List Num. Assigned Bit Switch
No.1~8 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-201)
No.9~16 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-202)
No.17~24 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-203)
No.25~32 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-204)
Example: To add US English (No.3 in the list) or Czech (No.15)

Turn Bit 3 of “SP5009-201” 0 to 1 for US English.
Turn Bit 7 of “SP5009-202” 0 to 1 for Czech.
After setting, turn the main power switch off and on to make the setting valid.
0: Europe/Asia (mm)
mm/inch Display Selection
1: North America (inch)
5024*
Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
Paper Display
Service
Tables
5047* Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
Display IP Address
5055* Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Toner Remaining Icon Display Change
5061* Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not display, 1: Display
SM 5-31 M132
5083* LED ON-OFF setting at Toner Near End
Turns LED yellow lighting ON and OFF at Toner Near End.

001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5104* A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. "Yes" counts except
from the bypass tray. When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are
counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively.
5112* Non-Std. Paper Sel.
Non-Standard Paper Selection

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not used, 1: Used
Paper Size Type Selection
Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and copy paper.
5131* [0 to 2 / - / 1 step]
0: Japan, 1: North America, 2: Europe
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If the paper size of the
archive files stored on the HDD is different, abnormal copies could result.
Bypass Length Setting
Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.
5150 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off [Default]
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.
M132 5-32 SM
Paper Size Setting

5181*
Adjusts the paper size for each tray. [0 to 1 / - / 1]
001 Tray 1: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
002 Tray 1: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
003 Tray 1: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
004 Tray 1: 4 0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
005 Tray 2: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
006 Tray 2: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
007 Tray 2: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
009 Tray 3: 1 (Tandem) 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
010 Tray 3: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
011 Tray 3: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
Service
Tables
013 Tray 4: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
014 Tray 4: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
015 Tray 4: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
017 LCT [0 to 2 / - / 1 ] 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF
SM 5-33 M132
RK4: Setting (Japan only)
Enable or distance the prevention for RK4 (Accounting device)
5186 Disconnection. If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is

set to "1 (Enable)", the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and
stops.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Paper Exit After Staple End
This SP determines whether the machine can output paper if staples run
5199 out.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF. Paper cannot exit if no staples are available.
1: ON. Paper can exit with no staples.
5302* Set Time
Time Difference
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory
before delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[–1440 to 1440 / - / 1 min.]
Japan: +540 (Tokyo)
002 NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +60 (Paris)

CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
KO: +540 (Korea)
M132 5-34 SM
5307 Summer Time
[0 to 1 / 1 (NA/EU), 0 (ASIA) / 1 /step]

Setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
001 Enables or disables the summer time mode.
 Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise,
this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Rule Set (Start)
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the
first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
003 4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
Service
Tables
For example: 3500010
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March.
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
004 3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
SM 5-35 M132
User Code Count Clear
5404 Clears the counts of the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict
the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
5413 Lockout Setting
Lockout On/Off [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: OFF, 1:ON

001
Turns on or off the account lock for the local address book account.
Lockout Threshold [1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
002
Sets the maximum trial times for accessing the address book account.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF (Lockout is not cancelled.)
1: ON (Lockout is cancelled if a user ID and
Cancellation On/Off
003 password are correctly entered after the lockout
function has been executed and a specific time has
passed.)
Turns on or off the cancellation function of the account lockout.
Cancellation Time [1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min]
004 Sets the interval of the retry for accessing the local address book account
after the lockout function has been executed.
This setting is enabled only if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (ON).
M132 5-36 SM
5414 Access Mitigation
Mitigation On/Off
Permits or does not permit consecutive access to the machine with the
001 same ID and password.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF (Permitted)
1: ON (Not permitted)
Mitigation Time
002 Sets the prohibiting time for consecutive access to the machine with the
same ID and password.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min]
5415* Password Attack
Permissible Number [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 times]
001 Sets the threshold number of attempts to attack the system with random
passwords to gain illegal access to the system.
Service
Tables
Detect Time [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]
002
Sets a detection time to count a password attack.
5416* Access Information
Access User Max Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]
001 Sets the number of users for the access exclusion and password attack
detection function.
Access Password Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ]
002 Sets the number of passwords for the access exclusion and password
attack detection function.
Monitor interval [1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]

003
Sets the interval of watching out for user information and passwords.
SM 5-37 M132
5417 Access Attack
Access Permissible number [0 to 500 / 100 / 1]

001
Sets a limit on access attempts to prevent password cracking.
Access Detect Time [10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]

002
Sets a detection time to count password cracking.
Productivity Fall Waite [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec]
003 Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive
number of access attempts have been detected.
Attack Max Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1]
004 Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to
slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of access
attempts have been detected.
User Authentication
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

5420*
 These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has
been enabled.
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
041 Printer Determines whether certification is required
before a user can use the printer application.
051 SDK1
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
061 SDK2 Determines whether certification is required
before a user can use the SDK application.
071 SDK3
M132 5-38 SM
Authentication Error Code

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: OFF [Default], 1: ON
001 System Log Disp
Determines whether an error code appears in the
system log after a user authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON [Default]
002 Panel Disp Determines whether an error code appears on the
operation panel after a user authentication failure
occurs.
5501* PM Alarm
PM Alarm Level
001 Sets the PM alarm level.

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 k copies/step]
0: No PM alarm
Service
Tables
Original Count Alarm (DFU)
002 Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not.
If this is "1", the PM alarm function is enabled.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
SM 5-39 M132
Jam Alarm
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are
not included).
5504* [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
Error Alarm
Sets the number of sheets to clear the error alarm counter.

The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the
5505* error alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a
set number of copied sheets (for example, default 5000 (C1b) or 10000
(C1c) sheets). The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter
reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / 60 / 100 copies / step]
5508 CC Call
001 Jam Remains Enables/disables initiating a call.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 Continuous Jams
0: Disable
003 Continuous Door Open 1: Enable
Sets the length of time to determine the

011 Jam Detection: Time Length length of an unattended paper jam.
[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute]
Sets the number of continuous paper jams

Jam Detection Continuous
012 required to initiate a call.
Count
[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 time]
Sets the length of time the remains opens

013 Door Open: Time Length to determine when to initiate a call.
[3 to 30/ 10 / 1 minute]
M132 5-40 SM
SC/Alarm Setting
5515* With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when
an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when
an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call
003 Service Parts End Call
004 User Call
006 Communication Information Test Call [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]

0: OFF
007 Machine Information Notice 1: ON
008 Alarm Notice
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
Service
Tables
Individual PM Part Alarm Call
5516 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call
when one of SP parts reaches its yield.
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

001
send, 1: Send) 0: Not send, 1: Send
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
5731 Counter Effect (Not used)
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 Change Mk1 Cnt(Paper->Combine)
0:Disable, 1: Enable
SM 5-41 M132
5746 BMLinkS (Japan only)
Disables or enables the BMLinkS

feature.
001 available
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
Displays the polling interval when the

BMLinsS monitor service monitors
002 interval:mon
the machine status.
[10 to 3600 / 60 / 1 sec./step]
Displays the sending feature status of

the BMLinkS log service.
004 available:log
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
Import/Export
5749
Touch “Execute” to export or import the selected preference information.
Target: [System] [Printer] [Fax]

[Scanner]
001 Export Option: [Unique] [Secret]
Crypt config: [Encryption]
[Execute]
Option: [Unique]
101 Import
Encryption key (if selected)
[Execute]
M132 5-42 SM
Job Access Log
Changes the capacity of log storage.
5750 SP7-750-001 Job Log Access Log Eco Log
0:OFF (Default) 2000 6000 2000
1:ON 8000 1000 1000
Memory Clear
5801 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these
SP codes, print an SMC Report.
001 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 19 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and

002 Engine
copy process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System

003 SCS Control Service) settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
Service
Tables
Initializes the image file system.
004 IMH Memory Clr
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored

005 MCS documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,

008 Printer Application the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS
counter.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and

thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
010 Web Service
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
SM 5-43 M132
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings

(IP addresses also), the SmartDeviceMonitor for
011 NCS Admin settings, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the
TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)

015 Clear UCS Setting
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report

016 MIRS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control

017 CCS
Service) settings.
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager)

018 SRM Memory Clr
settings.
019 LCS Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
021 ECS Initializes ECS (Engine Control Service).
025 websys Initializes websys (Web System).
FreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
5802* The correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is
not fed.
The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode
for a test.
001 TRAY1:A4LEF -
002 TRAY2:A3 -
003 TRAY2:A4SEF -
M132 5-44 SM
Input Check
5803 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches. ( p.5-127
"Input Check Table")
Output Check
5804 Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes. (

p.5-137 "Output Check Table")
Anti-Condensation Heater
5805 [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0:OFF / 1:ON
5810 SC Reset
Resets all level A service call conditions, such as

fusing errors. To clear the service call, touch
001 Fusing SC Reset
"Execute" on the LCD, then turn the main power
Service
Tables
switch off/on.
5811 MachineSerial
002 Display Displays the machine serial number.
004 BCU Inputs the serial number.
5812* Service Tel. No. Setting
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a

001 Service
service call condition occurs.)
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the

002 Facsimile
Counter Report (UP mode).
Inputs the telephone number of the supplier displayed on the

003 Supply
user mode screen.
SM 5-45 M132
Allows the service center contact telephone number to be

004 Operation
displayed on the user mode screen.
Allows the inquiry display to be displayed on the user mode

screen.
101 DispInquiry
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
5816 Remote Service
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
001 [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
002 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”.
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.
003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registration has
been completed.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification

1: Does no use the RCG certification
M132 5-46 SM
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable
011 Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.

[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
RFU (Remote Firmware Update) Timing
Selects the RFU timing.
Service
013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
Tables
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.
1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG Error Cause
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
014 0: Normal
1: Fails to reflect the client/server certificate settings by network failure to

reboot. Transitions to 0 on restarting the machine.
RCG–C Registed
021 This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.

0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
SM 5-47 M132
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.

023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Cert. Expire Timing DFU

061
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or
display the customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set
063 up Embedded RC Gate-N.
 The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond

the 128 character are ignored.
 This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to
064 set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
 This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.
M132 5-48 SM
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065  The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character

beyond the 31st character is ignored.
 This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066  The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character

report.
CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.
Service
Tables
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received
1
from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified

2
of the successful update.
067
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
3
failed update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
4
update is being sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue

11
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being

12
notified of the certification update request.
SM 5-49 M132
The notification of the request for certification update has completed

13 successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update
request from the rescue GW URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
14
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
15
the successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
16
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
17
completed, but a certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL
18
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update
of the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
Request for certification update in progress. The current certification

1
has expired.
068 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
2
has expired.
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual

3
certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
M132 5-50 SM
069 CERT: Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This SP setting determines if the operator can

confirm the previous version of the firmware
before the firmware update execution. If the
085 Firm Up User Check option to confirm the previous version is selected,
a notification is sent to the system manager and
the firmware update is done with the firmware
files from the URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size

086 Firmware Size of the firmware data files during the firmware
update execution.
Displays the macro version of the @Remote

087 CERT: Macro Ver.
certification.
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote

088 CERT: PAC Ver.
certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification.
Service
Tables
Spaces are displayed as underscores (_).
089 CERT: ID2 Code Asteriskes (*) indicate that no @Remote
certification exists. "000000___________"
indicates "Common certification".
Displays the common name of the @Remote

certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes.
090 CERT: Subject
Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote
SM 5-51 M132
Displays serial number for the @Remote

091 CERT: SerialNo. certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no
@Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the

@Remote certification. CN = the following 30
092 CERT: Issuer
bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no @Remote
certification exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the

093 CERT: Valid Start
current @Remote certification is enabled.
Displays the end time of the period for which the

094 CERT: Valid End
CERT: Encrypt Level
Displays the encryption level for the NRS certificate.

102* [1 or 2 / 1 / – ]
1: Indicates that the certificate encryption level is 512-bit.

Manual Polling
200
Executes the manual polling.
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed.
201 In this status, @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device
cannot communicate with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate
cannot be set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
Allows entry of the request number needed for the

202 Letter Number
Embedded RCG Gate.
M132 5-52 SM
Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote

203 Confirm Execute
Gateway.
204 Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in
answer to the confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is
registered at the Gateway.
Service
Tables
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

8: Other error
9: Registration executing
SM 5-53 M132
Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error

Illegal Modem
-11002 Chat execution error
Parameter
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without

-12002
acquiring device status.
Attempted registration without execution

-12003
of an inquiry and no previous registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for

-12004
certification and ID2.
208
@Remote communication is prohibited.
-12005 The device has an Embedded RC
gate-related problem.
Operation Error, A confirmation request was made after

Incorrect Setting -12006 the confirmation had been already
completed.
The request number used at registration

-12007 was different from the one used at
confirmation.
Update certification failed because

-12008
mainframe was in use.
ID2 mismatch between an individual

-12009
certification and NVRAM
-12010 Certification area is not initialized.
M132 5-54 SM
Attempted dial up overseas without the

-2385 correct international prefix for the
telephone number.
Error Caused by -2387 Not supported at the Service Center
Response from GW -2389 Database out of service

URL
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 RCG device not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal
-2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG
Service
Tables
Gate setup.
209 Instl Clear
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after
this setting has been changed.
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
5821* Remote Service Address
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote

Communication Gate) destination for call
002 RCG IP Address
processing at the remote service center.
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1]
Sets the port number of the RCG (Remote

003 RCG Port
[0 to 65535 / 443 / 1]
SM 5-55 M132
Sets the URL path of the RCG (Remote

004 RCG URL Path
[0 to 16 characters / /RCG/services/ /-]
NV-RAM Data Upload
5824 Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card. Push Execute.

Note: When uploading data in this SP mode, the front door must be open.
NV-RAM Data Download
5825 Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After
downloading is completed, remove the card and turn the machine power off
and on.
5828 Network Setting
Enables and disables bi-directional

communication on the parallel connection
1284 Compatibility
050 between the machine and a computer.
(Centro)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
0:Off, 1: On
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284

Mode) for data transfer.
052 ECP (Centro)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Switches the job spooling on and off.

065 Job Spooling [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No spooling, 1: Spooling enabled
M132 5-56 SM
This SP determines whether the job interrupted

at power off is resumed at the next power on.
This SP operates only when SP5828-065 is set
Job Spooling Clear: Start
066 to "1".
Time
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: OFF Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: ON Clears spooled job.
This SP determines whether job spooling is

enabled or disabled for each protocol. This is a
Job Spooling (Protocol) 8-bit setting.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
069
0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
1 FTP (Not Used) 5 DIPRINT
2 IPP 6 SFTP
3 SMB 7 WSPRND
087 @Remote Protocol Cnt (DFU)
Service
Tables
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP
TELNET is disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
090
(0:OFF 1:ON) [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Disables or enables the Web operation.

Web
091 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
(0:OFF 1:ON)
This is the IPv6 local address referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11) in the format:
"Link-Local address" + "Prefix Length"
Active IPv6 Link Local
145 The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits
Address
configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. These
notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6
Addresses " below this table.
SM 5-57 M132
Active IPv6 Stateless

147
Address 1

149 These SPs are the IPv6 stateless addresses (1
Address 2
to 5) referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
Active IPv6 Stateless (802.11) in the format:
151
Address 3 "Stateless Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits
153 configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
Address 4

155
Address 5
IPv6 Manual Address
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or

wireless LAN (802.11) in the format:
156 "Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
each. These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses"
below this table.
IPv6 Gateway Address
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless

158 LAN (802.11). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8
blocks of 16 bits each. These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6
Addresses" below this table.
Note: IPV6 Addresses

Ethernet and the Wireless LAN (802.11) reference the IPV6 "Link-Local address + Prefix
Length". The IPV6 address consists of 128 bits divided into 8 blocks of 16 bits:
aaaa:bbbb:cccc:dddd:eeee:ffff:gggg:hhhh:
The prefix length is inserted at the 17th byte (Prefix Range: 0x0 to 0x80). The initial
setting is 0x40 (64).
For example, the data: "2001123456789012abcdef012345678940h" is expressed:
"2001:1234:5678:9012:abcd:ef01:2345:6789": prefixlen 64
However, the actual IPV6 address display is abbreviated according to the following rules.
M132 5-58 SM
Rules for Abbreviating IPV6 Addresses

1. The IPV6 address is expressed in hexadecimal delimited by colons (:) with the
following characters:
0123456789abcdefABCDEF
2. A colon is inserted as a delimiter every 4th hexadecimal character.
fe80:0000:0000:0000:0207:40ff:0000:340e
3. The notations can be abbreviated by eliminating zeros where the MSB and digits
following the MSB are zero. The example in "2" above, then, becomes
fe80:0:0:0207:40ff:0:340e
4. Sections where only zeros exist can be abbreviated with double colons (::). This
abbreviation can be done also where succeeding sections contain only zeros (but
this can be done only at one point in the address). The example in "2" and "3" above
then becomes:
fe80::207:40ff:0:340e (only the first null sets zero digits are abbreviated as "::")
-or-
fe80:0:0:0:207:40ff::340e (only the last null set before "340e" is abbreviated as "::")
Enable or disables the automatic setting for IPv6

IPv6 Stateless Auto stateless.
161
Setting [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
1: Enable, 0: Disable
Service
Tables
Web Item visible
Displays or does not display the Web system items.
236 [0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed

bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Web shopping link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link
237 page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
SM 5-59 M132
Web supplies Link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top
238 page and link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Web Link1 Name
239 This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web
system. The maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
Web Link1 URL
240 his SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web
system. The maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Web Link1 visible
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web
241 system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"
DHCPv6 DUID
Sets DHCPv6 DUID.

249 [0000000000000000000000000000h to
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh /
0000000000000000000000000000h / -]
M132 5-60 SM
HDD
5832 Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
Operation Panel Image Exposure Function

5834
DFU
5840* IEEE 802.11
Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This
006 bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 11 (NA), 13 (EU), 14 (JPN) / 1]

JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Channel MIN
Service
Tables
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN.
007 This bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 1 / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Transmission speed [0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix 0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix 0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
008 0 x 0F - 36M Fix 0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix 0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 0D - 12M Fix 0 x 12 - 72M (reserved)
0 x 0B - 9M Fix 0 x 09 - 22M (reserved)
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
SM 5-61 M132
WEP Key Select
Selects the WEP key.
011 Bit 1 and 0

00: Key1, 01: Key2 (Reserved),
10: Key3 (Reserved), 11: Key4(Reserved)
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed.
Fragment Thresh
042 Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.

[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
11g CTS to Self
043 Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
11g Slot Time
044 Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
WPA Debug Lvl
045 Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application.

[1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
Supply Name Setting
5841* Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
011 StapleStd1
012 StapleStd2
M132 5-62 SM
013 StapleStd3
014 StapleStd4
5844 USB
Transfer Rate
001 Sets the speed for USB data transmission.

[0 x 01 or 0 x 04 / 0 x 04 /-]
0 x 01 [Full Speed], 0 x 04 [Auto Change]
Vendor ID
002 Sets the vendor ID:

Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] (DFU)
Product ID
003 Sets the product ID.
Device Release No.
Service
Tables
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004 [0000 to 9999 / 100 / 1] (DFU)
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal

number recognized as the BCD.
005 Fixed USB Port
This SP standardizes for common use the model name and serial number
for USB PnP (Plug & Play). It determines whether the driver requires
re-installation.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
SM 5-63 M132
006 PnP Model Name
This SP sets the model name to be used by the USB PnP when "Function
Enable (Level 2) is set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name
(SP5844-5).
Default: Laser Printer (up to 20 characters allowed).
007 PnP Serial Number
This SP sets the serial number to be used by the USB PnP when "Function
Enable (Level 2)
set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name (SP5844-5).
Default: None (up to 12 characters allowed for entry).
 Make sure that this entry is the same as the serial number in use.
 At initialization the serial number generated from the model name is
used, not the setting of this SP code.
 At times other than initialization, the value set for this SP code is used.
008 Mac Supply Level
This SP switches of and on the Mac supply level function.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
100 Notify Unsupport
This SP determines whether an alert message appears on the control panel

when a USB device (unsupported device) that cannot use an A-connector is
connected.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Function enable
1: Function disable
 An unsupported device is a device that cannot use the functions of the
USB device. For example, a USB mouse cannot be used even if it
connected.
 If the PictBridge option is not mounted, even if a digital camera is
connected it cannot be used because it is an unsupported device.
M132 5-64 SM
Delivery Server Setting

5845*
These are delivery server settings.
Delivery Retry Interval
003 [60 to 900 / 300 / 1 /step]
Sets the wait time from the error action to the retry.
Delivery Retry times
004 [0 to 99 / 3 / 1time(s) /step]
Sets how many times to retry.
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
Rapid Sending Control
022
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
error.
Service
Tables
SM 5-65 M132
5846* UCS Setting
LDAP Search Timeout
010 Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1 to 255 / 60 /1 step]
041 Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a

basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However,
the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD
automatically. However, at this point the address book can be accessed
by only the system administrator or key operator.
5. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes
successfully, any user can access the address book.
Addr Book Media
Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.

[0 to 30 / - /1]
043
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1 20: HDD
2: SD Slot 2 30: Nothing
4: USB Flash ROM
Initialize Local Address Book
047 Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a
machine managed with UCS.
M132 5-66 SM
Initialize LDAP Addr Book
049 Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the
LDAP address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize All Addr Book
050 Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information

managed by UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system
administrators are not deleted.
Backup All Addr Book
051 Copies all directory information to the SD card. Do this SP before replacing
the controller board or HDD. The operation may not succeed if the controller
board or HDD is damaged.
Restore All Addr Book
052 Copies back all directory information from the SD card to the flash ROM or
HDD. Upload the address book from the old flash ROM or HDD with
SP5846-51 before removing it. Do SP5846 52 after installing the new HDD.
Clear Backup Info
Service
Tables
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot 2. Deletes
053 only the files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the
card is write-protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not
remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS
local address book.
Bit Meaning
060
0 Checks both upper/lower case characters
2 Japan Only
SM 5-67 M132
4 --- Not Used ---
5 --- Not Used ---
6 --- Not Used ---
7 --- Not Used ---
Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]
 This SP does not normally require adjustment.

 This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
Complexity Option 2
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case
and defines the length of the password.
063 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Complexity Option 3
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and
defines the length of the password.
064 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

M132 5-68 SM
Complexity Option 4
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and
065 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Encryption Start
094 Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the
LDAP server.
[0 to 255 / 1 ] No default
Web Service
5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.
5848* Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
Service
Tables
5848-100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
004 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4 Bits)
009 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits) Switches access control on
and off.
011 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower 4 Bits) 0000: OFF, 0001: ON
022 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower 4 Bits)
Setting: Log Type: Job 1

210
No information is available at this time.

211
Setting: Log Type: Access

212
SM 5-69 M132
Setting: Primary Srv

213
Setting: Secondary Srv

214
Setting: Start Time

215
Setting: Interval Time

216
Setting: Timing
217
Installation Date
5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to

001 Display
"Installation Date" or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is printed on

the printout for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print [0 to 1 / 1 / -]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
When the total number of pages that are made reaches

this value, the current date becomes the 'official'
003 Total Counter
installation date for this machine.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
M132 5-70 SM
5856 Remote ROM Update
When set to "1" allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE
1284) during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the
machine is cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware
002 using a parallel cable
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
5857 Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until
001 this feature is switched on.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the
Service
Tables
002 event selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2 to 3 / 2 / 1]
2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Save to HDD
005
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
006
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies
009 them to the SD Card.

A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can
be copied one by one to each SD Card.
SM 5-71 M132
Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it
to the SD Card.
010 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can

be copied one by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is
no log on the HDD with no key specified.
Erase HDD Debug Data

011
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging
012 files generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when
SP5857 010 or 011 is executed.

To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
Free Space on SD Card

013
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)
014 Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared
memory) onto an SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)
015 This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information
written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number.
Make HDD Debug

016
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
Make SD Debug
017
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.
M132 5-72 SM
Debug Save When
5858* These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to
the destination selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-003 stores one SC specified by number.
Stores SC codes generated by copier

001* Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
engine errors.
Controller SC Error (0:OFF Stores SC codes generated by GW

002*
1:ON) controller errors.
003* Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1step]
004* Jam (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores jam errors.
5859* Debug Save Key No.
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
Service
Tables
004 Key 4
005 Key 5 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
functions that use common memory on the controller board.
006 Key 6 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860* SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
SMTP Server Port Number
002 This SP sets the number of the SMTP server port.
[1 to 65535 / 25 / 1]
SM 5-73 M132
SMTP Authentication
003 This setting switches SMTP certification on and off for mail sending.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
SMTP Auth. Encryption
This setting determines whether the password for SMTP certification is

006 encrypted.
[0 to 2/ 0 / 1]
0: Automatic, 1: No encryption done, 2: Encryption done
POP before SMTP
This setting determines whether the transmission connects with the POP
server first for certification before it connects to the SMTP server for
007 sending.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: No connection to POP server
1: Connection to POP server
POP to SMTP Waiting Time
This SP sets the amount of time to allow for the connection to the SMTP
008 server after the transmission has connected to the POP server and been
certified during the execution of POP Before SMTP.

[0 to 10000 / 300 / 1 ms]
Mail Receive Protocol
009 This SP specifies a protocol for the mail reception or switches off receiving.
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1]
1: POP3 protocol, 2: IMAP4 protocol, 3: SMTP protocol
POP3/IMAP4 Auth. Encryption
This SP specifies whether password encryption is done for POP3/IMAP4

013 certification.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Automatic, 1: No encryption done, 2: Encryption done
M132 5-74 SM
POP3 Server Port Number
014 This SP sets the number of the POP3 server port.
[1 to 65535 / 110 / 1]
IMAP4 Server Port Number
015 This SP sets the number of the IMAP4 server port.
[1 to 65535 / 143 / 1]
SMTP Receive Port Number
016 This SP sets the number of the port that receives SMTP mail.
[1 to 65535 / 25 / 1]
Mail Receive Interval
017 This SP sets the timing for mail received at regular intervals.
[2 to 1440 / 3 / 1 min.]
Mail Keep Setting
This SP setting determines whether received mail is stored on the server.
019 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
0: Received mail not stored
1: All received mail stored
2: Stores only mail that generated errors during receiving
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail
is not received during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply

021 mail.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: No, 1: Yes
SM 5-75 M132
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
022 validated account after the SMTP server is validated.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From" item switched.
SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Select the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
025 Bit 2: CRAM_MD5

Bit 3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit 4 to Bit 7: Not Used
 This SP is activated only when SMTP authentication is enabled by

UP mode.
S/MIME: MIME Header Setting
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent by S/MIME.
026 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
5869 RAM Disk Setting
Enables or disables the Mail function.

001 Mail Function
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
5870 Common Key Info Writing
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the

001 Writing
device for @Remote specifications.
003 Initialize Initializes the data area of the common proof for validating.
M132 5-76 SM
Writing: Writes to flash ROM the common proof (2048-bit) for validating
004
2048bit the device for @Remote specifications.
SD Card Appli. Move
5873 Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see
"SD Card Appli Move" in the chapter "System Maintenance (Main Chapters).
001 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another.
002 Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
5878 Option Setup
Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite

Security option for the copier. For more, see
001 Data Overwrite Security
"DataOverwriteSecurity Unit" in the chapter
"Installation".
Fixed Phrase Block Erasing

5881
Detects the Fixed phrase.
Service
Tables
SD Get Counter
5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower

slot). The operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root
directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text
001 file (*.txt) prefixed with the number of the machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
SM 5-77 M132
Personal Information Protect
Selects the protection level for logs.

5888* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs)
SDK Application Counter

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
Plug & Play Maker/Model Name
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
5907 This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these
names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5930 Meter Charge
Display Operation State
001 0: OFF
1: ON
M132 5-78 SM
Device Setting
5985 The USB support feature is built into the GW controller. Use this SP to
enable and disable the features. In order to use the USB function built into
the controller board, this SP code must be set to "1".
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
SP Print Mode
5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
001 All ( Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
Service
Tables
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
SM 5-79 M132
5.9.1 SP6-XXX: PERIPHERALS
Punch Position: Sub Scan

6128
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction. (For D636)
001 2-Hole: DOM (Japan)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU [-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
004 5-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Punch Position: Main Scan

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction. (For D636)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.4 mm]
004 4-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.

6130*
Adjusts the paper buckle at the punch unit for each paper size. (For D636)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.25 mm]
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
M132 5-80 SM
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Skew Correction Control

6131*
Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. (For D636)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
Service
Tables
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
SM 5-81 M132
Jogger Fence Fine Adj.
6132* This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
stack on the finisher stapling tray in the Finisher D636. The adjustment is
done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Staple Position Adjustment
Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (D636).

6133* + Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
[-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
M132 5-82 SM
Saddle Stitch Position Adj. (Not used)
6134* Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper
is stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher (D637).
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
[-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
003 A4 SEF + Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
Folder Position Adj. (Not used)
Service
Tables
6135* This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the
Booklet Finisher D637.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
[-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
SM 5-83 M132
Book Fold Repeat (Not used)
6136* Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher D637.
[2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]
Entrance Sensor
6139 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher.
(D588) ( p.5-127 "Input Check Table")
FIN (EUP) INPUT Check
(D636) ( p.5-127 "Input Check Table")
FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check
(D588) ( p.5-137 "Output Check Table")
FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check
(D636) ( p.5-137 "Output Check Table")
6148 Jogger Fine Adj.
001 A3T
002 B4T
003 A4T Adjusts the jogger location [Horizontal

direction]
004 A4Y
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 /mm]
005 B5Y *Jogger is optional equipment.
006 A5Y
007 DLT-T
M132 5-84 SM
008 LG-T
009 LT-T
010 LT-Y
011 HLT-Y
012 Other
Max. Pre-Stack Sheet [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheets step]
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149*
 You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding
thick or slick paper.
6150 Jogger Control
Enables or disables the jogger.

001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable. 1: Enable
Service
Tables
SM 5-85 M132
5.10.1 SP7-XXX: DATA LOG
7401* Total SC Counter
SC Counter
001 Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred.
This SC counter can be reset by executing SP7807 (SC/Jam Counter
Reset).
Total SC Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of service calls that have occurred.
This SC counter cannot be reset by executing SP7807 (SC/Jam Counter
Reset).
7403* SC History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
M132 5-86 SM
7502* Total Paper Jam
Jam Counter
001 Displays the total number of paper jams.

Reset).
Total Jam Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of paper jams.

Reset).
Total Jams Location
These SPs display the total number of paper jams by location. A "Check-in"
7504* (paper late) error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the
precise time. A "Check-out" ("paper lag") paper jam occurs when the paper
remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
001 At power On
Service
Tables
003 Tray 1: On
004 Tray 2: On
005 Tray 3: On
006 Tray 4: On
007 LCT: On
008 Bypass: On
009 Duplex: On
011 Vertical Transport 1: On
013 Bank: Transport Sn 1: On
SM 5-87 M132
017 Registration: On
019 Fusing Exit: On
020 Paper Exit: On
021 Bridge Exit On
022 Bridge Transport: On
024 Junction Gate Sensor: On
025 Duplex Exit: On
026 Duplex Entrance: On (In)
027 Duplex Entrance: On (Out)
051 Vertical Transport 1: Off
053 Bank Transport 1: Off
057 Registration Sensor: Off
058 LCT Feed Sensor: Off
060 Paper Exit: Off
061 Bridge: Exit: Off
062 Bridge: Transport: Off
064 Junction Gate Sensor: Off
065 Duplex Exit: Off
066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In)
067 Duplex Entrance: Off (Out)
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN
101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN
102 Finisher Staple: KIN
M132 5-88 SM
103 Finisher Exit: KIN
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP
194 Finisher Staple Exit: EUP
195 Finisher Exit: EUP
198 Finisher Folder: EUP
199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP
200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP
Service
Tables
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP
202 Finisher Staple Moving Motor: EUP
203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP
206 Finisher Punch Motor: EUP
7506* Jam Count by Paper Size
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size.
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
SM 5-89 M132
044 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
7507* Plotter Jam History
001 Last
002 Latest 1
Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
003 Latest 2 Sample Display:
CODE:007
004 Latest 3
SIZE:05h
005 Latest 4 TOTAL:0000334

DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Latest 5 where:
007 Latest 6 CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.

SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
008 Latest 7 TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7502)
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
M132 5-90 SM
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
ROM No./Firmware Version
7801 This SP code displays the firmware versions of all ROMs in the system,
including the mainframe, the ARDF, and peripheral devices.
PM Counter Display
7803*
Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
Paper [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the paper counter (pages)
Page: PCD [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

002
Displays the PCD (Drum and Development unit) counter (pages)
Service
Tables
Page: Transfer [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]
003
Displays the transfer unit counter (pages).
Page: Fuser [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

004
Displays the fusing unit counter (pages).
Rotation: PCD [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

005
Displays the PCD rotation counter (distance).
Rotation: Transfer [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

006
Displays the transfer unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation: Fuser [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

007
Displays the fuser unit rotation counter (distance).
SM 5-91 M132
Rotation(%): PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]

008
Displays the PCD (%) rotation counter (Distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
009
Displays the transfer unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010
Displays the fuser unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
011
Displays the web unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
PM Counter Reset
7804 Resets the PM counter.

Touch [Execute] two times > "Completed" > [Exit]
Paper
001
Resets the PM counter of the paper.
PCD
002 Resets the PM counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit except
developer).
Transfer
003
Resets the PM counter of the transfer unit.
Fuser
004
Resets the PM counter of the fuser unit.
Web
005
Reset the PM counter of the web unit.
All Clear
006
Resets all PM counter
M132 5-92 SM
SC/Jam Counter Reset
7807 Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press Execute on the touch
panel.
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7507, SP7508.
Self-Diagnose Result Display
Execute to open the "Self-Diagnostics Result Display" to view details about

7832 errors. Use the keys in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all
the information. If no errors have occurred, you will see the "No Error"
message on the screen.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
7853 Replacement Counter
PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
001
Displays the replacement counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit).
Service
Tables
Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
002
Displays the replacement counter of the transfer unit.
Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
003
Displays the replacement counter of the fusing unit.
Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
004
Displays the replacement counter of the cleaning web.
SM 5-93 M132
7904 Near End Setting
001* PCD Sets the near end timing setting for each
maintenance item.
002* Transfer
[0 to 2/ 1 / 1 /step]
0: Earlier
003* Fuser 1: Normal
2: Later
7906 Prev Counter
Page: PCD [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the counter (pages) of the previous PCD

002
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous transfer unit.

003
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous fusing unit.

004
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous PCD

005
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous transfer unit.

006
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous fusing unit.
Rotation(%):PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

007
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous PCD
Rotation(%):Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

008
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous transfer unit.
M132 5-94 SM
Rotation(%):Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

009
Rotation(%):Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010 Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous cleaning
web.
ROM No
7910 Indicate the ROM number for the machine components.

These SPs are listed in the SMC Report, they are not displayed on the
operation panel.
001 System/Copy 159 PCLXL
002 Engine 160 MSIS
003 Lcdc 162 PDF
005 ADF 163 BMLinkS
007 Finisher 165 PJL
Service
Tables
009 Bank 166 IPDS
010 LCT 167 MediaPrint:JPEG
018 NetworkSupport 168 MediaPrint:TIFF
019 Bank 2 180 FONT
022 BIOS 181 FONT1
023 HDD Format Option 182 FONT2
100 Language1 183 FONT3
101 Language2 184 FONT4
132 NetWare 185 FONT5
150 RPCS 200 Factory
151 PS 202 NetworkDocBox
SM 5-95 M132
152 RPDL 204 Printer
153 R98 210 MIB
154 R16 211 Websupport
155 RPGL 213 SDK1
156 R55 214 SDK2
157 RTIFF 215 SDK3
158 PCL
Firmware Version
7911 Indicate the firmware version for the machine components.

These SPs are listed in the SMC Report, but they are not displayed on the
operation panel.
002 Engine 162 PDF
003 Lcdc 163 BMLinkS
018 NetworkSupport 165 PJL
022 BIOS 166 IPDS
023 HDD Format Option 167 MediaPrint:JPEG
100 Language1 168 MediaPrint:TIFF
101 Language2 180 FONT
105 ADF 181 FONT1
107 Finisher 182 FONT2
132 NetWare 183 FONT3
150 RPCS 184 FONT4
151 PS 185 FONT5
152 RPDL 200 Factory
153 R98 202 NetworkDocBox
M132 5-96 SM
154 R16 204 Printer
155 RPGL 210 MIB
156 R55 211 Websupport
157 RTIFF 213 SDK1
158 PCL 214 SDK2
159 PCLXL 215 SDK3
160 MSIS
7950 Replacement Date
PCD
001
Displays the replacement date of the PCD.
Transfer
002
Displays the replacement date of the transfer unit.
Fuser
003
Service
Tables
Displays the replacement date of the fusing unit.
Web
004
Displays the replacement date of the web unit.
7951 Remaining Counter
PCD(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

001
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the PCD.
Transfer(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

002
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

003
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the fusing unit.
SM 5-97 M132
Engine Main SP Tables-7 Rev. 2/25/2014
PCD(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

005
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the PCD.
Transfer(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

006
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

007
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the fusing unit.
PCD (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

009
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the PCD.
Transfer (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

010
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the transfer unit.
Fuser (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

011
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the fusing unit.
Web (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

013
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the cleaning web.
PM Yield Setting
7952
Sets the each yield of the following.
001 PCD(Page) [0 to 99999999/ 160000 / 1 sheet]
⇒ Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Pages).
002 Transfer(Page) [0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]
⇒ Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Pages).
003 Fuser(Page) [0 to 9999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet]
⇒ Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Pages).
PCD(Rotation) [0 to 999999999 / 75500000 / 1 mm]

005
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Rotations).
M132 5-98 SM
Transfer(Rotation) [0 to 999999999 / 65420000 / 1 mm]

006
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Rotations).
Fuser(Rotation) [0 to 999999999 / 52950000 / 1 mm]

007
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Rotations).
Web (%) [0 to 255 / 92 / 1 %]

009
Sets the PM yield (%) of the web unit.
7953 Operation Env Log
T<10 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

001
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: T<10°C
10<=T<=17 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

002
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 10°C<=T<=17°C
17<T<23 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

003
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 17<=T<=23
Service
Tables
23<=T<=27 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
004
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 23<=T<=27
27<=T<=32 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

005
32<T [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

006
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 32<T
Env Log Clear

7954
Resets the environment logs (SP7953).
SM 5-99 M132
5.11.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending
color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination
with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

 How is the document server actually being used?
 What application is using the document server most frequently?
 What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications

T: Total: (Grand Total).
(C, F, P, etc.).
P: Print application.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example) group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on
the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations
below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
M132 5-100 SM
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Service
Tables
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
DesApl Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
SM 5-101 M132
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
GPC
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
ImgEdt
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

NRS machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in
Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows

print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the
Palm 2
network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.

PGS Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two
pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
M132 5-102 SM
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2

R only. This machine is under development and currently not
available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters

SMC
are recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
Service
Tables
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
 All of the Group 8 SPs are able to reset by “SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear”.
These SPs count the number of times

T:Total Jobs *CTL
8001 each application is used to do a job.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Note: The L: counter is the total number
of times the other applications are used
8004 P:Total Jobs *CTL to send a job to the document server,
plus the number of times a file already
on the document server is used.
SM 5-103 M132
 These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
 When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
 Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
 When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
 When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method
is specified by the application.
O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a

stored copy job is set for Sort and then stored on
806x 1 Sort
the document server, the L: counter increments.
(See SP8-066-1)
806x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the

806x 4 Booklet machine is in staple mode, the Staple counter
also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than

8 06x 5 Z-Fold
the Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
M132 5-104 SM
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When

806x 6 Punch Punch is set for a print job, the P: counter
increments. (See SP8-064-6.)
806x 7 Other (Reserved)
806x 8 Inside-Flod Not used
806x 9 Three-In-Fold Not used
806x 10 Three-OUT-Fold Not used
806x 11 Four-Fold Not used
806x 12 KANNON-Fold Not used
806x 13 Perfect-Bind Not used
806x 14 Ring-Bind Not used
T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
Service
Tables
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs
(Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages
in the job.
807x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
807x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
807x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
807x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
807x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
SM 5-105 M132
807x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
807x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages
 Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
 If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
 When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
8381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
printed by the customer. The counter
8384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL
for the application used for storing the
pages increments.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of
pages stored from within the document
8387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL
server mode screen at the operation
panel. Pages stored with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode
screen go to the C: counter.
 When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
 When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted
for the application that stored them.
 These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
M132 5-106 SM
LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
This SP counts the amount of paper

(front/back counted as 1 page) used for
8411 Prints/Duplex *CTL duplex printing. Last pages printed only
on one side are not counted.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8421 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the printer application.
Service
Tables
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by Other applications
842x 1 Simplex> Duplex
842x 4 Simplex Combine
842x 5 Duplex Combine
842x 6 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
842x 7 4 in1 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)
SM 5-107 M132
842x 12 Booklet
842x 13 Magazine
842x 14 2-in-1 + Booklet
842x 19 2-in-1 + Magazine
 These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve
their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
 Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
 Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
M132 5-108 SM
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
Service
Tables
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted.

843x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet The count for a cover printed on both sides
counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side)

843x 2 Series/Book or printed as a book with booklet right/left
pagination.
SM 5-109 M132
The number of pages printed where stamps were

843x 3 User Stamp applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8441 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8444 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
printer application.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
844x 1 A3
844x 2 A4
844x 3 A5
844x 4 B4
844x 5 B5
844x 6 DLT
844x 7 LG
844x 8 LT
844x 9 HLT
844x 10 Full Bleed
844x 254 Other (Standard)
844x 255 Other (Custom)
 These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
M132 5-110 SM
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
8451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
Bypass Tray
001 Bypass Tray *CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Tray 1 *CTL Copier
003 Tray 2 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 Tray 3 *CTL Paper Tray Unit (Option)
005 Tray 4 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
LCT (Option)
006 Tray 5 *CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007 Tray 6 *CTL Currently not used.
Service
Tables
SM 5-111 M132
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
 These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter
8461 is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the
feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
 Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
 During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8464 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
846x 1 Normal
846x 2 Recycled
846x 3 Special
846x 4 Thick
846x 5 Normal (Back)
846x 6 Thick (Back)
846x 7 OHP
846x 8 Other
M132 5-112 SM
PrtPGS/Mag
8471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
001 < 49% *CTL
002 50% to 99% *CTL
003 100% *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 101% to 200% *CTL
005 201% < *CTL
 Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
 Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
 Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
 Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
Service
counted.
Tables
 The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a
rate of 100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
SM 5-113 M132
T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8511 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
printed.
8 51x 1 RPCS
8 51x 2 RPDL
8 51x 3 PS3
8 51x 4 R98
8 51x 5 R16
8 51x 6 GL/GL2
8 51x 7 R55
8 51x 8 RTIFF
8 51x 9 PDF
8 51x 10 PCL5e/5c
8 51x 11 PCL XL
8 51x 12 IPDL-C
8 51x 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 51x 14 Other
8 51x 15 IPDS
 SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
 Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
M132 5-114 SM
T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
all applications.
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
the Print application.
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
8 52x 8 Inside Fold Half-Fold (FM2) (Multi Fold Unit)
Service
Tables
8 52x 9 Three-IN-Fold Letter Fold-in (FM4) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 10 Three-OUT-Fold Letter Fold-out (FM3) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 11 Four Fold Double Parallel Fold (FM5) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 12 KANNON-Fold Gate Fold (FM6) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 13 Perfect-Bind Perfect Binder
8 52x 14 Ring-Bind Ring Binder
 If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
 The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries
are counted.
SM 5-115 M132
This SP counts the amount of staples

8531 Staples *CTL used by the machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8551 T:FIN Books
001 Perfect-Bind *CTL

Not used
002 Ring-Bind *CTL
8554 T:FIN Books

Not used
002 Ring-Bind *CTL
8561 T:A Sheet Of Paper
001 Total: Over A3/DLT *CTL
002 Total: Under A3/DLT *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003 Duplex: Over A3/DLT *CTL
004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT *CTL
8564 P:A Sheet Of Paper

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
M132 5-116 SM
8567 O:A Sheet Of Paper

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:Counter
8581 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
001 Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
O:Counter
8591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
Service
Tables
applications only.
001 A3/DLT *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Duplex *CTL
T: Coverage Counter
8601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages
for each printing mode.
001 B/W *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
011 B/W Printing Pages *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
SM 5-117 M132
P:Coverage Counter
8604
-
001 B/W *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
SDK Apli Counter

8617
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK application.
001 SDK-1 *CTL
002 SDK-2 *CTL
003 SDK-3 *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 SDK-4 *CTL
005 SDK-5 *CTL
006 SDK-6 *CTL
Func Use Counter

8621
-
001 Function-001 *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
M132 5-118 SM

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
033 Function-033 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
SM 5-119 M132

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
M132 5-120 SM

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Dev Counter
8771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
001 Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Toner_Bottle_Info. *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8781 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
001 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles
Service
Tables
Toner Remain
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
8801 allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is
better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments
of 10 (10% steps).
001 K *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% /step]
SM 5-121 M132
Eco Counter
8811
-
001 Eco Total *CTL
004 Duplex *CTL
005 Combine *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008 Duplex (%) *CTL
009 Combine (%) *CTL
010 Paper Cut (%) *CTL
101 Eco Totalr:Last *CTL
104 Duplex:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
105 Combine:Last *CTL
108 Duplex (%):Last *CTL
109 Combine (%):Last *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% /step]
110 Paper Cut (%):Last *CTL
Cvr Cnt: 0-10%
8851 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of
each color is from 0% to 10%.
011 0 to 2%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
021 3 to 4%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
031 5 to 7%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
041 8 to 10%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
M132 5-122 SM
CVr Cnt: 11-20%
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CVr Cnt: 21-30%
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CVr Cnt: 31%-
each color is 31% or higher.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
Page/Toner Bottle
8891
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Page/Toner_prev1
8901
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
SM 5-123 M132
Page/Toner_prev2
8911 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each
color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Cvr Cnt/Total
8921
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Coverage (%) Bk *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
011 Coverage /P: Bk *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Machine Status *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time

001 Operation Time while controller is saving data to HDD (while
engine is not operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while

controller saves data to HDD. Does not include
002 Standby Time
time spent in Energy Save, Low Power, or Off
modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing

003 Energy Save Time
background printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine

004 Low Power Time on. Includes time while machine is performing
Includes time while machine is performing

background printing. Does not include time
005 Off Mode Time
machine remains powered off with the power
switches.
M132 5-124 SM
006 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
Total time when paper jams have been staying

007 PrtJam
during printing.
Total time when original jams have been staying

008 OrgJam
during scanning.
009 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying
Electricity Status
8961
-
001 Ctrl Standby Time *CTL
002 STR Time *CTL
003 Main Power Off Time *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Reading and Printing

004 *CTL
Time
005 Printing Time *CTL
Service
Tables
006 Reading Time *CTL
007 Eng Waiting Time *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008 Low Power State Time *CTL
009 Silent State Time *CTL
SM 5-125 M132
Admin. Counter List

8999
-
001 Total
007 Printer: BW
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012 A3/DLT
013 Duplex
027 Printer: BW(%) [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
M132 5-126 SM
5.12.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE
Copier
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Input Check
5803 Reading
Description
0 1
001 Tray 1: Paper Size Sensor See the table 1 following this table.
002 Tray 1: Tray Set Sensor Set Not set
Service
Tables
003 Tray 1: Paper Lift Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
004 Tray 1: Paper End Sensor No paper Paper remaining
Tray 1:
005
Paper Height Sensor 1
See the table 2 following this table.
Tray 1:
006
Tray 2:
011 See the table 2 following this table.
SM 5-127 M132
Tray 2:
012
013 Tray 1: Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
017 LCT: Paper Feed Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
018 Relay Sensor 1 Paper detected No paper detected
020 Relay Sensor 3 No paper detected Paper detected
022 Relay Sensor: LCT No paper detected Paper detected
023 By-pass: Paper End Sensor Not end Paper end
024 By-pass: Paper Size Sensor See the table 3 following this table.
025 Registration Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
026 Fusing Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
027 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
028 Junction Gate Relay Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
029 Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
030 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
031 Right Cover Open/Close Close Open
032 Duplex Unit Open/Close Open Close
033 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
034 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
035 Bank Right Cover Open/Close Close Open
M132 5-128 SM
036 Tray Cover Open/Close Close Open
037 LCT Set Set Not set
038 Bridge Tray: Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
039 Bridge Tray: Relay Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
040 Bridge Tray: Set Detection Set Not set
Bridge Tray: Left Guide

041 Close Open
Open/Close
Bridge Tray: Right Guide

042 Close Open
Open/Close
043 Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor Not HP HP
044 New U. Det: Trans. New Not new
045 New U. Det: Fusing. New Not new
046 Fusing Unit Set Set (Bit1) Not set (Bit1)
047 Toner Overflow Sensor Not full Full
Right or front door is Right or front door is
Service
Tables
048 Interlock Detection 1
open. close.

open. close.
055 New U. Det. :PCDU New Not new
057 Cleaning Web End Not end End
058 Punch Switch On Off
Bypass Tray Paper Length

065 Paper detected No paper detected
Detection
200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close
SM 5-129 M132
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full 0 0
Nearly full 1 0
Near end 1 1
Almost empty 0 1
Table 2: Paper Size Switch

Switch 1 is used for the tray set detection.
0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 4 3 2
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 0 1
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF *2 B4 SEF *2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 1 0
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 1 1
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 0 0
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1
M132 5-130 SM
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-002 (Tray 1) or -006 (Tray 2).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-003 (Tray 1) or -007 (Tray 2).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-001 (Tray 1) or -005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of
SP 5-181-004 (Tray 1) or -008 (Tray 2)..
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

Models Bit No.
North America Europe/Asia 3 2 1 0
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 1 1 0
Service
Tables
(11" x 8.5" LEF) (A4 LEF)
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 1 0 0
(11" x 8.5" LEF) (A4 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1 A4 SEF*1

1 1 0 1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2) (A5 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1 A4 SEF*1

1 0 0 1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2) (B5 LEF)
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 1 0 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 0 0 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 0 1 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 1 1 1 1
SM 5-131 M132
 *1: When the machine determines that the paper feed direction is "LEF", it considers that
the paper size is bracketed size.
APS Original Size Detection
Width
Original Size Length Sensor SP4-301
Sensor
display
Metric version Inch version L3 L2 L1 W1 W2
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 00011111
B4 10" x 14" O O O O X 00011110
F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x 13",
or 8" x 13" 8.5" x 14" O O O X X 00011100
SP 5126 controls the
size that is detected
A4 LEF 8.5" x 11" X X X O O 00000011
B5 LEF - X X X O X 00000010
A4 SEF 11" x 8.5" X O O X X 00001100
B5 SEF - X X O X X 00000100
A5 LEF/ SEF 5.5" x 8.5",

X X X X X 00000000
8.5" x 5.5"
M132 5-132 SM
3000-Sheet Finisher (D636)
Reading
6140 Bit Description
0 1
001 Entrance Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
002 Proof Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
003 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full
No paper Paper
004 Upper Tray Exit Sensor
detected*1 detected*1
005 Staple Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
006 Shift Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
007 Shift Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
008 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
009 Lower Tray Height Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
Service
Tables
010 Upper Tray Height Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
011 Upper Tray Full Sensor Not Full Full
012 Stack Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
013 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
014 Feed Out Belt HP Sensor HP Not HP
015 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
016 Corner Stapler HP Sensor Not HP HP
017 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor Not HP HP
018 Upper Tray Limit SW Not Limit Limit
019 Door Switch Closed Open
020 Corner Stapler Operation Not HP HP
SM 5-133 M132
Reading
0 1
021 Staple Detection No staple detected Staple detected
022 Staple Dip Detection No staple detected Staple detected
023 Punch Movement HP Sensor Not HP HP
024 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor Not HP HP
025 Paper Position Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
026 Punch Full Sensor Not Full Full
027 Punch HP Sensor Not HP HP
028 Punch DIP SW 1 See *1
030 Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor Not HP HP
031 Stack Present Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
032 Clamp Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
033 Fold Entrance Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
034 Bottom Fence HP Sensor Not HP HP
035 Fold Cam HP Sensor Not HP HP
036 Fold Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
037 Fold Unit Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
038 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Front No paper detected Paper detected
039 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Rear No paper detected Paper detected
040 Booklet Stapler 1: Operation Not HP HP
041 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Front) No staple detected Staple detected
Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In

042 No staple detected Staple detected
(Leading Edge)
M132 5-134 SM
Reading
0 1
Booklet Stapler 1: Operation

043 Not HP HP
(Rotation/Rear)
044 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Rear) No staple detected Staple detected

(Leading Edge/Rear)
046 Upper Tray Full Sensor: 3000 Not Full Full
047 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Front Not HP HP
048 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Rear Not HP HP
049 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Upper Not HP HP
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type
0 0 Japan
Service
Tables
1 0 Europe
0 1 North America
1 1 North Europe
SM 5-135 M132
Reading
0 1
No paper
001 Entrance Sensor Paper detected
detected
Shift Exit Sensor

002 No paper detected Paper detected
(Lower Tray Exit Sensor)
Staple Entrance Sensor No paper

003 Paper detected
(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor) detected
Staple Moving HP Sensor

004 Not HP HP
(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
005 Not HP HP
(Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
006 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor HP Not HP
007 Staple Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
Staple Rotation Sensor

008 Not HP HP
(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
No staple
009 Staple Sensor Staple detected
detected
No staple
010 Staple READY Detection Staple detected
detected
Exit Guide Plate HP

011 Not HP HP
(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)
012 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper Sensor No output tray Output tray

013
(Stack Height Sensor) detected detected
Tray Lower Sensor

014 Lower limit Not lower limit
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
M132 5-136 SM
Reading
0 1
Proof Full Sensor

015 Not full Full
(Paper Limit Sensor)
5.12.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE
Copier
5804 Output Check
001 Exit Motor: 350
002 Exit Motor: 175
003 Exit Motor: 230

Paper exit motor (Mainframe)
004 Exit Motor: 180
005 Exit Motor: 154
Service
006 Exit Motor: 90
Tables
007 Feed Motor: 300
008 Feed Motor: 255
009 Feed Motor: 230
010 Feed Motor: 215 Paper feed motor (Mainframe)
011 Feed Motor: 180
012 Feed Motor: 154
013 Feed Motor: 90
014 Bank: Feed Motor: 300

Paper feed motor (Optional paper
feed unit)
SM 5-137 M132
5804 Output Check
021 LCT: Feed Motor: 300
024 LCT: Feed Motor: 215 Paper feed motor (Optional LCT)
028 Paper Feed Clutch 1

Paper feed clutch 1/2 (Mainframe)
030 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 3 Paper feed clutch 3/4 (Optional
031 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 4 paper feed unit)
032 LCT: Paper Feed Clutch Paper feed clutch (Optional LCT)
033 Pick-up Solenoid 1

Pick-up Solenoid 1/2 (Mainframe)
035 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 3 Pick-up Solenoid 3/4 (Optional
036 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 4 paper feed unit)
037 LCT: Pick-up Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (LCT)
038 Tray Lift Motor 1: Up
039 Tray Lift Motor 1: Down -
M132 5-138 SM
5804 Output Check
041 Tray Lift Motor 2: Down
042 Paper Tray Lock Solenoid Not used
Tray lock solenoid (Optional paper

043 Bank: Paper Tray Lock Solenoid
feed unit)
044 Registration Motor: 230

-
048 Exit: Junction Gate Solenoid Junction gate 1 solenoid
049 Duplex: Inverter Gate Solenoid Not used
050 Duplex Inverter Motor: Fwd: 230
Service
Tables
-
054 Duplex Inverter Motor: Rev: 230
058 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Fwd: 230

-
062 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Rev: 230
SM 5-139 M132
5804 Output Check
066 By-pass Feed Clutch -
067 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid -
068 Bridge Tray: Drive Motor: 230

Drive motor (Bridge unit)
Junction Gate Solenoid (Bridge

072 Bridge Tray: Junction Gate Solenoid
unit)
073 Bridge Tray: Drive Motor: Reset -
074 Bridge Tray: Drive Motor: Enable -
075 Bridge: Cooling Fan Motor Not used
076 Transfer Belt Contact Motor -
077 OPC Motor: 230
078 OPC Motor: 180

Drum motor
079 OPC Motor: 154
080 OPC Motor: 90
081 Transfer/Development Motor: 230

-
085 Fusing Motor: 230

-
M132 5-140 SM
5804 Output Check
089 Development Puddle Motor -
090 PTL Control -
091 Fusing Fan Motor: High

Fusing exhaust fan motor
092 Fusing Fan Motor: Low
093 Exhaust Fan Motor: High

Exhaust fan motor
094 Exhaust Fan Motor: Low
095 Duct Fan Motor Cooling fan motor
096 Exit Fan Motor: High

Paper exit cooling fan motor
097 Exit Fan Motor: Low
098 PSU Fan Motor -
100 Polygon Motor: 230
Service
Tables
-
104 LD 1
-
105 LD 2
106 Toner Bottle Motor: Fwd Toner supply motor
107 Quenching Lamp -
108 Charge Bias -
109 Development Bias -
110 Transfer Belt Voltage -
111 ID Sensor LED -
SM 5-141 M132
5804 Output Check
112 Attention light: Buzzer -
113 Attention light: Blue lamp -
114 Attention light: Red lamp -
115 Cleaning Web Motor Web motor
117 CTL Cooling FAN Controller fan
Output Check
6144
Display Description
001 Upper Relay Motor Upper Transport Motor
002 Lower Relay Motor Lower Transport Motor
003 Exit Motor -
004 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
005 Lower Tray Lift Motor -
006 Jogger Fence Motor -
007 Stapler Motor -
008 Stapler Hammer -
009 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid -
010 Positioning Roller Solenoid -
011 Stack Feed-out Motor -
012 Shift Motor -
013 Exit Guide Plate Motor -
M132 5-142 SM
5.12.3 3000-SHEET FINISHER (D636)
Output
6145
Display Description
001 Entrance Motor -
002 Upper Transport Motor -
003 Lower Transport Motor -
004 Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor -
005 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor -
006 Shift Roller Motor -
008 Upper Tray Lift Motor -
009 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor -
Service
Tables
011 Feed Out Belt Motor -
012 Corner Stapler Movement Motor -
013 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor -
014 Corner Stapler -
015 Proof Junction Gate Solenoid -
016 Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid -
Stapling Edge Pressure Plate

017 -
Solenoid
019 Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid -
020 Stack Junction Gate Motor -
021 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor -
SM 5-143 M132
022 Booklet Stapler: Front -
023 Booklet Stapler: Rear -
024 Fold Plate Motor -
025 Fold Roller Motor -
026 Positioning Roller Motor -
027 Punch Drive Motor -
028 Punch Movement Motor -
029 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor -
030 Exit Jogger Motor: Front -
031 Exit Jogger Motor: Rear -
032 Exit Jogger Motor Release Motor -
M132 5-144 SM
Updating the Firmware
5.13 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware
downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2
(Lower Slot) on the controller box.
5.13.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD
cards:
 Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card into the
slot with the power on.
 Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on.
 Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
 Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high
humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
 Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the SD card get
exposed to shock or vibration.
 Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an
application to it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs
during a firmware upgrade.
Service
Tables
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
 "Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card. "Download" means to send
data from the SD card to the machine.
 To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of the
LCD.
 Disconnect the Ethernet interface cable, Gigabit Ethernet cable, IEEE1284 interface cable
and remove the Wireless LAN interface board before you start the firmware update procedure.
Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for
arriving while the firmware update is in progress.
SM 5-145 M132
5.13.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE
Preparation
1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
2. If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "M132" folder onto the card.
Updating Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off.
3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (Lower Slot) [A]. Make sure the label on the SD card
faces the rear side of the machine.
4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. You will hear it click. Make sure the
SD card locks in place.
 To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops out
of the slot.
5. Disconnect the network cable from the machine if the machine is connected to a network.
6. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version update screen
appears on the LCD in English.
M132 5-146 SM
7. On the screen, touch the button on the operation panel to select the item in the menu that you
want to update.
ROM/NEW What it means
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version
ROM: currently installed. The first line is the module number, the second
line the version name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD
NEW: card. The first line is the module number, the second line the
version name.
 Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same time.
It is recommended to update firmware modules one by one.
8. Touch "UpDate (#)" to start the update.
 While downloading is in progress, the LCD will display "Loading". When downloading
has been completed, the panel will display "update done".
 For operation panel software, the Data In indicator flashes red while downloading is
in progress, and then the Check Status indicator flashes green after downloading is
Service
Tables
completed.
9. The "Update done." message appears on the operation panel after completing the updating.
The message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated.
10. Switch the main power switch off when you see the "Update done" message or follow the
procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
11. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
12. Switch the main power switch on for normal operation.
Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number. The example above shows error "E24"
displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table. ( "Handling Firmware Update Errors"
in this section)
SM 5-147 M132
Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update
because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.
Recovery after Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is
updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is
switched on again. If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in
order to ensure the correct operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show
until the ROM is updated successfully.
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download
automatically from the card without the menu display.
M132 5-148 SM
5.13.3 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS

An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error code
consists of the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or

20 Cannot map logical address
use a different SD card.
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace HDD.
Cannot decompress Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

22
compressed data damaged.
Error occurred when ROM Controller program defective. If the second

23
update program started attempt fails, replace controller board.
Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly, or

24 SD card access error
use a different SD card.
No HDD available for stamp
Service
Tables
30 HDD connection incorrect or replace HDD.
data download
Insert the SD card with the remaining data

Data incorrect for continuous
31 required for the download, the re-start the
download
procedure.
Execute the recovery procedure for the intended

Data incorrect after download
32 module download, then repeat the installation
interrupted
procedure.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

33 Incorrect SD card version
corrupted.
Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct

34 module is not on the SD data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install
card) again.
SM 5-149 M132
Code Meaning Solution
Module mismatch – Module SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD

35 on SD card is not for this card is for another machine. Acquire correct
machine update data then install again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD

Cannot write module –
36 card is for another machine. Acquire correct
Cause other than E34, E35
update data then install again.
Replace the update data for the module on the

Engine module download
40 SD card and try again, or replace the BCU
failed
board.
Operation panel module Replace the update data for the module on the
42
download failed SD card and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module Replace the update data for the module on the
43
download failed SD card and try again, or replace the hard disks.
Replace the update data for the module on the

Controller module download
44 SD card and tray again, or replace controller
failed
board.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD

Electronic confirmation check
50 card is for another machine. Acquire correct
failed
update data then install again.
M132 5-150 SM
Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data
5.14 UPLOADING/DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA
The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from an SD card.
5.14.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-824)

1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x 1).
Service
3. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 (Lower Slot) [A]. Tables
5. Execute SP5-824.
6. Press the "EXECUTE" button to start uploading the NVRAM data.
SM 5-151 M132
Uploading/Downloading NVRAM Data
5.14.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA (SP5-825)

The following data are not downloaded from the SD card:
 Total counter
 Duplex, A3/DLT/Over 420 mm, Staple counters (system settings).
1. Turn off the main switch.
3. Plug the SD card into SD card slot 2 (Lower Slot) [A].

5. Execute SP5-825.
6. Press the "EXECUTE" button to start downloading the NVRAM data.
Note that the following errors could occur during downloading:
 If a card is not installed in the card slot and a message tells you that downloading cannot
proceed, you cannot execute downloading, even by pressing the "EXECUTE" button.
 If the correct card for the NVRAM data is not inserted in the card slot, after you press the
"EXECUTE" button a message will tell you that downloading cannot proceed because the
card is abnormal and the execution will halt.
M132 5-152 SM
Self-Diagnostic Mode
5.15 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5.15.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE AT POWER ON

As soon as the main machine is powered on, the controller waits for the initial settings of the
printer engine to take effect and then starts an independent self-diagnostic test program. The
self-diagnostic test follows the path of the flow chart shown below and checks the CPU, memory,
HDD, and so on. An SC code is displayed in the touch panel if the self-diagnostic program detects
any malfunction or abnormal condition.
Service
Tables
SM 5-153 M132
Self-Diagnostic Mode
5.15.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TEST FLOW
5.15.3 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Do not use the detailed self-diagnostic mode in this model.
This mode is only for factory use to test other components or conditions that are not tested during
self-diagnosis after power on.
If you entered the self-diagnostic mode by accident, turn the main power switch off and on.
M132 5-154 SM
Using the Debug Log
5.16 USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.16.1 OVERVIEW
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and
retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but this information
is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
 Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later
retrieval.
 Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure below to set up the
machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD. Then ask the user to
reproduce the problem.
5.16.2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved until the "Save Debug Log" function has been switched
on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode.
Service
Tables
3. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, press “1 On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)”.
4. Press “10Key” to open the number entry screen.
5. Enter “1” then press “OK”. This switches the Save Debug Log feature on.
SM 5-155 M132
Using the Debug Log
 The default setting is "0" (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the
debug information to be saved.
6. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857
Save Debug Log", press “2 Target (2:HDD 3:SD)”.
7. Press “10Key” to open the number entry screen.
8. Enter “2” to select the hard disk as the target destination, and then press “OK”.
 Enter "3” to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is inserted in Slot 2
(Lower Slot).
9. Now touch "5858" and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log. SP5858
(Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
Saves data when an engine-related SC code is

1 Engine SC Error
generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-related SC Code

2 Controller SC Error
is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by

3 Any SC Error
entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
M132 5-156 SM
Using the Debug Log
 More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s) and press “10Key”. On the number entry screen, enter "1",
and then press “OK”. Do the same settings for each selection. This example shows "Engine
SC Error" selected.
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch "3 Any SC Error" and press “10Key”. On the number entry screen, enter the 3-digit SC
code number, and then press “OK”. This example shows an entry for SC670.
Service
Tables
 For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section "6.
Troubleshooting"
10. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information.
Touch "5859".
Under "5859" press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record. Press
“10Key” to open the number entry screen.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press “OK”.
SM 5-157 M132
Using the Debug Log
 Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The example below shows "Key 1" with "2222" entered.
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses
indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
Key No. Printer Web
1 2222 (SCS)
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4400 (GPS) 5682 (NFA)
7 4500 (PDL) 6600 (WebDB)
8 4600 (GPS-PM) 3300 (PTS)
9 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)
 The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero ("0").
M132 5-158 SM
Using the Debug Log
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GSP-PM GW Print Service – Print PTS Print Server

Module
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
MCS Memory Control Service SRM System Resource

Management
NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box

(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the SD card or HDD
(the target selected with SP5-857-002) for the events that you selected SP5-858 and the memory
modules selected with SP5-859.
Service
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
Tables
 The initial settings are all zero.
 These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings,
especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that key.
 You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding 4-digit
numbers from the table.
 One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to 4
MB.
SM 5-159 M132
Using the Debug Log
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD

1. Insert the SD card into Slot 2 (Lower Slot).
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB) to write
the debugging data to the SD card.
 The SD card can hold up to 4MB of data. If the debugging data is larger than 4MB,
you can switch to another SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative
by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
M132 5-160 SM
SMC List Card Save Function
5.17 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION
5.17.1 OVERVIEW
SMC List Card Save

The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the
SD-card inserted into the operation panel SD-card slot.
5.17.2 PROCEDURE
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.
2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD-card slot. Then turn the power ON.
3. Enter SP mode.
Service
Tables
5. Select SP-5992 "SP Text Mode”.
6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
SP-5992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
SM 5-161 M132
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
024 SDK/J Summary
026 Printer SP
7. Press “EXECUTE”.
8. Press “EXECUTE” again to start. Press “CANCEL” to cancel the saving.

9. ”It is executing it.” is shown on the screen while executing.
10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown.
 The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

 Press “CANCEL” to abort executing.
11. Press “Exit” to exit from SP mode.
M132 5-162 SM
5.17.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS

The SMC list data saved on the SD-card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
follows.
Example:
 [A]: Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)

 [B]:SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP
number(s). In this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See
the upper SP table for the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
 [C]: File creation date
Year/Month/Day (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
 [D]: File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
 [E]: File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.
 A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
Service
Tables
function is executed.
 This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation
panel SD card slot.
5.17.4 ERROR MESSAGES

SMC List Card Save error message:
 Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing “Exit” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready
state.
SM 5-163 M132
TROUBLESHOOTING
26 12/26/2014 Added SC672 information
26 3/31/2015 Added SC672 information
Service Call Conditions
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
6.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
To prevent damage to the machine, the main Enter SP mode, use SP

machine cannot be operated until the SC has 5810, touch [Execute], and
A
been reset by a service representative (see the then turn the main power
note below). switch off and on.
SCs that disable only the features that use the

defective item. Although these SCs are not shown
Turn the operation switch or
B to the user under normal conditions, they are
main switch off and on.
displayed on the operation panel only when the
defective feature is selected.
The SC will not be displayed.

The SC history is updated. The machine can be
C Only the SC history is
operated as usual.
updated.
Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs Turn the operation switch off
D displayed on the operation panel. These are and on.
shooting
Trouble-
re-displayed if the error occurs again. Also see below.
When a Level "D" SC code occurs

When a Level D SC occurs, a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the operator:
 An error occurred
 The job in progress will be erased
 The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or touch "Reset" on the screen to
reset the machine immediately and go back to the Home screen.
SM 6-1 M132
If the operator does not touch "Reset"

The next message tells the operator that the machine will reset automatically and that the
previous job was lost and must be started again. After reading the message, the operator touches
"Confirm" on the screen. The next screen shows the number and title of the SC code, and stops
until the operator turns the machine off and on.
If the operator touches "Reset"
If the operator touches "Reset" to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to reboot, the
machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the Home screen.
 Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.

 If the Remote Service System is in use, the SC code is sent immediately to the Service
Center.
6.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
 If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors and then
test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of the problem.
Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB.
 If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to replace the
motor or sensors.
 When a Level "A" or "B" SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot display the
SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP mode.
 The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level "D" SC code. This
is done for Level "D" SC codes only.
SC Tables: SC1xx
Serial Number Mismatch
Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code.
195 D
 EEPROM defective
 BCU replaced without original EEPROM
M132 6-2 SM
SC Tables: SC2xx
Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout
202 D The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within
10 sec. after turning on or changing speed
Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout
203 D The polygon mirror motor does not leave the READY status within 3 sec.
after the polygon motor switched off.
Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error
The SCRDY_N signal remains HIGH for 200 ms while the LD unit is firing.
204 D  Polygon motor/driver board harness loose or broken

 Polygon motor/driver board defective
 Laser optics unit defective
 Bridge board defective
Laser synchronizing detection error: start position LD0
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB is
not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is
rotating normally
220 D
 Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or
shooting
Trouble-
defective connection
 Defective laser synchronizing detector
 Defective LD board
 Defective BCU
SM 6-3 M132
Laser synchronizing detection error: start position LD1
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB is
not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is
rotating normally.
221 D
 Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or
defective connection
 Defective laser synchronizing detector
 Defective LD board
 Defective BCU
FGATE ON error
230 D The FGATE signal does not assert within the prescribed time. (The bridge
board generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the
registration sensor switches on.)
FGATE OFF error
The FGATE signal does not assert within the prescribed time. (The bridge
board generates the FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the
231 D registration sensor switches on.)
 BCU, Controller board harness loose or broken

 Controller board defective
 BCU defective
LD error
The bridge board detected a problem at the LD unit.

240 C
 Worn-out LD
 Disconnected or broken harness of the LD.
M132 6-4 SM
GAVD communication error
 The I2C bus device ID is not identified during initialization.

 A device-status error occurs during I2C bus communication.
 The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other than
270 D a buffer shortage.
 BCU, Bridge board harness loose or broken

 Defective bridge board
 Defective BCU
 Defective LD controller board
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-5 M132
SC Tables: SC3xx
Charge roller bias leak
A charge roller bias leak signal was detected.

302 D
 Charge roller damaged
 High voltage supply board defective
 PCDU harness defective or disconnected
Charge roller bias correction leak
The charge roller bias correction is performed twice even if the maximum
charge roller bias (-2000V) is applied to the roller.
304 D
 ID sensor defective
 Worn charge roller
 Charge roller damaged
Development roller bias leak
The development roller bias leak is detected for 60 ms after the high voltage
has been supplied to the development unit.
320 D
 Development bias leak
 Broken harness
 Defective high voltage power supply, voltage supply
 Defective high voltage supply unit
Development paddle motor error
The machine detects a lock signal error from the development puddle motor
for 2 seconds after the drum motor has turned on.
324 D
 Overload on the development puddle motor
 Defective development puddle motor
 Defective harness
 Defective IOB
M132 6-6 SM
ID sensor pattern test error
One of the following readings occurred 10 times in the ID sensor output when
the ID sensor pattern was checked:
1) Vsp > 2.5V
2) Vsg < 2.5V
3) Vsp =0V
350 D
4) Vsg = 0V
 ID sensor connector defective

 Poor ID sensor connector connection
 I/O board (IOB) defective
 Poor writing of ID sensor pattern on the drum
ID sensor Vsg test error
When the ID sensor was checked, the ID sensor output voltage is 5.0V while
the LED current value is 0.
 ID sensor defective or dirty

351 D
 ID sensor connector defective
 Poor ID sensor connection
 Defect at the ID sensor pattern writing area of the drum
shooting
Trouble-
Grayscale measurement error
When the grayscale control result is the maximum and it does not operate
correctly and these cases are detected 15 times.
355 C
 ID sensor defective or dirty
 The life of ID sensor or photo conductor
 Shield glass dirty
SM 6-7 M132
TD sensor (Vt) error 1
The following condition occurs thirty times consecutively during printing. Vt is

less than 0.5V or 4.8V or more
360 D
 TD sensor disconnected
 Harness between TD sensor and PCDU defective
 Defective TD sensor.
TD sensor adjustment error
Vts is less than 1.8V or 4.8V or more during TD sensor initialization.
372 D  Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack

 TD harness sensor disconnected, loose or defective
 TD sensor defective
 Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective
Drum motor error
The machine detects a lock signal error from the drum motor for 2 seconds
after the drum motor turned on.
396 D
 Overload on the motor
 Defective drum motor
 Defective IOB
M132 6-8 SM
SC Tables: SC4xx
Vsg adjustment error
Vsg is more than 4.2V or 3.8V or less when the machine adjusts Vsg value.
400 D
 Dirty or defective ID sensor
 Defective ID sensor shutter
Transfer belt bias error
The feed back bias from the transfer belt is more than 4V for 60 msec while
the transfer belt bias is output.
The A/D conversion level is 20 or less for 60 msec.
440 D
The PWM duty is 24% or more for 60 msec.
 Power pack broken

 Disconnected connector
Transfer/Development motor error
The machine detects a lock signal error from the transfer/development motor
for a continuous 20 times after the transfer/development motor turned on.
441 D
 Overload on the motor
shooting
 Defective transfer/development motor Trouble-
 Defective IOB
SM 6-9 M132
Transfer belt contact motor error
The transfer belt HP sensor detects incorrect movement of the transfer belt
after the transfer belt contact motor has turned on.
442 D  Dirty transfer belt HP sensor

 Defective transfer belt contact motor
 Disconnected connector of the transfer belt HP sensor or motor
 Disconnected cable
 Defective IOB
M132 6-10 SM
SC Tables: SC5xx
1st tray lift malfunction
The tray lift sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10
seconds. If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at
the feed height, the paper height position is detected again. At this time, the
tray lift sensor should de-activate within 1.5 sec after the paper bottom plate
starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 1.5 sec., a message will prompt
the user to reset Tray 1. After two attempts to release the error by re-setting
501 B
the paper tray, if this does not solve the problem then this SC is displayed.
 An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the

motor drive and caused an overload.
 Tray lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
 Tray lift sensor defective
 Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
 Tray lift motor defective
2nd tray lift malfunction
The tray lift sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10
seconds. If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at
the feed height, the paper height position is detected again. At this time, the
tray lift sensor should de-activate within 1.5 sec. after the paper bottom plate
shooting
starts to drop. If it does not deactivate within 1.5 sec., a message will prompt Trouble-
the user to reset Tray 2. After two attempts to re-set the paper tray, if this
502 B
does not solve the problem then this SC is displayed.
 An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the

motor drive and caused an overload.
 Tray lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
 Tray lift sensor defective
 Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
 Tray lift motor defective
SM 6-11 M132
3rd tray lift malfunction (optional paper feed unit or LCT)
For the paper feed unit:

 The lift sensor does not turn on within 15 seconds after the tray lift motor
has turned on.
 When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec. If
this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
For the LCT:
 The lift sensor does not turn on or turn off within 8 seconds after the tray
lift motor has turned on to lift or lower the tray.
 When the main switch is turned on or when the LCT is set, if the end
fence is not in its position (home position sensor ON), the tray lift motor
stops. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is
generated.
 If the upper limit does not go off for 1.5 seconds even the tray lift motor
turns on to lower the tray after the upper limit has been detected at
power on. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is
503 B
generated.
 The paper is detected in the left tray even the end fence is not its
position (home position sensor OFF) after the left tray set switch is on at
power on. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is
generated.

 Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection
 Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection
For the LCT:
 Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection
 Defective tray motor or connector disconnection
 Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection
 Defective upper limit sensor or connector disconnection
 Defective pick-up solenoid or connector disconnection
 Left tray set switch or connector disconnection
M132 6-12 SM
4th tray lift malfunction (optional paper feed unit or LCT)
For the two-tray paper feed unit:

 When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within
15 seconds. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is
generated.
 When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
For the LCT:
 After the job is finished, if the end fence is not in the home position
(home position sensor ON), the tray lift motor stops.
 When the main switch is turned on or when the paper feed unit is set, if
the end fence is not in the home position (home position sensor ON), the
504 B
tray lift motor stops. If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the
SC is generated.
 If the upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray
lift motor is turned on to lift up or lower the tray.
 When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.

For the LCT:
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-13 M132
5th tray lift malfunction (optional paper feed unit or LCT)
For the two-tray paper feed unit:

 If the upper limit of the two-tray paper feed unit is not detected within 15
seconds when the tray lift motor is turned on to lift up the tray.
 When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec. If
this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
For the LCT:
505 B
 If the upper limit of the LCT 1200-sheet is not detected within 8 seconds
when the tray lift motor is turned on to lift up or lower the tray.
 The tray lift sensor of the LCT 1200-sheet does not go off within 1.5
seconds when the tray lowers. If this condition occurs three consecutive
times, the SC is generated.
 Tray lift motor defective or disconnected

 Upper limit sensor defective or disconnected
Fusing exhaust fan motor error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on the
fusing exhaust fan.
530 D
 Defective fusing exhaust fan motor or connector disconnection
 Defective IOB
 Disconnected harness
Exhaust fan motor error
exhaust fan motor.
531 D
 Defective exhaust fan motor or connector disconnection.
 Defective IOB
M132 6-14 SM
Cooling fan motor error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds after
turning on the cooling fan motor.
532 D
 Defective cooling fan motor or connector disconnection.
 Defective IOB
Paper exit cooling fan motor error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 10 seconds after
turning on the paper exit cooling fan motor.
533 D
 Defective paper exit cooling fan motor or connector disconnection.
 Defective IOB
Fusing motor error
fusing motor.
540 D
 Motor overload
 Defective fusing motor or connector disconnection.
 Defective IOB
shooting
 Disconnected harness Trouble-
Fusing thermistor open (center)
The thermistor (center) detects 0°C or less for 16 sec. in a row.

541 A
 Fusing thermistor disconnected
 Fusing thermistor connector defective
SM 6-15 M132
Fusing temperature warm-up error(center)
This SC is generated if the following condition occurs:

 The thermistor (center) does not detect an 8°C increment in the fusing
temperature for 1.5 sec. just after the fusing temperature reached 45°C.
 The temperature of the center thermistor does not reach 60°C for 7
542 A
seconds after the fusing lamps turned on.
 The temperature of the center thermistor does not reach the target
temperature for 26 seconds after the fusing lamps turned on.
 Thermistor warped or broken

 Input voltage is unwarranted
Fusing overheat error 1 (software detection)
A fusing temperature (at the center) of over 230°C (446°F) is detected for 1
second by the fusing thermistors at the center or at either end of the fusing
roller.
543 A
 Power supply unit defective
 BCU defective
 TRIAC short on PSU (PSU defective)
Fusing overheat error 1 (hardware detection)
A fusing temperature (at the center) over 250°C is detected by the fusing
temperature monitor circuit in the BCU board.
544 A
 BCU defective
 TRIAC short on bridge board (bridge board defective)
M132 6-16 SM
Fusing lamp consecutive full power 1
After warm-up the fusing lamp remains at full power for 10 seconds without
the hot roller rotating.
545 A
 Thermistors (center) warped
 Disconnected or defective thermistors (center)
 Defective fusing lamp
Zero cross error
 The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater
relay is off when turning on the main power.
 The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the
heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front
door.
547 D
 The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal
detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is
less than 45.
 Defective fusing lamp relay

 Defective fusing lamp relay circuit
 Unstable power supply
Fusing thermistor open (end)
shooting
Trouble-
The thermistor (end) detects 0°C or less for 16 sec.
551 A
 Fusing thermistor (end) disconnected
 Fusing thermistor (end) connector defective
SM 6-17 M132
Fusing temperature warm-up error (end)
This SC is generated if the following condition occurs:

 The thermistor (end) does not detect an 8°C increment in the fusing
temperature for 1.5 sec. just after the fusing temperature reached 45°C.
 The temperature of the center thermistor does not reach 60°C for 7
552 A
seconds after the fusing lamps turned on.
 The temperature of the end thermistor does not reach the target
temperature for 26 seconds after the fusing lamps turned on.
 Thermistor warped or broken

 Input voltage is unwarranted
Fusing overheat error 2 (software detection)
A fusing temperature (at the end) of over 230°C (446°F) is detected for 1
second by the fusing thermistors at the center or at either end of the fusing
roller.
553 A
 Power supply unit defective
 BCU defective
Fusing overheat error 2 (hardware detection)
A fusing temperature (at the end) over 250°C is detected by the fusing
temperature monitor circuit in the BCU board.
554 A
 BCU defective
M132 6-18 SM
Fusing lamp consecutive full power 2
After warm-up, the fusing lamp remains at full power for 10 seconds without
the hot roller rotating.
555 A
 Thermistor (ends) warped
 Disconnected or defective thermistors (ends)
 Defective fusing lamp
Zero cross frequency error
When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or more
557 C in 11 detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and SC557
occurs.
 Noise (High frequency)
Fusing unit jam
The fusing sensor detected a fusing unit paper late jam three times. The
paper was late and the fusing exit sensor could not detect the paper three
times.
559 A
 Remove the paper that is stopped in the fusing unit.
 Check that the fusing unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper
feed path.
shooting
 If the error persists, replace the fusing unit. Trouble-
 SC559 does not operate until SP1159 has been set to "1" (ON). This sets the machine to
count the number of occurrences of paper late jams in the fusing unit. The default setting
is "0" (OFF).
 SC559 is issued after the third occurrence of a paper late jam in the fusing unit. Once this
SC has been issued, the machine cannot be used until the service technician removes
the cause of the jam and restores it to normal operation.
 The jam counter is reset after a sheet of paper successfully passes the fusing exit sensor
after the cause of the jam has been removed.
SM 6-19 M132
SC Tables: SC6xx
Mechanical counter error: BK
This SC is only for NA models.

The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987-001 is set
610 D
to "1".
 Disconnected mechanical counter

 Defective mechanical counter
Communication timeout error between IOB and finisher or mailbox
 The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by the finisher or
the mailbox only just after the main switch is turned on.
621 D  The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by URAT.
 Defective main control board of the peripheral

 Defective BCU or IOB
 Disconnected peripheral
Paper feed unit communication error
While the IOB communicates with a peripheral, an SC code is displayed if

one of following conditions occurs.
 The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by the peripheral
622 D only just after the main switch is turned on.
 The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by URAT.
 Defective main control board of the peripheral

 Defective BCU or IOB
 Disconnected peripheral
M132 6-20 SM
2nd Paper Bank communication error
This SC is not issued for this machine.

623 D When a communication error signal between the 1st paper bank and 2nd
paper bank is received.
 Loose connector
636 D IC Card Error
External authentication module error
This SC is generated if the external authentication is enabled and following
-01 - condition occurs:

 No external authentication module
 SD card error or external authentication module broken
 No DESS module
Version error
-02 - The version of the external authentication module is not correct.
 Incorrect module version
OSM User Code File Error
The correct "usercode" file could not be found in the root folder of the SD
card because the file is not present, or the existing file is corrupted or the
shooting
-11 - wrong type file. Trouble-
Make sure the “usercode” file is installed in the root folder of the SD card
where the eccm.mod file is saved.
Note: Check the eccm.mod file is in the root folder of the SD card.
SM 6-21 M132
637 D Tracking Information Notice Error
Tracking Application Error
When the tracking information is lost, this SC is issued.

-01 -
 The machine failed to give notice the tracking information to the
tracking SDK application.
 Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly.
Tracking Information Notice Error
When the tracking information is lost, this SC is issued.

-02 -
 The machine failed to give notice the tracking information to the
management server.
 Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly.
BCU communication error
The BCU does not respond to the frame transmitted from the controller.
641 D
 Defective controller
 Detective BCU
M132 6-22 SM
Communication error of the remote service modem

650 B
(Embedded RCG-N)
Communication line error
The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to a defective communication line

or defective connection.
-05 -
 Incorrect SP settings
 Disconnected telephone line
 Disconnected modem board
Consult with the user's local telephone company.
Modem board error 2
The modem board is installed even though the RCG-N is installed.

-14 -
 Disconnect the Wireless LAN or Ethernet LAN board
1. Uninstall the modem board, if it is installed.
2. Check that the Wireless LAN or Ethernet LAN is working properly.
Incorrect dial up connection
-01: Program parameter error
-02: Program execution error

651 C
An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M) tries to
shooting
call the center with a dial up connection. Trouble-
 Caused by a software bug
SM 6-23 M132
ID2 mismatching
ID2 for @Remote certification is mismatching between the controller board

and NVRAM.
 Used controller board installed

652 D  Used NVRAM installed

call the center with a dial up connection.
1. Install the correct controller board or new controller board.

2. Install the correct NVRAM or new NVRAM.
ID2 error
ID2 stored in the NVRAM is incorrect.
 Used NVRAM installed

653 D
call the center with a dial up connection.
Clear the ID2 in the NVRAM, and then input a correct ID2.
669 D EEPROM error
[1] Open communication error: ID error
[2] Open communication error: Channel error
[3] Open communication error: Device error
[4] Open communication error: Communication failed error
- - [5] Open communication error: Communication time error
Open communication error: Communication suspended

[6]
error
[7] Open communication error: Buffer full error
[8] Close communication error: No error code
M132 6-24 SM
[9] Close communication error: ID error
[10] Close communication error: No error code
[11] Data write error: ID error
[12] Data write error: Channel error
[13] Data write error: Device error
[14] Data write error: Communication suspended error
[15] Data write error: Communication time over error
[16] Data write error: Communication suspended error
[17] Data write error: Buffer full error
[18] Data write error: No error code
[19] Data read error: ID error
[20] Data read error: Channel error
[21] Data read error: Device error
[22] Data read error: Communication failed error
[23] Data read error: Communication time over error
[24] Data read error: Communication suspended error
[25] Data read error: Buffer full error
shooting
Trouble-
[26] Data read error: No error code
[27] Device detection error: ID error
[28] Device detection error: Channel error

- -
[29] Device detection error: Device error
[30] Device detection error: Communication failed error
[31] Device detection error: Communication time over error
[32] Device detection error: Communication suspended error
[33] Device detection error: Buffer full error
SM 6-25 M132
Service Call Conditions Rev. 3/31/2015
[34] Device detection error: No error code
Retry of EEPROM communication fails three times after the machine has
detected the EEPROM error.
Caused by noise
Engine startup error
The BCU fails to respond with the prescribed time when the machine is
turned on.
670 D
Connections between BCU and controller board are loose,
disconnected, or damaged
1. Replace the BCU
2. Replace the controller board
⇒ Controller-to-Operation Panel communication error at startup

After powering on the machine, communication between the controller and
operation panel does not begin, or the communication is interrupted after a
normal startup.
Controller stalled
Controller board installed incorrectly
672 B Defective controller board
Operation panel connector loose or defective
Poor connection of DIMM and optional boards on the controller board
1. Turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
2. Check the connection of the harness that connects with the operational
panel.
3. Check the connections of controller board.
4. Replace the controller board.
Transmission error in controller board
674 D Video transmission error is detected in the controller board.
Defective Controller Board
Memory address (PER) command error
The BCU does not receive a memory address command from the controller
for the prescribed time after the paper has reached the registration sensor.
687 D
Harness Disconnection at BCU
Controller board loose or broken
Defective BCU
Defective Controller Board
M132 6-26 SM
SC Tables: SC7xx
720 B 3000-Sheet Finisher Error
Finisher exit guide plate motor error
 The exit guide plate HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
exit guide plate within the specified number of pulses after the exit guide
plate has moved to its home position.
 The exit guide plate HP sensor does not turn off within the specified
number of pulses after the exit guide plate has moved from its home
position.
-24 -
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
 Exit guide plate motor disconnected, defective

 Exit guide plate motor harness is loose or broken
 Exit guide plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Exit guide plate HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Exit guide plate motor overloaded due to obstruction
Finisher punch motor error
 The punch HP sensor does not detect the home position of the punch
unit within the specified number of pulses after the punch unit has
moved to its home position.
 The punch HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of
shooting
Trouble-
pulses after the punch unit has moved from its home position.
-25 - The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this
SC code.
 Punch motor disconnected or defective

 Punch motor harness is loose or broken
 Punch HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Punch HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Punch motor overload due to obstruction
SM 6-27 M132
Finisher jogger motor error
 The jogger HP sensor does not detect the home position of the jogger
fences within the specified number of pulses after the jogger fences
have moved to its home position.
 The jogger HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of
pulses after the jogger fences have moved from its home position.
The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues
-30 -
this SC code.
 Jogger motor disconnected, defective

 Jogger motor harness is loose or broken
 Jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Jogger HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
 Defective main board
Stack feed-out motor error
 The stack feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
stack feed-out belt within the specified number of pulses after the stack
feed-out belt has moved to its home position.
 The stack feed-out HP sensor does not turn off within the specified
number of pulses after the stack feed-out belt has moved from its home
position.
SC code.
 Stack feed-out motor disconnected, defective

 Stack feed-out motor harness is loose or broken
 Stack feed-out HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Stack feed-out HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Stack feed-out motor overloaded due to obstruction
 Defective main board
M132 6-28 SM
Finisher stapler movement motor error
 The stapler HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stapler
within the specified number of pulses after the stapler has moved to its
home position.
 The stapler HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number of
pulses after the stapler has moved from its home position.
SC code.
 Stapler movement motor disconnected, defective

 Stapler movement motor harness is loose or broken
 Stapler HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Stapler HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Stapler movement motor overloaded due to obstruction
Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error
 The corner stapler HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
corner stapler within the specified number of pulses after the corner
stapler has moved to its home position.
 The corner stapler HP sensor does not turn off within the specified
number of pulses after the corner stapler has moved from its home
position.
-43 -
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this
SC code.
shooting
Trouble-
 Corner stapler rotation motor disconnected, defective
 Corner stapler rotation motor harness is loose or broken
 Corner stapler rotation HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Corner stapler rotation HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Corner stapler rotation motor overloaded due to obstruction
SM 6-29 M132
Finisher corner stapler motor error
SC code.
 The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after
operating.
-44 -
 Staple jam
 Corner stapler motor disconnected, defective
 Corner stapler motor harness is loose or broken
 Corner stapler HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Corner stapler HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Corner stapler motor overloaded
Finisher folder plate motor error
 The folder plate HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
folder plate within the specified number of pulses after the folder plate
has moved to its home position.
 The folder plate HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number
of pulses after the folder plate has moved from its home position.
SC code.
 Folder plate motor disconnected, defective

 Folder plate motor harness is loose or broken
 Folder plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Folder plate HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction
M132 6-30 SM
Folding unit bottom fence lift motor
 The folding unit bottom fence HP sensor does not detect the home
position of the folding unit bottom fence within the specified number of
pulses after the folding unit bottom fence has moved to its home
position.
 The folding unit bottom fence HP sensor does not turn off within the
specified number of pulses after the folding unit bottom fence has
-53 - moved from its home position.
SC code.
 Folding unit bottom fence motor disconnected, defective

 Folding unit bottom fence motor harness is loose or broken
 Folding unit bottom fence HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Folding unit bottom fence HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Folding unit bottom fence motor overloaded due to obstruction
Clamp roller retraction motor error
 The clamp roller HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
clamp roller cam within the specified number of pulses after the clamp
roller cam has moved to its home position.
 The clamp roller HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number
of pulses after the clamp roller cam has moved from its home position.
shooting
SC code. Trouble-
 Clamp roller retraction motor disconnected, defective

 Clamp roller retraction motor harness is loose or broken
 Clamp roller HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Clamp roller HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Clamp roller retraction motor overloaded due to obstruction
SM 6-31 M132
Stack junction gate motor error
 The stack junction gate HP sensor does not detect the home position of
the stack junction gate within the specified number of pulses after the
stack junction gate has moved to its home position.
 The stack junction gate HP sensor does not turn off within the specified
number of pulses after the stack junction gate has moved from its home
position.
-57 -
SC code.
 Stack junction gate motor disconnected, defective

 Stack junction gate motor harness is loose or broken
 Stack junction gate HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Stack junction gate HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Stack junction gate motor overloaded due to obstruction
Booklet stapler motor error 1
SC code.
The front stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the
-60 - specified time.
 Staple jam
 Front stapler motor disconnected, defective
 Front stapler motor harness is loose or broken
 Front stapler motor overloaded
Booklet staple motor error 2
SC code.
The rear stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the
-61 - specified time.
 Staple jam
 Rear stapler motor disconnected, defective
 Rear stapler motor harness is loose or broken
 Rear stapler motor overloaded
M132 6-32 SM
Tray lift motor error
The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the
specified time after the tray raises or lowers.
SC code.
-70 -
 Tray lift motor disconnected, defective
 Tray lift motor harness is loose or broken
 Upper tray paper height sensor disconnected, defective
 Upper tray paper height sensor is loose or broken
 Tray lift motor overloaded due to obstruction
Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error
 The shift roller HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
upper tray within the specified number of pulses after the upper tray has
 The shift roller HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number
of pulses after the upper tray has moved from its home position.
-71 - The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
 Shift tray motor disconnected, defective

 Shift tray motor harness is loose or broken
 Shift tray HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Shift tray HP sensor is loose or broken
 Shift tray motor overloaded due to obstruction
shooting
Trouble-
Shift jogger motor 1 error
The side fence does not retract within the specified number of pulses after
the shift jogger motor 1 switches on.
SC code.
-72 -
 Shift jogger motor 1 disconnected, defective
 Shift jogger motor 1 harness is loose or broken
 Shift jogger 1 HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Shift jogger 1 HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Shift jogger motor 1 overloaded due to obstruction
SM 6-33 M132
Shift jogger motor 2 error
The side fence does not retract within the specified number of pulses after
the shift jogger motor 2 switches on.
SC code.
-73 -
 Shift jogger motor 2 disconnected, defective
 Shift jogger motor 2 harness is loose or broken
 Shift jogger 2 HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Shift jogger 2 HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Shift jogger motor 2 overloaded due to obstruction
Shift jogger retraction motor error
The side fences do not retract within the specified number of pulses after the
retraction motor switches on.
SC code.
-74 -
 Shift jogger retraction motor disconnected, defective
 Shift jogger retraction motor harness is loose or broken
 Shift jogger retraction HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Shift jogger retraction HP sensor harness is loose or broken
 Shift jogger retraction motor 2 overloaded due to obstruction
Return roller motor error
This occurs during the operation of the lower tray pressure motor.
 Motor disconnected, defective

-75 -
 Motor harness disconnected, defective
 Home position sensor disconnected, defective
 Home position sensor harness disconnected, defective
 Motor overloaded due to obstruction
M132 6-34 SM
Punch movement motor error
 The punch movement HP sensor does not detect the home position of
the punch unit within the specified number of pulses after the punch unit
has moved to its home position.
 The punch movement HP sensor does not turn off within the specified
-80 - number of pulses after the punch unit has moved from its home position.
SC code.
 Punch movement motor disconnected, defective

 Punch movement motor harness is loose or broken
 Punch movement motor overloaded due to obstruction
Paper position sensor slide motor error
The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home position
within the specified number of pulses.
-81 -
SC code.
 Paper position sensor slide motor harness disconnected, defective

 Paper position sensor slide motor harness is loose or broken
 Paper position sensor slide motor overloaded due to obstruction
722 B 1000-Sheet Finisher Error
shooting
Trouble-
Upper transport motor error
The upper transport motor in the finisher is not operating.
-10 -  The motor harness is loose or broken

 Upper transport motor disconnected, defective
 Upper transport motor overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper,
paper scraps, etc.)
SM 6-35 M132
Lower transport motor error
The lower transport motor in the finisher is not operating.

 Lower transport motor disconnected, defective
 Lower transport motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed
paper, paper scraps, etc.)
Exit motor error
The exit motor in the finisher is not operating.

 Exit motor disconnected, defective
 Exit motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper
scraps, etc.)
Finisher exit guide plate motor error
 The exit guide plate HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
exit guide plate within the prescribed time after the exit guide plate has
 The exit guide plate HP sensor does not turn off within the prescribed
time after the exit guide plate has moved from its home position.
-24 -
SC code.
 Exit guide plate motor harness loose, broken

 Exit guide plate HP sensor harness loose, broken
 Exit guide plate motor disconnected, defective
 Exit guide plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Finisher exit guide plate motor drive overloaded due to obstruction
(jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.)
M132 6-36 SM
Jogger fence motor error
 The jogger HP sensor does not detect the home position of the jogger
fences within the prescribed time after the jogger fences have moved to
its home position.
 The jogger HP sensor does not turn off within the prescribed time after
the jogger fences have moved from its home position.
The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues
-30 -
this SC code.
 The motor harness is loose or broken

 Jogger fence HP sensor harness loose, broken
 Jogger fence motor disconnected, defective
 Jogger fence HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Jogger motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper
scraps, etc.)
Feed-out belt motor error
 The feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
feed-out belt within the prescribed time after the feed-out belt has
 The feed-out HP sensor does not turn off within the prescribed time after
the feed-out belt has moved from its home position.
-41 -
SC code.
shooting
Trouble-
 Feed-out belt motor harness loose or broken
 Feed-out belt HP sensor harness loose or broken
 Feed-out belt motor disconnected, defective
 Feed-out belt HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Feed-out belt motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper,
paper scraps, etc.)
SM 6-37 M132
Stapler movement motor
 The stapler HP sensor does not detect the home position of the stapler
within the prescribed time after the stapler has moved to its home
position.
 The stapler HP sensor does not turn off within the prescribed time after
the stapler has moved from its home position.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this
-42 -
SC code.
 Stapler movement motor harness loose or broken

 Stapler HP sensor harness loose, broken
 Stapler movement motor disconnected, defective
 Stapler HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Stapler or motor drive overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper,
paper scraps, etc.)
Corner stapler motor error
 The corner stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time
after operating.
 The corner stapler HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
corner stapler within the prescribed time after the corner stapler has
 The corner stapler HP sensor does not turn off within the prescribed
time after the corner stapler has moved from its home position.
-44 - The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this
SC code.
 Staple jam
 Corner stapler motor disconnected, defective
 Corner stapler motor harness is loose or broken
 Corner stapler HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Number of sheets in stack exceeds allowed number of sheets for
stapling
 Stapler motor obstructed
M132 6-38 SM
Tray lift motor error
The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the
specified time after the tray raises or lowers.
SC code.
-70 -
 Tray lift motor disconnected, defective
 Tray lift motor harness is loose or broken
 Stack height sensor disconnected, defective
 Tray lift motor overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper
scraps, etc.)
Shift tray motor error
 The shift roller HP sensor does not detect the home position of the
upper tray within the specified number of pulses after the upper tray has
 The shift roller HP sensor does not turn off within the specified number
of pulses after the upper tray has moved from its home position.
-71 - The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
 Shift tray motor disconnected, defective

 Shift tray motor harness is loose or broken
 Shift tray HP sensor disconnected, defective
 Shift tray motor overloaded due to obstruction (jammed paper, paper
shooting
Trouble-
scraps, etc.)
Shift motor error
The shift motor HP sensor does not detect any change for 1.86 seconds after
770 B the shift motor has turned on at power on or during its operation.
 Defective shift motor

 Defective shift motor HP sensor
SM 6-39 M132
Bridge unit error
The machine recognizes the finisher, but does not recognize the bridge unit.
791 D
 Bridge unit is not installed
 Bridge unit is installed incorrectly
 Defective bridge unit
Finisher error
The machine does not recognize the bridge unit finisher, but recognizes the
bridge unit.
792 B
 Poor finisher connector connections
 Finisher is not installed although the bridge unit is installed on the
machine
 Defective finisher
M132 6-40 SM
SC Tables: SC8xx
Energy save I/O sub-system error
816 D Energy saver sub-system detects an error.
 Defective controller board
-01 - Sub-system error
-03 - STR denied error
-04 - Kernel communication driver error
-05 - STR preprocessing error
-13 - open () error
-14 - Memory address designation error
-15
to - open () error
-18
-19 - double open () error
-20 - open () error
-22 - Parameter error
-23
shooting
Trouble-
to - read () error
-24
-25 - write () error
-26
to - write () communication retry error
-28
-29
to - read () communication retry error
-30
SM 6-41 M132
-36
to - Sub-system error
-94
Monitor Error
This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot
loader attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root
817 C system files from the OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD card in the
controller slot are false or corrupted.
 OS Flash ROM data defective; change the controller firmware

 SD card data defective; use another SD card
Watchdog timer error
The watchdog timer detect the error even if system processing normally.
818 C
 System program defective
 Optional board defective
M132 6-42 SM
Fatal kernel error
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing.

One of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel.
0x6261 6261 6420 6469 7200 00 -> “bad dir”
0x696e 0x69742064 -> “init died”
0x766d 0x5f706167 -> “vm_pageout: VM is full”
819 C 554C UL (USB error)
---- Error in the OS
“init died”, “vm_pageout: VM is full”, “Cache

Error”
 System program defective

 Optional board defective
 Replace controller firmware
 For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you
can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-43 M132
Self-diagnostics error: CPU

820 C
[XXXX]: Detailed error code
CPU error
During the self-diagnostic, the controller CPU detects an error. There
are 47 types of error code (0001 to 4005) depending on the cause of
the error. The CPU detects an error and displays the specific error code
with the program address where the error occurs.
 System firmware problem

[0001] to
[06FF] 1. Turn the main switch off and on.
[0801] to [4005] 2. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
3. Replace the controller.
When the problem cannot be fixed with the above procedure, the
following information displayed on the screen needs to be fed back to a
technical support center.
 SC code
 Detailed error code
 Program address
CPU/Memory Error

 Defective RAM-DIMM
[0701] to
[070A]
1. Reinstall the controller system software.
2. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
3. Replace the controller.
M132 6-44 SM
821 C Self-diagnostics error: ASIC

ASIC error
The write-&-verify check error has occurred in the ASIC.

[0B00]
 Defective ASIC device
Replace the controller board.
Self-diagnosis error: ASIC
The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works correctly compared with the
CPU timer. If the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range,
this SC code is displayed.
[0D05]
 Defective RAM-DIMM
Video bridge device (ASIC) error 1
[50A1] The CPU does not detect the video bridge device.
 Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller
Video bridge device (ASIC) register error 1
The CPU detects the video bridge device, but detects error data from
shooting
[50A2] Trouble-
the video bridge device.
 Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller
 For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you
can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel.
SM 6-45 M132
Self-diagnostic error: HDD

822 B
Check performed only when HDD is installed:

 HDD device busy for over 31 s.
 After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains
[3003] busy for over 6 s.
 HDD defective
 HDD harness disconnected, defective
No response to the self-diagnostic command from the ASIC to the HDDs.

[3004]
 HDD defective
Self-diagnostic error: NIB

823 B
MAC address check sum error

[6101] The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum
stored in ROM.
PHY IC error
[6104]
The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized.
PHY IC loop-back error

[6105]
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller.
Self-diagnostic error : NVRAM
NVRAM device does not exist, NVRAM device is damaged, or NVRAM

socket damaged.
824 C
 NVRAM defective
 NVRAM backup battery exhausted
 NVRAM socket damaged
M132 6-46 SM
826 C Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/optional NVRAM
The one second counted by the RTC is different from the one second
[1501] counted by the CPU on the controller.
 Defective RTC device
The RTC device is not detected.
[15FF]  Defective RTC device

 NVRAM without RTC installed
 Discharged backup battery
Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM

827 C
Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM (SDRAM
DIMM).
[0201]
 Loose connection
 Defective SDRAM DIMM
Resident memory error
The SPD values in all RAM DIMM are incorrect or unreadable.
shooting
Trouble-
[0202]  Defective RAM DIMM
 Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
 Defective 12C bus
Replace the RAM DIMM.
SM 6-47 M132
Self-diagnostic error: ROM

828 C
Check sum error 1

 The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is
[0101] checked. If the check sum of the program is incorrect, this SC code is
displayed.
1. Replace the controller board.
Self-diagnostic error: Optional RAM

829 B
Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the optional RAM (SDRAM
DIMM).
 Loose connection
[0301]  Defective SDRAM DIMM
Turn the main switch off and on.

Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
Replace the controller.
Memory structure data error
The memory structure data error for the optional RAM (SDRAM DIMM) is
detected when the self-diagnostic is executed.
[0302]  Defective RAM DIMM

 Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
 Defective 12C bus
Replace the RAM DIMM.
M132 6-48 SM
833 C Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI
[0F30] configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
[0F31]
Replace the bridge board.
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI
[0F41] configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
[50B1] Check for loose connections at the mother board.
Value of the SSCG register is incorrect.
[50B2] Check for loose connections at the mother board.
835 B Self-diagnostic error: Centronic device
Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error.
[1102]  IEEE1284 connector error

 Centronic loopback connector defective
shooting
Trouble-
Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error.
 ASIC device error

[110C]  IEEE1284 connector error
SM 6-49 M132
Centronic loopback connector is not connected for detailed self-diagnostic

test.
 Centronic loopback connector not connected correctly

[1120]
 ASIC device defective
838 C Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator
A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator
via the I2C bus.
[2701]  Defective clock generator

 Defective I2C bus
 Defective I2C port on the CPU
839 C USB NAND Flash ROM error
USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.

[9001]
The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.

[9101]
The USB NAND Flash ROM controller is disconnected.

[9110]
EEPROM error 1: EEPROM access
 During the I/O processing, a reading error occurred. The 3rd reading
840 D failure causes this SC code.
 During the I/O processing, a writing error occurred.
Defective EEPROM
M132 6-50 SM
EEPROM reading error
841 D Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM.
Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
Nand-Flash update VerifyError
SCS detected abnormal writing (verifying Error) in the module which

is written in Nand-Flash on the time of ROM remote update or ROM update.
842 C
 This SC is logged at 1st error detection.SC819 is issued at 2nd error
detection.
 SC819 is issued at 2nd error detection.
Defective Nand-Flash (controller board)
IEEE 1394 I/F error
Driver setting incorrect and cannot be used by the 1394 I/F.

851 B
Not supported by this machine
 NIB (PHY), LINK module defective; change the Interface Board
Controller board defective
Wireless LAN Error 1
shooting
During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is inserted Trouble-
into the controller board.

853 B
 During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is
inserted into the controller board.
SM 6-51 M132
Wireless LAN Error 2
During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is pulled out
from the controller board.
854 B
 During machine operation, the Wireless LAN device (Bluetooth) is pulled
out from the controller board.
Wireless LAN error
An error is detected on the wireless LAN card (802.11a/g, g).

855 B
 Wireless LAN card defective
 Wireless LAN card connection incorrect
USB I/F Error
The USB driver is not stable and caused an error.

857 B
 Bad USB card connection
Replace the controller board
HDD Encryption unit error 1
858 A A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key
with the HDD encryption unit.
Encryption key acquisition error:

The controller fails to get a new encryption key.
-00 -
Encryption key setting for HDD error:

The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD.
-01 -
 Defective SATA chip on the controller board
M132 6-52 SM
NVRAM data encryption error 1:

An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted.
-02 -
 Defective NVRAM on the controller board
Replace the NVRAM.
NVRAM data encryption error 2:

An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted.
-30 -
Other error:
-31 - A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted.
 Same as SC991
HDD Encryption unit error 2
859 B A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an
encryption key with the HDD encryption unit.
HDD check error:

The HDD is not correctly installed.
 No HDD installed
-01 -  Unformatted HDD
 The encryption key on the controller is different from the one on the HDD
1. Install the HDD correctly.
shooting
Trouble-
2. Initialize the HDD.
Power failure during the data encryption:

The data encryption (NVRAM and HDD) has not been completed.
-02 -
 Power failure during the data encryption
Initialize the HDD.
Data read/write error:
-10 - The DMAC error is detected twice or more.
 Same as SC863
SM 6-53 M132
HDD startup error at main power on
 HDD is connected but a driver error is detected.

 The driver does not respond with the HDD within 30 s.
860 B
 HDD is not initialized
 Label data is corrupted
 Defective HDD
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-001.
HDD re-try failure
At power on, the HDD is detected. Power supply to the HDD is interrupted
after the system has entered the energy save mode, but after the HDD has
been awakened from the energy save mode, it does not return to the ready
861 D status within 30 sec.
 Harness between HDD and controller board disconnected, defective

 HDD power connector disconnected
 HDD defective
Bad sector number error
The number of bad sectors in the HDD (image data area) goes over 101.
862 D  Defective HDD
Format the HDD with SP5832-001.

Replace the HDD.
863 D HDD data read failure
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally, due to bad sectors
generated during operation.
Note: [001] to [023] indicate the type of partition where the error occurred.
- -
[001] An area which does not belong to a partition
[002] a partition
M132 6-54 SM
[003] b partition
[004] c partition
[005] d partition
[006] e partition
[007] f partition
[008] g partition
[009] h partition
[010] I partition
[011] j partition
[012] k partition
[013] l partition
[014] m partition
[015] n partition
[016] o partition
[017] p partition
[018] q partition
[019] r partition
shooting
Trouble-
[020] s partition
[021] q partition
[022] t partition
- - [023] u partition
 HDD defective
Note: If the bad sectors are generated at the image partition, the bad sector
information is written to NVRAM, and the next time the HDD is accessed,
these bad sectors will not be accessed for read/write operation.
SM 6-55 M132
864 D HDD data CRC error
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data
transfer does not execute normally while data is being written to the HDD.
[002] a partition
[003] b partition
[004] c partition
[005] d partition
[006] e partition
[007] f partition
[008] g partition
- - [009] h partition
[010] I partition
[011] j partition
[012] k partition
[013] l partition
[014] m partition
[015] n partition
[016] o partition
[017] p partition
[018] q partition
[019] r partition
[020] s partition
- - [021] q partition
[022] t partition
M132 6-56 SM
[023] u partition
 HDD defective
865 D HDD access error
HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition other than those
for SC863, 864.
[002] a partition
[003] b partition
[004] c partition
[005] d partition
[006] e partition
[007] f partition
[008] g partition
- - [009] h partition
[010] I partition
[011] j partition
shooting
Trouble-
[012] k partition
[013] l partition
[014] m partition
[015] n partition
[016] o partition
[017] p partition
[018] q partition
[019] r partition
SM 6-57 M132
[020] s partition
[021] q partition
- - [022] t partition
[023] u partition
 HDD defective.
SD card error 1: Confirmation
The machine detects an electronic license error in the application on the SD

card in the controller slot immediately after the machine is turned on. The
program on the SD card contains electronic confirmation license data. If the
866 B program does not contain this license data, or if the result of the check shows
that the license data in the program on the SD card is incorrect, then the
checked program cannot execute and this SC code is displayed.
 Program missing from the SD card

 Download the correct program for the machine to the SD card
SD card error 2: SD card removed
867 D  The SD card in the slot is removed while the machine is on.
Insert the SD card, then turn the machine off and on.
868 D SD card error 3: SC card access
An error occurs while an SD card is used.
 SD card not inserted correctly

001, 002  SD card defective
Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.
M132 6-58 SM
Address book data error
The address book data cannot be read from the HDD, SD card or flash ROM
on the controller where it is stored, or the data read from the media is
defective.
 Software defective:
Turn the machine off/on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then
replace the controller firmware.
 Data corruption
 HDD defective.
870 B
More Details
1. Do SP5846-046 (Initialize All Setting & Addr Book) to reset all address
book data.
2. Reset the user information with SP5832-001 (HDD – HDD Formatting
(All)).
3. Replace the HDD.
4. If there is the address book data backed up with SD card, restore the
address book data. Configure the same address book encryption key as
the one configured when backing up.
HDD mail receive data error
 The machine detects that the HDD is not operating correctly at power on.
shooting
 The machine detects that the HDD is not operating correctly (can neither Trouble-
872 B read nor write) while processing incoming email.
 HDD defective
 The machine is turned off while the HDD is being accessed.
Do SP5832-001 to format the all data on the HDD.
SM 6-59 M132
HDD mail send data error
An error is detected on the HDD immediately after the machine has been
turned on, or power has been turned off while the machine has used the
873 B
HDD.
1. Do SP5832-001 (HDD – HDD Formatting (All)) to initialize the HDD.

Replace the HDD
Delete All error 1: HDD
A data error is detected for the HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All option has
been used.
874 D Note:
The source of this error is the DataOverwriteSecurity module.
1. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
2. HDD defective
Delete All error 2: Data area
An error occurs while the machine deletes data from the HDD.
875 D -001 An error occurs in hddchack-i.
-002 Failed to delete data from the HDD.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again
Log Data Error
876 D An error is detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it
is operating.
Log Data Error 1
-01 -  Damaged log data file in the HDD
M132 6-60 SM
Log Data Error 2
 An encryption module not installed

-02 -
1. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 (“0” is off.)
2. Install the DESS module.
Log Data Error 3
 Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data

-03 -
1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-001.
2. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 (“0” is off.)
Log Data Error 4
-04 -  Unusual HDD encryption function due to defective NVRAM data
Log Data Error 5
 Installed a NVRAM or HDD which was used in another machine

-05 -
1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
2. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-001.
Log Data Error 99
-99 -  Other than the above causes
Ask your supervisor.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-61 M132
878 D USB Flash Error
TPM system authentication error
The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM (security chip).

-00 -
 Incorrect updating for the system firmware
 Defective flash ROM on the controller board
USB Flash Error
File system in the USB flash device is defective.
-01 -  Cannot mount partition 3 in the USB flash device.

 Encryption key does not exist.
 Cannot find the file for KMMD to be operated.
TPM Error
An error occurred in TPM or in TPM driver.

-02 -
 TPM defective
TCSD Error
An error occurred in TPM or in TPM driver.

-03 -
 TPM defective
881 D Authentication area error
Authentication application error is detected.
-01 -  Error data in an authentication application reaches the management

limit.
M132 6-62 SM
Software performance error
If the processing program shows abnormal performance and the program is

899 D abnormally ended, this SC is issued.

 Software defective
SC Tables: SC9xx
Electrical total counter error
The total counter contains something that is not a number.
 NVRAM incorrect type

900 D  NVRAM defective
 NVRAM data scrambled
 Unexpected error from external source
 Counter was not finished counting which SRM demand during the SRM
is receiving the PRT.
920 B Printer error
-00 No response at PM start up
shooting
-01 Timeout error during the PM operation Trouble-
-02 - Working memory error
-03 Cannot start-up the filtering process
-04 Abnormal exit from the filtering process
An internal application error was detected and operation cannot continue.
- -  Software defective; turn the machine off/on, or change the controller

firmware
 Insufficient memory
SM 6-63 M132
921 B Printer font error
-00 - Resident font is not found
-01 - Option font is not found
A necessary font is not found in the SD card.
- -  A necessary font is not found in the SD card.

 The SD card data is corrupted.
925 B Net File function error
-00 - HDD is defective
-01 - NetFile management file is broken
The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile

management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue. The HDDs are
defective and they cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router
- - functions (delivery of received faxes, document capture, etc.), Web

services, and other network functions cannot be used.
HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code.
 Refer to the four procedures below (Recovery from SC 925).
M132 6-64 SM
Here is a list of HDD status codes:
Display Meaning
(-1) HDD not connected
(-2) HDD not ready
(-3) No label
(-4) Partition type incorrect
(-5) Error returned during label read or check
(-6) Error returned during label write or check
(-7) "filesystem" repair failed
(-8) "filesystem" mount failed
(-9) Drive does not answer command
(-10) Internal kernel error
(-11) Size of drive is too small
(-12) Specified partition does not exist
(-13) Device file does not exist
Recovery from SC 925
shooting
Procedure 1 Trouble-
If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery
procedures for SC860 to SC865.
Procedure 2
If "Procedure 1" is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD – HDD Formatting (All)),
then turn the machine power off and on.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask the customer
before you do this SP code.
Procedure 3
If "Procedure 2" is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
SM 6-65 M132
Software error 1
The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot

990 D
continue.
 Software defective, re-boot
Software error 2
The software performs an unexpected function. However, unlike SC990,

991 C
recovery processing allows the program to continue.
 Software defective, re-boot
In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:

Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent
logged errors.
Undefined error
992 D Defective software program
 An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred
Application Item Error
The number of executed application items on the operation panel reach

994 C
the maximum limit for the operation panel structure.
 Too much executed application items
Software Error 3: Cannot select application function
An application does not start after the user pushed the correct key on the
operation panel.
997 B
 Software bug
 A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed
or not installed correctly.
M132 6-66 SM
Software Error 4: Application cannot start
Register processing does not operate for an application within 60 s after

the machine power is turned on. No applications start correctly, and all
998 D end abnormally.
 Software bug
 A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed
or not installed correctly.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-67 M132
Electrical Component Defects
6.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
6.2.1 SENSORS
Component
CN Condition Symptom
(Symbol)
By-pass Paper 236-2 Open

Paper size error
Length Sensor (IOB) Shorted
Open Jam Z
Duplex Entrance 217-A8 (IOB)
Shorted Jam Z
217-A11 Open "Open Cover" is displayed.

Duplex Cover
(IOB) Shorted “Open cover" cannot be detected.
217-A14 Open Jam Z

Duplex Exit
(IOB) Shorted am Z (Jam 1)
The Paper End indicator lights

Open even if paper is placed on the
by-pass tray.
By-pass Paper End 217-B3 (IOB)
The Paper End indicator does not
Shorted light even if there is no paper on
the by-pass tray.
217-B9, Open
By-pass Paper Size B10,B12,B13 Paper size error
(IOB) Shorted
CPU cannot detect the toner

Open overflow even the waste toner in
217-B15 the transfer belt unit is full.

Toner Overflow
(IOB) CPU detects the toner overflow
Shorted even the waste toner in the
transfer belt unit is not full.
M132 6-68 SM
Component
(Symbol)
No symptom, but this may cause

Jam A, and some pieces of paper
Paper Feed 1 216-A4 (IOB) Open/Shorted
are remaining at the paper feed
unit when tray 1 is opened.
Open Jam A
Relay 1 216-A7 (IOB)
Shorted Jam A, B

Open even if paper is placed in the
216-A10 paper tray 1.

Paper End 1
(IOB) The Paper End indicator does not
Shorted light even if there is no paper in
the paper tray 1.
216-A13 Open/
Tray Lift 1 SC501 is displayed.
(IOB) Shorted
No symptom, but this may cause

Open/ Jam A and some pieces of paper
Paper Feed 2 216-B4 (IOB)
Shorted are remaining at the paper feed
unit when tray 2 is opened.
Open Jam A
Relay 2 216-B7 (IOB)
shooting
Trouble-
Shorted Jam A, B

Open even if paper is placed in the
216-B10 paper tray 2.

Paper End 2
(IOB) The Paper End indicator does not
Shorted light even if there is no paper in
the paper tray 2.
216-B13 Open/
Tray Lift 2 SC502 is displayed.
(IOB) Shorted
SM 6-69 M132
Component
(Symbol)
Open Jam A (Jam 8, 17)

Registration 209-2 (IOB)
Shorted Jam A, B (Jam 1)
209-4, 5, 5, 8 Open/
Paper Size 1 Paper size error in tray 1
(IOB) Shorted
209-9, 10, Open/

Paper Size 2 Paper size error in tray 2
11, 13 (IOB) Shorted
Lower Paper Height Open/

210-4 (IOB)
1 Shorted Remaining paper volume in tray 2
Lower Paper Height Open/ on the LCD is wrong.

210-7 (IOB)
2 Shorted
Upper Paper Height Open/

210-12 (IOB)
1 Shorted Remaining paper volume in tray 1
Upper Paper Height Open/ on the LCD is wrong.

210-15 (IOB)
2 Shorted
221-A10 Open/
Junction Jam Jam C
(IOB) Shorted
Open Jam C
Paper Exit 221-B2 (IOB)
Shorted Jam C
Open Jam C
Fusing Exit 221-B5 (IOB)
Shorted Jam C
Paper overflow message is not

Open displayed when a paper overflow
condition exists.
Paper Overflow 221-B8 (IOB)
Paper overflow message is
Shorted displayed when a paper overflow
condition does not exist.
M132 6-70 SM
Component
(Symbol)
The add toner indicator blinks

Open even if there is toner in the
TD (Toner Density) 213-14 (IOB) development unit.
Shorted SC390 is displayed.
CPU detects the web end even

Open
the web is not used up.
Web End 208-16 (IOB)
CPU cannot detect the web end
Shorted
even the web is used up.
Open SC350 is displayed after copying.

ID (Image Density) 208-11 (IOB)
Shorted SC351 is displayed after copying.
CPU cannot detect paper even a

Open sheet of paper remains at the
fusing unit.
Fusing Entrance 208-8 (IOB)
CPU detects paper even a sheet
Shorted of paper does not remain at the
fusing unit.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-71 M132
6.2.2 SWITCHES
Component
(Symbol)
"Open Cover" is displayed even if

Open
221-B10 the right door is closed.
Right Door
(IOB) The LCD goes blank when the
Shorted
right door is opened.
903-1,2 Open The machine does not turn on.

Main Power
(PSU) Shorted The machine does not turn off.
"Doors/Covers Open" is displayed

Open even if the front or right door is
913-1,2 closed.
Interlock
(PSU)
The LCD goes blank when the
Shorted
front or right door is opened.
M132 6-72 SM
Blown Fuse Conditions
6.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
 Use a correct rating fuse for the fuse replacement. Never use a wrong rating fuse. If do
so, the machine may be damaged.
Rating
Fuse Symptom at power on
115V 210 to 230V
Power Supply Board
FU21 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V SC 533 (Power to IOB)
FU22 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V No response
"Open Cover" is displayed.

FU23 10A / 250V 10A / 250V
(Power to Interlock Switch)
"Open Cover" is displayed.

FU24 10A / 250V 10A / 250V
(Power to Interlock Switch)
Alert LED turns on and operation panel

FU25 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V
does not turn on. (Power to MB)
Stack paper in the optional paper feed unit

or LCT is not detected. SC 503 is issued
FU26 6.3A / 250V 6.3A / 250V
after opening and closing the tray 3 or 4.
shooting
(Power to optional PFU or LCT) Trouble-
The machine does not detect a finisher.

FU27 6.3A / 250V 6.3 A/ 250V
(Power to optional Finisher)
FU101 15A / 250V 8A / 250V No response
FU102 12A / 250V 4A / 250V No response
SM 6-73 M132
Fuses
6.4 FUSES
Fuse Address Part No. Q'ty
FU11 11071229 1
FU21, 22, 25, 26, 27 11071295 5
FU23, 24 11071216 2
FU101 Differs depending on the 1

voltage system.
 100V : 11071252
 200V: 11071218
FU102 Differs depending on the 1

voltage system.
 100V: 11071320
 200V: 11071217
FU103, 12, 14 11071225 3
M132 6-74 SM
ENERGY SAVING
Energy Save
7. ENERGY SAVING
7.1 ENERGY SAVE
7.1.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the
timers are at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different.
For example, if the sleep mode timer is set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no
energy is saved before 240 min. expires.
Timer Settings
The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer settings)
 Sleep mode timer (1 – 240 min):
The machine waits this amount of time to enter the sleep mode.
Default setting: 1 min
 Eco Night Sensor (1/5/30/60/120 min):
The machine waits this amount of time to enter the sleep mode or to turn off the power
Energy
Saving
automatically after the night sensor ambient light level is low.

Default setting: Power Off / 120 min / 1
SM 7-1 M132
Energy Save
Return to Stand-by Mode

The recovery time from the sleep mode is 15 sec.
Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.
 If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their
energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of
extra energy use.
 If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the timer settings are not
too long. Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one (such as 60
min.) if the customer is not satisfied.
 If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy until
240 minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has finished
using the machine for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be saved.
 If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8941, as
explained below.
7.1.2 ENERGY SAVE EFFECTIVENESS

SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each
mode.
 8941-001: Operating mode
 8941-002: Standby mode
 8941-004: Low power mode
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the
amount of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are
measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure the
actual energy consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
 At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 004.
 At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 004 again.
 Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later
measurement).
 Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
 Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
M132 7-2 SM
Paper Save
7.2 PAPER SAVE
7.2.1 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX/COMBINE FUNCTION

Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less
energy overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment.
1. Duplex:
Reduce paper volume in half!
2. Combine mode:
Reduce paper volume in half!
Energy
Saving
SM 7-3 M132
Paper Save
3. Duplex + Combine:
Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4!
To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter.
The total counter counts all pages printed.
 For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2.
 For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.
The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
 For one duplex page, the duplex counter goes up by 1.
 For a duplex job of a three-page original, the duplex counter will only increase by 1, even
though two sheets are used.
M132 7-4 SM
Paper Save
How to calculate the paper reduction ratio

How to calculate the paper reduction ratio, when compared with Single-sided copying, with no
2-in-1 combine mode
Paper reduction ratio (%) = Number of sheets reduced: A/Number of printed original images: B x
100
 Number of sheets reduced: A
= Output pages in duplex mode/2 + Number of pages in Single-sided with combine mode +
Number of pages in Duplex with combine mode x 3/2
A = ((2) + (3) + (4))/2 + (5) + (6) x 3/2
 Number of printed original images: B
= Total counter6 + Number of pages in Single-sided with combine mode + Number of pages in
Duplex with combine mode
B = (1) + (5) + (6)
 (1) Total counter: SP 8581 001 (pages)
 (2) Single-sided with duplex mode: SP 8421 001 (pages)
 (3) Double-sided with duplex mode: SP 8421 002 (pages)
 (4) Book with duplex mode: SP 8421 003 (pages)
 (5) Single-sided with combine mode: SP 8421 004 (pages)
 (6) Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421 005 (pages)

Energy
Saving
SM 7-5 M132
M132
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
M132 APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. APPENDIX: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................. 1-1

1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 MAIN FRAME ................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 POWER CONSUMPTION ................................................................ 1-3
1.1.3 PRINTER CONTROLLER................................................................. 1-4
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES .................................................................... 1-6
1.2.1 PAPER FEED ................................................................................... 1-6
North America ...................................................................................... 1-6
Europe/ Asia......................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT ................................................................................... 1-12
3000 Sheet Finisher (D636) ............................................................... 1-12
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................... 1-15
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .................................................................. 1-17
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ....................................................................... 1-17
1.3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE ..................................................................... 1-18
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT......................................................................... 1-19
1.4.1 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT (D580) ........................................ 1-19
1.4.2 LCT 2000-SHEET (D581) ............................................................... 1-19
1.4.3 LCT 1200-SHEET (D631) ............................................................... 1-20
1.4.4 BRIDGE UNIT (D634) ..................................................................... 1-20
1.4.5 1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588) ..................................................... 1-21
Upper Tray ......................................................................................... 1-21
Lower Tray ......................................................................................... 1-21
1.4.6 3000-SHEET FINISHER (D636) ..................................................... 1-22
1.4.7 PUNCH UNIT (D570) FOR 3000-SHEET FINISHER...................... 1-25
1.4.8 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703) .................................................... 1-26
2. APPENDIX: PM TABLES .............................................................. 2-1

2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 MAINFRAME .................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 OPTIONS.......................................................................................... 2-5
SM Appendix i M132
Error! No text of specified style in document.
Paper Feed Unit (D580) ....................................................................... 2-6

1200-Sheet LCT (D631) ....................................................................... 2-6
2000-Sheet LCT (D581) ....................................................................... 2-7
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ................................................................. 2-7
3000-Sheet Finisher (D636) ................................................................. 2-8
3000-Sheet Finisher Punch Unit (D570)............................................... 2-8
Bridge Unit (D634) ............................................................................... 2-8
3. APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES .................. 3-1

3.1 SERVICE SP TABLES ............................................................................... 3-1
3.2 ENTERING SP MODES ............................................................................ 3-1
If The Power is Already On: ................................................................. 3-1
If The Power is Already Off: ................................................................. 3-1
3.2.2 SP1-XXX ........................................................................................... 3-1
3.3 ENGINE SP TABLES-1 ........................................................................... 3-10
3.3.1 SP1-XXX: FEED ............................................................................. 3-10
3.4 ENGINE SP TABLES-2 ........................................................................... 3-27
3.4.1 SP2-XXX: DRUM ............................................................................ 3-27
3.5 ENGINE SP TABLES-3 ........................................................................... 3-51
3.5.1 SP3-XXX: PROCESS ..................................................................... 3-51
3.6 ENGINE SP TABLES-4 ........................................................................... 3-54
3.6.1 SP4-XXX: SCANNER ..................................................................... 3-54
3.7 ENGINE SP TABLES-5 ........................................................................... 3-55
3.7.1 SP5-XXX: MODE ............................................................................ 3-55
3.8 ENGINE SP TABLES-6 ......................................................................... 3-114
3.8.1 SP6-XXX: PERIPHERALS............................................................ 3-114
3.9 ENGINE SP TABLES-7 ......................................................................... 3-121
3.9.1 SP7-XXX: DATA LOG................................................................... 3-121
3.10 ENGINE SP TABLES-8 .................................................................... 3-138
3.10.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2 .......................................................... 3-138
3.11 INPUT CHECK ................................................................................. 3-165
3.11.1 COPIER ................................................................................. 3-165
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor .......................................................... 3-168
Table 2: Paper Size Switch .............................................................. 3-168
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ............................................... 3-169
APS Original Size Detection............................................................. 3-170
M132 ii SM Appendix
Rev. 05/09/2013
3.11.2 OPTIONS ............................................................................... 3-171

3000/2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) ........................... 3-171
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 3-174
3.12 OUTPUT CHECK ............................................................................. 3-176
3.12.1 COPIER ................................................................................. 3-176
3.12.2 1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588) ............................................ 3-182
3.12.3 3000 /2000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER (D636/D637)..... 3-183
3.13 TEST PATTERN PRINTING ............................................................ 3-185
⇒ 3.14 SP5749 IMPORT/EXPORT .............................................................. 3-187
SM Appendix iii M132

APPENDIX:
SPECIFICATIONS
Pag e Date Ad d ed / Upd ated / New
None
General Specifications
1. APPENDIX: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Appendix:
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 MAIN FRAME
Configuration Desktop
Print Process Dry electrostatic transfer system
Resolution 200 / 300 / 600 dpi
Gradation 256 tones
First Print 3.5 seconds or less

(Normal mode) (A4 / LT LEF)
25 seconds or less from main power on. (23°C)

Warm-up Time
15 seconds or less from sleep mode off. (23°C)
A3 / DLT (11" x 17") - A5 LEF

Custom:
Standard Tray:
Width: 182 - 297 mm (7.2" - 11.7")
Length: 148 mm - 432 mm (5.8" - 17")
12" x 18" / 305 x 457.2 mm,

Print Paper Size
A3/ DLT (11" x 17") - A6 SEF, Postcard
By-pass Tray: Custom:
Width: 90 - 305 mm (3.6" - 12")
Length: 148 - 1260 mm (5.8" - 49.6")
Duplex: A3 / DLT(11" x 17") – A5 LEF / LT
Paper trays: 60 - 216 g/m 2 (16 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover)
Print Paper Weight By-pass: 52 - 216 g/m 2 (14 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Cover)
Duplex: 60 - 169 g/m 2 (16 lb. Bond - 90 lb. Index)
SM Appendix 1-1 M132

Printing speed: Maximum 50 ppm (A4 / LT LEF)
First Print (Normal 3.5 seconds or less

mode) (A4 / LT LEF)
25 seconds or less from main power on. (23°C)

Warm-up Time
15 seconds or less from sleep mode off. (23°C)
Standard:
1,200 sheets
(550 sheets/tray x 2 with 100 sheets in the by-pass tray)
Paper Capacity: Option:
4,400 sheets
(550 sheets/tray x 2 with 100 sheets in the by-pass tray,
1200-sheet LCT and 2000-sheet LCT)
Standard exit tray:

 500 sheets (A4 / LT or less)
 250 sheets (B4 / LG or more)
Bridge Unit Tray
 250 sheets (A4 / LT or less)
Output Paper Capacity
 125 sheets (B4 / LG or more)
1000-sheet finisher
 250 + 1000 sheets (80 g/m2)
3000-sheet finisher:
 250 + 3000 sheets (80 g/m 2)
North America: 120 – 127V / 60Hz, 12 A
Power Source Europe/Asia: 220 – 240 V/50, 60 Hz, 7 A
Taiwan 110V/60Hz, 14 A
Dimensions
670 x 684 x 640 mm
(W x D x H)
Weight Less than 73 kg (160.9 lb.)
M132 1-2 SM Appendix

Specifications
Appendix:
Toner Replenishment Cartridge exchange (630 g)
Total Counter Electric counter
Noise Emission:
48dB or less
Printing
Noise Emission:
72dB or less
Stand-by
1.1.2 POWER CONSUMPTION
Basic Power Consumption
NA 874W
Operating
EU, Asia 874W
NA 3.5W or less
Sleep Mode
EU, Asia 3.5W or less
NA 1550W or less
Maximum
EU, Asia 1470W or less
 The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779.

 In the above "Panel Off" condition, the polygonal mirror motor is not rotating.

1.1.3 PRINTER CONTROLLER
Standard
 RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
 PCL 6(XL)/5e
 PDF Direct
Printer Languages:
 Adobe PostScript 3
 MediaPrint: JPEG/TIFF
Option
 IPDS
PCL 5e:
300 x 300 dpi
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
PCL 6:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
Resolution and
PS3 / PDF Direct:
Gradation:
300 x 300 dpi / 600 x 600 dpi
XPS:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1-bit)
IPDS:
300 x 300 dpi/ 600 x 600 dpi
PCL 6/5e (Standard):

 45 Compatible fonts
 13 International fonts, 6 Bitmap fonts
Resident Fonts: Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional) / PDF Direct
IPDS (Optional)

Standard:
Specifications
Appendix:
 USB2.0 Type A (2 ports) and Type B
 Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)
 3 SD slots (Operation panel, Option use, and service use)
Host Interfaces: Optional:
 Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T)
 IEEE1284 parallel x 1
 IEEE802.11a/b/g (Wireless LAN)
 NIC2Port (Print server)
Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX (Optional)
Standard: 512 MB
Memory Maximum: 1024 MB
(Resident 512 MB + Additional 512 MB)
HDD 120 GB

Supported Paper Sizes
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES
1.2.1 PAPER FEED
North America
BT: By-pass Tray, Std Tray: Standard Tray, Op Tray: Optional Tray, LCT 1000: Large Capacity
Tray: 1000-sheet, LCT 1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit
Size Std Op LCT LCT

Paper BT DU
(W x L) Tray Tray 1000 1200
A3 SEF 297 x 420mm B B B - - S
A4 SEF 210 x 297mm B A A - - S
A4 LEF 297 x 210mm B B B B B S
A5 SEF 148 x 210mm B - - - - S
A5 LEF 210 x 148mm B A A - - S
A6 SEF 105 x 148mm B - - - - S
B4 SEF 257 x 364mm B B B - - S
B5 SEF 182 x 257mm B A A - - S
B5 LEF 257 x 182mm B B B - B S
B6 SEF 128 x 182mm B - - - - S
DLT SEF 11” x 17” A A A - - S
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" B A A - - S
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" B B B - - S
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" A A A - - S
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" A A A B B S
Government
8.25" x 14" B B B - - S
Legal SEF
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" B B B - - S

Size Std Op LCT LCT
Specifications
Paper BT DU
Appendix:
F/GL SEF 8” x 13” B B B - - S
G LT SEF 8” x 10.5” B B B - - S
G LT LEF 10.5” x 8" B B B - - S
Eng Quatro
8" x 10" B B B - - S
SEF
Eng Quatro
10" x 8" B - - - - S
LEF
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" B B B - - S
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" B A A - - S
Half Letter
5.5" x 8.5" A - - - - S
SEF
12” x 18”
12” x 18” B B B - - -
(A3W) SEF
11” x 15” SEF 11” x 15” B B B - - S
11” x 14” SEF 11” x 14” B B B - - S
10” x 15” SEF 10” x 15” B B B - - S
10” x 14” SEF 10” x 14” B B B - - S
Com10 SEF 4.13"x 9.5" B - - - - -
Com10 LEF 9.5"x 4.13" B B B - - -
Monarch SEF 3.88"x 7.5" B - - - - -
Monarch LEF 7.5"x 3.88" B - - - - -
C5 SEF 162 x 229mm B - - - - -
C5 LEF 229 x 162mm B B B - - -
C6 SEF 114 x 162mm B - - - - -
C6 LEF 162 x 114mm B - - - - -

Size Std Op LCT LCT

Paper BT DU
DL Env SEF 110 x 220mm B - - - - -
DL Env LEF 220 x 110mm B B B - - -
Custom Width
Length
Custom BT Std / Op Tray LCT1000 / 1200 DU
90 -305mm 182 - 297mm 90 / 297mm

Width -
(3.55"- 12") (7.17"- 11.69") (3.55"- 11.69")
148 – 600mm 148 – 432mm 148 - 432mm

Length -
(5.83"- 23.62") (5.83"- 17") (5.83"- 17")
Remarks:
A Supported and the size is automatically detected.
Supported but the size is not automatically detected. (The size needs to be
B
set by operation panel and also printer driver.)
S Supported
- Not supported

Specifications
Europe/ Asia
Appendix:
BT: By-pass Tray, Std Tray: Standard Tray, Op Tray: Optional Tray, LCT 1000: Large Capacity
Tray: 1000-sheet, LCT 1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit
Size Std Op LCT LCT

Paper BT DU
A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A A A - - Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297mm A A A - - Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210mm A A A B B Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210mm A - - - - Y
A5 LEF 210 x 148mm A A A - - Y
A6 SEF 105 x 148mm A - - - - Y
B4 SEF 257 x 364mm B A A - - Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257mm B A A - - Y
B5 LEF 257 x 182mm B A A - B Y
B6 SEF 128 x 182mm B - - - - Y
DLT SEF 11” x 17” B B B - - Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" B B B - - Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" B B B - - Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" B A A - - Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" B B B B B Y
Government
8.25" x 14" B B B - - Y
Legal SEF
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" B B B - - Y
F/GL SEF 8” x 13” B B B - - Y
G LT SEF 8” x 10.5” B B B - - Y

Size Std Op LCT LCT

Paper BT DU
G LT LEF 10.5” x 8" B B B - - Y
Eng Quatro
8" x 10" B B B - - Y
SEF
Eng Quatro
10" x 8" B - - - - Y
LEF
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" B B B - - Y
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" B B B - - Y
Half Letter
5.5" x 8.5" B - - - - Y
SEF
12” x 18”
12” x 18” B B B - - -
(A3W) SEF
11” x 15” SEF 11” x 15” B B B - - Y
11” x 14” SEF 11” x 14” B B B - - Y
10” x 15” SEF 10” x 15” B B B - - Y
10” x 14” SEF 10” x 14” B B B - - Y
Com10 SEF 4.13"x 9.5" B - - - - -
Com10 LEF 9.5"x 4.13" B B B - - -
Monarch SEF 3.88"x 7.5" B - - - - -
Monarch LEF 7.5"x 3.88" B - - - - -
C5 SEF 162 x 229mm B - - - - -
C5 LEF 229 x 162mm B B B - - -
C6 SEF 114 x 162mm B - - - - -
C6 LEF 162 x 114mm B - - - - -
DL Env SEF 110 x 220mm B - - - - -
DL Env LEF 220 x 110mm B B B - - -

Size Std Op LCT LCT
Specifications
Paper BT DU
Appendix:
Width
Custom
Length
Custom BT Std / Op Tray LCT1000 / 1200 DU
90 -305mm 182 - 297mm 90 / 297mm

Width -
(3.55"- 12") (7.17"- 11.69") (3.55"- 11.69")
148 – 600mm 148 – 432mm 148 - 432mm

Length -
(5.83"- 23.62") (5.83"- 17") (5.83"- 17")
Remarks:
A Supported and the size is automatically detected.
Supported but the size is not automatically detected. (The size needs to be
B
set by operation panel and also printer driver.)
S Supported
- Not supported

1.2.2 PAPER EXIT
3000 Sheet Finisher (D636)

MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple, SS: Saddle Stitch,
2P: 2 Holes Punch, N2P: North Europe 2 Holes, 3P: 3 Holes Punch,
Punch 4 P: 4 Holes Punch, N4P: North Europe 4 Holes Punch
Size 3000-sheet finisher

Paper MF
(W x L) Prf Clr Shf Stp SS 2P/N2P 3P 4P N4P
A3 W 12" x 18" Y Y Y Y 30 15 - - - -
297 x
A3 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y Y Y Y
420 mm
210 x
A4 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 15 Y - - Y
297 mm
297 x
A4 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
210 mm
148 x
A5 SEF Y Y Y Y - - Y - - Y
210 mm
210 x
A5 LEF Y Y Y Y - - Y - - Y
148 mm
105 x
A6 SEF Y Y Y - - - - - - -
148 mm
257 x
B4 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y Y Y*4 Y*4
364 mm
182 x
B5 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 15 Y - - Y
257 mm
257 x
B5 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y Y Y Y
182 mm
128 x
B6 SEF Y Y Y - - - - - - -
182 mm

3000-sheet finisher
Specifications
Size
Paper MF
Appendix:
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y Y Y Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y 50 15 Y - - Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
8.5" x
Legal SEF Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y - - Y
14"
Government 8.25" x
Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
Legal SEF 14"
Half Letter 5.5" x

Y Y Y Y - - Y - - Y
SEF 8.5"
Executive 7.25" x
Y Y Y Y 50 - Y - - Y
SEF 10.5"
Executive 10.5" x
Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
LEF 7.25"
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
Foolscap 8.5" x
Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
SEF 13"
8.25" x
Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
13"
Folio SEF 11" x 15" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y Y Y
10" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y - Y
8" x 10" Y Y Y Y 50 - Y - - Y
267 x
8K Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y Y Y
390 mm
195 x
16K SEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y - - Y
267 mm


Paper MF
267 x
16K LEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
195 mm
Custom Y Y Y - - - Y*3 Y*3 Y*3 Y*3
4.125" x
Com10 Env. Y Y*1 Y*2 - - - - - - -
9.5"
Monarch 3.875" x
Y - Y - - - - - - -
Env. 7.5"
114 x
C6 Env. Y - Y - - - - - - -
162 mm
162 x
C5 Env. Y - Y - - - - - - -
229 mm
110 x
DL Env. Y - Y - - - - - - -
220 mm
Remarks:
Y Supported
15 Output up to 15 sheets
- Not supported
*1: Minimum 100 mm or more, Maximum 600 mm or less

*2: Minimum 100 mm or more, Maximum 600 mm or less
 Longer paper (feed length) than DLT (432 mm) is not guaranteed in this mode.
*3: Minimum 100 mm for 2P, 230 mm for 3P, 255 mm for 4P, 125 mm for N4P
*4: Corner stapling is not available in this mode.

Specifications
Appendix:
MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple

Paper MF 1 Bin
(W x L) Prf Clr Shf Stp
A3 W 12" x 18" Y Y Y Y 30 -
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y - Y
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y Y Y - Y
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm Y Y - - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Y Y - - - N
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Government
8.25" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Legal SEF
Half Letter
5.5" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y - Y
SEF
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" Y Y Y Y 50 Y


Paper MF 1 Bin
(W x L) Prf Clr Shf Stp
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
8.25" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
11" x 15" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Folio SEF
10" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
8" x 10" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Custom Y Y - - - -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Y - - - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" Y - - - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm Y - - - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm Y - - - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Y - - - - -
Remarks:
Y Supported
- Not supported

Software Accessories
Specifications
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
Appendix:
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows
you to select which components to install.
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS
Printer Language Windows XP*1*6 Windows Vista*2*6 Windows 7*3*6
PCL 5e/6 Yes Yes Yes
PS3 Yes Yes Yes
Windows Server Windows Server

Printer Language *4*6 *5*6
Macintosh*7
2003 2008 or later
PCL 5e/6 Yes Yes No
PS3 Yes Yes Yes
*1 Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition / Home Edition

*2 Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic / Home Premium / Business / Enterprise / Ultimate
*3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium / Professional / Enterprise / Ultimate
*4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition, Microsoft Windows
Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition
*5 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard / Enterprise, Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
Standard / Enterprise
*6 Supports both versions (32/64 bit)
*7 Mac OS X 10.4 or later (native mode). Any versions higher than Mac OS X 10.7 are not
supported.
 The PCL5c/6 and PS3 drivers are provided on the CD-ROM

 The PS3 drivers are all genuine Adobe PS drivers, except for Windows XP / 2003 / Vista /
7.
 A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver.

Software Accessories
1.3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE
Software Description
A font management utility with screen fonts for the

Font Manager
printer
(XP / Vista)
This is provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM

Optional Equipment
Specifications
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Appendix:
1.4.1 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT (D580)
Paper Feed System: FRR
Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10% (Near end), and Empty)
Capacity: 550 sheets x 2 trays
Paper Weight: 60 to 216 g/m 2 (16 to 80 lb. Cover)
Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)
Power Consumption: Less than 40 W (Max.)/ Less than 25 W (Ave,)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 580 mm x 629 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.8" x 10.2")
Weight: 26 kg (57.3 lb.)
1.4.2 LCT 2000-SHEET (D581)
Paper Size: A4 LEF/LT LEF
Paper Weight: 52 to 256 g/m 2 (- to 68 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20lb.)
5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10%, Empty): Right Tray

Remaining Paper Detection:
4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Empty): Left Tray
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 55 W (Max.)/30 W (Ave.)
Size (W x D x H): 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2")

Optional Equipment
1.4.3 LCT 1200-SHEET (D631)
Paper Size: A4 LEF/LT LEF/B5 LEF
Paper Weight: 52 to 256 g/m 2 (- to 68 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 1,200 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20lb.)
Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10%, Empty)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 55 W (Max.)/25 W (Ave.)
Size (W x D x H): 348 mm x 540 mm x 290 mm (13.7" x 21.3" x 11.4")
1.4.4 BRIDGE UNIT (D634)
Standard sizes
A6 SEF to A3, HLT to DLT
Paper Size: Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 1260 mm
Paper Weight: 52 g/m2 to 256 g/m2, 16 lb. to 68 lb.
250 sheet (A4/ 81/2" x 111/2" or smaller: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)

Paper Capacity:
125 sheet (B4 81/2" x 111/2" or larger: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (form the copier/printer)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 415 mm x 412 mm x 111 mm (16.3" x 16.2" x 4.4")
Weight 5 kg (11 lb.)

Optional Equipment
Specifications
Appendix:
Upper Tray
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm, A3 to A6, 11" x 17" to 5.5" x

Paper Size:
8.5"
Paper Weight: 52 to 256 g/m 2 (14 to 68 lb. Bond)
250 sheets (A4, LT or smaller)

Paper Capacity:
50 sheets (B4, LG or larger)
Lower Tray
No staple mode:
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm, A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Paper Size:
Staple mode:
12" x 18"/305 x 457.2 mm, A3, B4, A4, B5, DLT to LT
No staple mode: 52 to 160 g/m 2 (14 lb. Bond to 60 lb.

Paper Weight: Cover)
Staple mode: 64 to 90 g/m 2 (17 to 24 lb. Bond)
50 sheets (A4, B5, LT)

Stapler Capacity:
30 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)
No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m 2, 20 lb.)
500 sheets (B4 /LG or larger: 80 g/m 2, 20 lb.)
Staple mode: (80 g/m 2, 20 lb., number of sets)
Paper Size Sheets Sets

Paper Capacity:
A4,/LT LEF, B5 LEF 2 to 9 100
A4,/LT LEF, 10 to 50 100 to 20
A4,/LT LEF, B5 LEF 10 to 50 50 to 10
A3, B4, DLT, LG 2 to 9 50

Optional Equipment
A3, B4, DLT, LG 10 to 30 50 to 10
Staple positions: Top, Bottom, 2 Staples
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Weight: 25 kg (55.2 lbs)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 520 x 520 x 790 mm (20.5" x 20.5" x 31.2")
Finisher
Dimension (w x d x h) 657 mm x 613 mm x 960 mm (25.9" x 24.2" x 37.8")
Less than 54 kg (119 lb.) (no punch unit)

Weight
Less than 56 kg (123.5 lb.) (with punch unit)
Power Consumption Less than 96 W
Noise Less than 75 db
Configuration Console type attached base-unit
Power Source From base-unit
250 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

Stack Capacity
50 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14 or larger
Proof Tray A6 SEF, B6 SEF, A5-A3 SEF,

Paper Size
5.5" x 8.5"-11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
Paper Weight 52 g/m 2 - 160 g/m 2 (14 lb. Bond - 60 lb. Cover)

Optional Equipment
Specifications
Appendix:
3,000 sheets A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5, 11" x 17"

1,500 sheets SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF, 8.5" x 11" SEF,
Stack Capacity 12" x 18" SEF
500 sheets A5 LEF

Shift Tray
A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF,
100 sheets
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 5.5" x 8.5"- 11" x 17" SEF,

Paper Size
12" x 18" SEF
Paper Weight 52 g/m 2 - 256 g/m 2 (14 lb. Bond - 68 lb. Bond)
Staples
B5 - A3
Paper Size
8.5" x 11" - 11" x 17", 12" x 18"
Paper Weight 64 g/m 2 - 90 g/m 2 (17 lb. Bond - 20 lb. Bond)
Staple Position Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
Same Paper 50 sheets A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller
Stapling Size 30 sheets B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger

Capacity
Mixed Paper A4 LEF + A3 SEF, B5 LEF + B4 SEF,
30 sheets
Size 8.5" x11" LEF + 11" x 17" SEF

Optional Equipment
Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge
Paper Size Pages/Set Sets
20 - 50 pages 150 - 60 sets

A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
2 - 19 pages 150 sets
Stapled Stack Capacity (same
A4 SEF, B5, 8.5" x 11" 15 - 50 pages 100 - 30 sets
size)
SEF 2 - 14 pages 100 sets
15 - 30 pages 100 - 33 sets

Others
2 - 14 pages 100 sets
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5

Stapled Stack Capacity LEF & B4 SEF, 8.5"
2 - 30 pages 50 set
(mixed sizes) x11" LEF & 11" x 17"
SEF,

Optional Equipment
Specifications
1.4.7 PUNCH UNIT (D570) FOR 3000-SHEET FINISHER
Appendix:
NA 2/3 holes switchable
Available Punch Units EU 2/4 holes switchable
Scandinavia 4 holes
NA 2-holes Up to 5,000 sheets
NA 3-holes Up to 5,000 sheets
EU 2-holes Up to 14,000 sheets

Punch Waste Replenishment
EU 4-holes Up to 7,000 sheets
Scandinavia
Up to 7,000 sheets
4-holes
Paper Weight 52 g/m 2 - 163 g/m 2, 14 lb Bond - 43 lb Bond
SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"

NA 2-holes
LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5" , 8.5" x 11"
SEF A3, B4, 11" x 17"

NA 3-holes
LEF A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Paper SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"

EU 2-holes
Sizes LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11"
SEF A3, B4, 11"x17"

EU 4-holes
LEF A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Scandinavia SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"
4-holes LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11"

Optional Equipment
1.4.8 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703)

This jogger unit is installed above the shift tray of the Finisher SR4080.
Paper Size:
Paper Weight:
Tray Capacity: 250 sheets (80 g/m 2, 20 lb., A4 / LT)
Power Source:
Power Consumption:
Weight:
Size (W x D x H):

APPENDIX:
PM TABLES
Maintenance Tables
2. APPENDIX: PM TABLES
2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES
Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints.
Appendix:
PM Tables
2.1.1 MAINFRAME
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 4 copies / original (prints/job)
Ratio 30%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
Item 160K 320K 800K EM Remarks
Drum (OPC) Area
Charge Roller R
Charge Roller Cleaning

R
Roller
Drum Cleaning Blade 1 R
Side Seal C
Cleaning Entrance Seal C Blower brush
Perform SP3-001-2
OPC Drum R I
after the replacement.
Pick-off Pawls R
Spurs C I Dry cloth
Quenching Lamp C
Perform SP3-001-2
ID Sensor C I after blower brush
cleaning.

Maintenance Tables
Development Unit
Development Case C I Dry cloth
Development Drive
I Dry cloth
Gears
Development Filter R
Developer R I
Entrance Seal C I
Side Seal C
Development Sleeve C Dry cloth
Transfer Belt Unit
Transfer Belt R
Dry cloth
To prevent damage to
Transfer Belt Cleaning
R the cleaning blade,
Blade
always replace these
items together.
Transfer Belt Rollers C Dry cloth
Entrance Seal C Dry cloth
Used Toner Tank C Empty the tank
Seal (for paper dust) C
Transfer Entrance Guide C C Dry cloth

Maintenance Tables
Fusing Unit
Hot Roller R
Appendix:
PM Tables
Pressure Roller R
Fusing Thermistors R
Blower brush or dry

- R
cloth
Cleaning Roller C
Grease: Barrierta JFE

Cleaning Roller Bushings L
55/2
Fusing Entrance and Exit Damp cloth

C
Guide Plates Water / Alcohol
- R
Brake Pad R
- R

Maintenance Tables
Paper Feed
Registration Roller C I Damp cloth
Registration Sensor C I Blower brush
Detach and tap gently

Dust Blades C I on flat surface to empty.
Blower brush.
Feed Rollers I I Damp cloth
Pick-up Belts I I Damp cloth
Separation Rollers I I Damp cloth
By-pass Feed Roller I I Damp cloth
By-pass Pick-up Roller I I Damp cloth
By-pass Separation
I I Damp cloth
Roller
Blower brush or dry

Paper Feed Guides I I
cloth
Relay Rollers I I Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad I I Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad

I I Damp cloth
(By-pass feed)
By-pass Feed Roller

L I Silicone Grease G-501
Gear
Relay Sensors C I Blower brush
Paper Feed Sensors I I Blower brush

Maintenance Tables
Duplex Unit
Inverter Rollers I I Damp cloth
Appendix:
PM Tables
Transport Rollers I I Damp cloth
Entrance Sensor I I Blower brush
Exit Sensor C I Blower brush
Paper Exit
Paper Exit Sensor I I Blower brush
Junction Gate Jam

C I Blower brush
sensor
Fusing Exit Sensor I I Blower brush
Paper Exit Rollers I I Damp cloth
Junction Transport Roller I I Damp cloth
Paper Exit Guide I I Damp cloth
2.1.2 OPTIONS
Amounts mentioned as the PM interval indicate the number of prints/ originals.
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect

Maintenance Tables
Paper Feed Unit (D580)
Item EM Remarks
Feed Roller C Dry cloth
Separation Roller C Dry cloth
Pick-up Roller C Dry cloth
Paper Feed Sensor C Dry cloth
Relay Sensor C Dry cloth
Relay Roller C Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth
1200-Sheet LCT (D631)
Item EM Remarks

Maintenance Tables
2000-Sheet LCT (D581)
Item EM Remarks
Appendix:
PM Tables
Damp cloth
Rollers C
(Water / Alcohol)
Discharge Brush C C Dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Jogger Fences I I Replace if required

Maintenance Tables
Item EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth (Water / Alcohol)
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
Jogger Fences I Replace if required
3000-Sheet Finisher Punch Unit (D570)
Item EM Remarks
Punch Chads C Discard chads
Bridge Unit (D634)
Item EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth (Water / Alcohol)
Copy Tray C Dry or damp cloth

APPENDIX:
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
1 01/15/2013 Entering SP Mode Added
60 8/15/2013 SP5305-101 Blue Angel Compliance
72 5/9/2013 SP5749 Import/Export
136 6/4/2013 SP7952-001, 002, 003
187 ~ 193 5/9/2013 SP5749 Import/Export
Rev. 01/15/2013 Service SP Tables
3. APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
3.1 SERVICE SP TABLES
⇒ 3.2 ENTERING SP MODES
If The Power is Already On:

Press the "Home" and “Simple screen" keys at the same time for more than 3 seconds,
and then press the "User tool" key.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
If The Power is Already Off:
Press the "Home" and "Suspend" keys at the same time while turning the main switch on.
3.2.2 SP1-XXX
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will
never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the
edges of the printable area.

Service SP Tables
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Normal

Collate Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not
already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
 If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as

HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")
will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"

Service SP Tables
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Increases printing speed but simplex pages may be printed on the
back side of the sheet.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 IPDS support tools 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Enables the port for IPDS support tools.

Service SP Tables
1001 Bit Switch
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and

"Punch Type" buttons on the operation Disable Enable
panel.
bit 0 If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and
Punch Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on
the device and configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type 0: Disable

1: Enable
mismatch occurs (Single
(Multiple copy)
copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple

copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this Bit Switch, the
device can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch
occurs.
bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering

the contents of a job
If this BitSw is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print
data. This is achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a
module called the "GPS Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for troubleshooting the effects of
SDK applications on data.
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs Disable Enable (1000)
to 1000 jobs. (100)

Service SP Tables
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the
HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 Method for determining the image

rotation for the edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation
jobs.
The old models are below:
Mode Tables
Appendix:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
Program
Service
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 1: Enable
Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable
(Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.

If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex
job are not routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems
with letterhead/pre-printed pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.
1001 Bit Switch
1001 Bit Switch
Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only)

bit 0 and the last page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are
always routed through the duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths
increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7

Service SP Tables
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 3
PCL edge to edge printing setting 0: Disable 1: Enable

(Standard) (BMS)
bit 4
Switches the edge to edge printing setting for custom-made machines
(BMS).
bit 5
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs

"Disabled "Enabled
submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE
(Immediately)" (10 seconds)"
1284).
bit 0
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device
whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled

Enabled
(Not
(Cancelled)
cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might
result in problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation

(SEF/LEF)

Service SP Tables
This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous

generations. It only takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" =
"Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the
bypass tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch,
the MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by
the MFP bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
bit 4 Response to PJL USTATUS when

multiple collated copies are printed
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
When enabled, if multiple collated copies are printed, the device no longer
responds to PJL USTATUS with the number of pages in the current copy.
Instead the device will return the total number of pages for all copies.
Bit 5 DFU
- -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 4
bit 5 List / Test Print Lock 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, you can lock or unlock the [List/Test Print] items under the
Pinter Features menu when the Store and Skip Errored Job Function is
on.
Bit 6 Optional charge machines - -
If enabled, you can use the optional charge

machines when the Store and Skip Errored 0: Disable 1: Enable
Job Function is on.
Bit 7 DFU - -

Service SP Tables
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 List / Test Print menu 0: Disable 1: Enable
When enabled, the [Multiple Lists] menu is displayed in [List / Test Print]
under the Printer Features menu.
bit 1 Interrupt printing 0: Job 1: Page
Selects the units for the interrupt printing function.

When you select "0," you can interrupt printing of a job while being
processed.
When you select "1," you can interrupt printing of a page while being
processed.
Bit 2 DFU
- -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 7
1003 [Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System

1003 001
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1003 003 Delete Program

Service SP Tables
1004 [Print Summary]
Print Printer Summary

1004 001
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1005
1005 002
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
1007 [Supply Info.]
[0 to 1 / 1 ]
1007 001 0: Displays the info.
1: Does not display the info.
1110 [Media Print Device Setting]
1110 002 0: Disable 1: Enable Selects the setting for the media print device.
1111 [All Job Delete Mode]
Selects whether to include an image

0: Excluding New Job
1111 001 processing job in jobs subject to full
1: Including New Job
cancellation from the SCS job list.

Engine SP Tables-1
3.2 ENGINE SP TABLES-1
3.2.1 SP1-XXX: FEED
Leading Edge Registration
1001* Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch
operation timing.
001 Tray: Plain
002 Tray: Thick 1
003 Tray: Thick 2
004 By-pass: Plain

[–9 to 9/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
007 Duplex: Plain
008 Duplex: Thick 1
Side-to-Side Registration
1002* Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the laser main scan start
position for each mode.
001 By-pass
002 Tray 1
003 Tray 2
004 Tray 3 [–4 to 4/ 0 / 0.1 mm step]
005 Tray 4
006 LCT
007 Duplex

Engine SP Tables-1
Registration Buckle Adjustment
1003* Adjusts the paper feed motor timing. Paper feed motor timing determines
the amount of paper buckle at Registration. (A "+" setting causes more
buckling.)
001 Tray 1: Plain
002 Tray 1: Thick 1
003 Tray 1: Thick 2

[-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
004 Tray 2, 3, 4: Plain
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
005 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick1
006 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick2
007 By-pass: Plain
008 By-pass: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -2 /1 mm step]
010 Duplex: Plain [-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
011 Duplex: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -3 / 1 mm step]
012 LCT: Plain
013 LCT: Thick1 [-9 to 5 / -4 / 1 mm step]
014 LCT: Thick2
By-pass Paper Size Detection

1007*
Controls paper size detection for the by-pass feed table.
001 Detection Timing [-15 to 15 / 0 / 5 mm step]
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 LG Detection
0: LT SEF, 1: LG

Engine SP Tables-1
Fusing Idling
Switches fusing idling on/off. When on, printing will not start until enough
time has elapsed so the hot roller can reach optimum temperature. This
1103* ensures even heat on the hot roller.
Switch on if fusing on the 1st and 2nd copies is incomplete (this may occur if
the room is cold.). You must switch SP1103-1 ON before you set the fusing
interval with SP1103-2.
001 Enable Fusing Idling 0 = Off, 1 = On
002 Interval [0 to 60 / 30 / 1 sec.]
Sets the machine to fusing idling only for 30

sec. for every job (when the original is set on
the ARDF, when the ARDF cover is opened,
etc.) and the fusing unit has reached the
003 Idling Time at Every Job
reload temperature (optimum temperature for
operation).
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec.]
0: No idling done before a job.

Engine SP Tables-1
Fusing Temperature Control
On-Off/Phase
Selects the fusing temperature control method. After changing this setting,
be sure to turn the machine off and on again with the main power switch to
enable the new setting.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Normal (ON/OFF control). Allows full application from ac power supply to
bring the hot roller up to the target fusing temperature then shuts off.
Determines the on-time from the present temperature (detected by the
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
thermistor on the hot roller) and the temperature of 1 cycle before.
1: Phase (hysterisis) control. Sets the upper and lower limits for the
1104* temperature; at the lower temperature the fusing lamp is on and at the
higher temperature the fusing lamp is off.
Change this setting to "0" only if the user has excessive electrical noise or
interference on the power supply line. Such interference can cause voltage
to drop when power is applied using the ON/OFF control method.
Interference can be caused by the general poor quality of the power supply
lines, or if the machine is sharing a power supply with other electrical
devices such as fluorescent lights. Before changing this setting, make sure
that the machine is connected to a power supply not shared by other
electrical equipment.
 Selecting Phase control ("1") could cause the fusing temperature

control board to emit low pitched noise

Engine SP Tables-1
Fusing Temperature Adjustment
Allows adjustment of the hot roller temperature at the center and ends of the
roller for the quality or thickness of the paper. The hot roller in this machine
has two fusing lamps: one heats the center of the roller, the other heats both
1105* ends. Each fusing lamp can be adjusted separately.
The "re-load temperature" is the "print ready temperature". When the fusing
temperature exceeds this setting, the machine can operate. Do not set up a
re-load temperature (Re-load Temp. = Fusing. Temp – SP Value.) that is
higher than the SP1-105-2 setting.
Roller Center [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg]

001
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the center of the hot roller.
Roller Ends [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]

002
Adjusts the fusing temperature at the ends of the hot roller.
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Center [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the center of the hot roller. This setting
depends on the target temperature.
(Roller Center: Trays)
Re-load Temp. Minus: Roller Ends [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
Sets the reload temperature for the ends of the hot roller. This setting depends
on the target temperature.
(Roller Ends: Trays)
005 to The following SPs adjust the fusing temperature at the center or ends of the
022 hot roller for each paper type.

Engine SP Tables-1
005 Roller Center: M-Thick [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg]
006 Roller Ends: M-Thick [100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg]

[100 to 170 / 130 / 1 deg]
008 Roller Ends: Thick 1

[100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
010 Wait Temp: Center Minus
Mode Tables
011 Wait Temp: Ends Minus [100 to 170 / 140 / 1 deg]
Appendix:
Program
Service
012 Roller Ends: Thin [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg]
013 Roller Center: OHP: Plain [100 to 170 / 150/ 1 deg]
014 Roller Ends: OHP: Plain

[100 to 170 / 155/ 1 deg]
015 Roller Center: OHP: Thick
016 Roller Ends: OHP: Thick [100 to 170 / 160/ 1 deg]
023 Feed Waiting: Plain Turns the feed waiting mode on or off for
024 Feed Waiting: M-Thick each paper type.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025 Feed Waiting: Thick 1 0=Off, 1=On
026 Feed Waiting: Thick 2 The paper waits at the registration roller

Engine SP Tables-1
until the fusing temperature reaches the

prescribed temperature (adjustable with
SP1105-028 to -37).
027 Feed Waiting: Thin
If you enable this feature, also set SP
1105-38 to a convenient value for the
customer.
028 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Plain
029 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Plain
030 Feed Wait: Center Minus: M-Thick
031 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: M-Thick

Adjusts the offset value for each re-load
032 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 1 temperature to exit the feed waiting
033 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 1 mode.

[0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
034 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 2
035 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 2
036 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thin
037 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thin
Sets the maximum feed waiting time.

[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]
The paper is fed when the time specified
038 Feed Waiting: Maximum Time with this SP has passed even though the
fusing temperature has not reached the
prescribed temperature.
0: Disabled.

Engine SP Tables-1
1106 Fusing Temperature Display
001 Roller Center Displays the temperature of the fusing

unit.
002 Roller Ends [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
003 Machine Inside at Power On Displays the temperature inside the

machine.
004 Machine Inside [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Fusing Nip Band Check
Service
1109
Checks the fusing nip band.
001 Execution
Idling Rotation Time [0 to 120 / 60 / 1 sec]

002*
Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109-001.
Pre-Idling Time [5 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]
003* Specifies the time that the paper stops in the fusing unit for measuring the
nip.
Fusing Jam Detection

1159*
SC Display
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0:OFF, 1:ON
This SP setting determines whether SC559 is issued after three paper late
jams occur in the fusing unit. After this SP code is turned on, a counter
monitors the number of paper late jams that occur in the fusing unit. After
the 3rd occurrence of a fusing jam, SC559 is issued and the machine
cannot be used until the service technician releases the error.
 Switching the machine off/on does not reset this jam counter. The
counter is reset after the cause of the jam has been removed and a
sheet of paper successfully passes the fusing exit sensor.

Engine SP Tables-1
MotorSpeedAdjust
Adjusts the speeds of each motor. Each step decreases or increases motor
speed in 0.05% increments
Regist: Registration motor, Feed: Feed motor,
1801* Duplex: Duplex/By-pass motor, Inverter: Duplex inverter motor,
Exit: Paper exit motor, Bridge: Bridge unit drive motor,
OpcMot: Drum motor, TransferMot: Transfer/Development Motor,
FusingMot: Fusing motor,
DevPuddleMot: Development Paddle motor

[-2 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.05 %]

[-2 to 2 / -0.4 / 0.05 %]

[-2 to 2 / -1 / 0.05 %]

[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]

[-4 to 4 / -2.3 / 0.1 %]

[-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1 %]

[-4 to 4 / -0.2 / 0.1 %]

[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]

Engine SP Tables-1
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
033 OpcMot:90
034 OpcMot:154
035 OpcMot:180
036 OpcMot:230
037 TransferMot:90 [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %]
038 TransferMot:154
039 TransferMot:180
040 TransferMot:230
041 FusingMot:90

Engine SP Tables-1
042 FusingMot:154
043 FusingMot:180
044 FusingMot:230
045 DevPuddleMot [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %]
1902* Cleaning Web Setting
Web Consumption [0 to 120 / 0 / 1 %]

001
Displays the consumed amount of the web roll.
Web Motor Interval [3 to 130 / 6.7 / 0.1 sec]

002
Adjusts the interval for web motor rotation.
Web Motor Time [0.3 to 10 / 4.2 / 0.1 sec]

003
Adjusts the rotation time of the web motor.
EU [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %]
Web Near End Setting
004 ASIA/NA [0 to 100 / 92 / 1 %]
Adjusts the threshold for web near end.

005

006
Paper Interval Time [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]
007 Adjusts the threshold for paper feeding. When the time between trailing
edge detection and leading edge detection is within the value of this setting,
the machine determines that the paper is still being fed.

Engine SP Tables-1
Web Motor Setting: Web End [0 to 60 / 27 / 1 sec]

008
Adjusts the motor rotation time after the web end.
Web Motor Rotation: Power On [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 times]

009
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the re-load state.
Web Motor Interval: Pre-idle [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 sec]

010
Adjusts the motor waiting time after the fusing motor idling.
Mode Tables
Web Motor Rotation: Pre-idle [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 times]
Appendix:
Program
Service
011
Adjusts the number of web motor rotations at the fusing idling state.
1903 Cleaning Web Setting
Total Paper Counter [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 sec]

001
Displays the total paper feeding time.
Total Web Motor Drive Time [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 sec]

002
Displays the total time of web motor rotation.
1904 FusingDuplex Set
Set 0:Off/1:On [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
001
0:Off/1:On
002 Aft Reload ChgTime [0 to 999 / 20 / 1 sec]

Engine SP Tables-1
1907* Paper Feed Timing Adj. (DFU)
001 Feed Solenoid ON: Plain

[-10 to 40 / 0 / 2.5 mm]
002 Feed Solenoid ON: Thick
003 Feed Solenoid OFF: Plain
004 Feed Solenoid OFF: Thick
005 Feed Clutch ON: Plain
006 Feed Clutch ON: Thick [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
007 Stop Position before Inverter
008 Stop Position after Inverter
009 Re-Feed Stop Position
010 By-pass Solenoid OFF [0 to 40 / 0 / 1 mm]
011 By-pass Solenoid ON [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
012 By-pass Feed Clutch ON
013 Exit Roller: Shift: 180
014 Exit Roller: Shift: 230
015 Exit: Junction Solenoid ON
016 Exit: Junction Solenoid OFF [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]
017 Bridge: Junction Solenoid ON
018 Bridge: Junction Solenoid OFF
019 1-Bin: Junction Solenoid ON
020 1-Bin: Junction Solenoid OFF
021 Shift Motor ON [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
022 Re-Feed Stop Position S Size [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]

Engine SP Tables-1
F1 Plate Adjj (DFU)

1908*
Adjust the paper feed timing for the optional paper feed unit.
A3,DLT:100% [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]

001
Adjust the paper feed timing for plain paper.
A3,DLT:70% [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm]

002
Adjust the paper feed timing for thick paper.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
CPM Down Setting
1916* When this machine gets a sequence of coping/printing jobs, the machine
uses CPM down mode to prevent the fusing temperature from becoming too
low.
001 Temp.: Plain
002 Temp.: M-Thick Adjusts the thresholds for each

environmental condition (between Low
003 Temp.: Thick 1
and Medium).
004 Temp.: Thick 2 [10 to 23 / 17 / 1 deg]
005 Temp.: Thin
006 ON/OFF: Low: Plain
007 ON/OFF: Low: M-Thick

Turns on or off the CPM down setting
008 ON/OFF: Low: Thick 1
for each paper type and ambient
009 ON/OFF: Low: Thick 2 temperature.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
010 ON/OFF: Low: Thin
0= Off, 1= On
011 ON/OFF: Medium: Plain
012 ON/OFF: Medium: M-Thick

Engine SP Tables-1
013 ON/OFF: Medium:: Thick 1
014 ON/OFF: Medium: Thick 2
015 ON/OFF: Medium: Thin
016 Waiting Time: Low: Plain
017 Waiting Time: Low: M-Thick
018 Waiting Time: Low: Thick 1

Adjusts the threshold time to enter the
019 Waiting Time: Low: Thick 2
CPM down mode.
020 Waiting Time: Low: Thin [0 to 180 / 60 / 1 sec]

The machine determines whether the
021 Waiting Time: Medium: Plain CPM down mode is activated or not
022 Waiting Time: Medium: M-Thick after the time specified with these SPs
has passed.
023 Waiting Time: Medium: Thick 1
024 Waiting Time: Medium: Thick 2
025 Waiting Time: Medium: Thin
026 Temp.: Low: Plain
027 Temp.: Low: M-Thick Adjusts the threshold temperature of

the fusing unit to enter the CPM down
028 Temp.: Low: Thick 1
mode.
029 Temp.: Low: Thick 2 [100 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg]

If the temperature of the fusing unit is
030 Temp.: Low: Thin less than the temperature specified
031 Temp.: Medium: Plain with these SPs, the machine changes
the CPM (adjustable with SP1916-36
032 Temp.: Medium: M-Thick to -45).
033 Temp.: Medium: Thick 1

Engine SP Tables-1
034 Temp.: Medium: Thick 2
035 Temp.: Medium: Thin
Adjusts the CPM in the CPM down

036 CPM: Low: Plain mode.
[30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]

037 CPM: Low: M-Thick mode.
[30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
038 CPM: Low: Thick 1 mode.
[5 to 25 / 25 / 5 cpm]

039 CPM: Low: Thick 2 mode.
[5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]
040 CPM: Low: Thin

041 CPM: Medium: Plain mode.
[30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]
042 CPM: Medium: M-Thick

043 CPM: Medium: Thick 1 mode.
[5 to 25 / 25 / 5 cpm]

044 CPM: Medium: Thick 2 mode.
[5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm]

045 CPM: Medium: Thin mode.
[30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm]

Engine SP Tables-1
1930* OnOff Time Adjust
On Time Adjust [0 to 100 / 40 / 10 msec]
001 Adjusts the Off-On interval of the transfer belt contact motor. ("On" means
that the transfer belt is in contact with the drum.)
Off Time Adjust [0 to 100 / 20 / 10 msec]
002 Adjusts the On-Off interval of the transfer belt contact motor. ("Off" means
that the transfer belt is away from the drum.)
Tray Lock at Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON

1950*
Not used

Engine SP Tables-2
3.3.1 SP2-XXX: DRUM
2001* Charge Bias
Setting (Copying) [1000 to 2000 / 1500 / 10 V]

001
Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for copying.
Setting (P Pattern) [0 to 700 / 250 / 10 V]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
002 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller when making the VSDP ID
sensor pattern (for charge roller voltage correction). The actual charge roller
voltage is this value plus the value of SP2001-1.
2005* Bias Control
001 Adjusts the lower threshold value for the charge roller correction.
voltage increases by 30 V (e.g., from –500 to –530).
002 Adjusts the upper threshold value for the charge roller correction.
voltage decreases by 30 V (absolute value).

003
Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction.

004
Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction.

005
Adjusts the correction voltage adjustment step size.

Engine SP Tables-2
2102* Magnification Adjustment
Main Scan [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 %]
001 Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for copy mode and
printer mode.
Sub Scan [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
002 Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for copy mode and
printer mode.
Erase Margin Adjustment
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.

2103* L Size: 297.1 mm or more (length)
M Size: 216.1 to 297 mm (length)
S Size: 216 mm or less (length)
001 Leading Edge

[0 to 9 / 3 / 0.1mm]
002 Trailing Edge
003 Left
[0 to 9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
004 Right
005 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
006 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
007 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Plain [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
008 Duplex Left: Plain

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
009 Duplex Right: Plain
010 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
011 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
012 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1mm]
013 Duplex Left: Thick

[0 to 1.5 / 0.1 / 0.1mm]
014 Duplex Right: Thick

Engine SP Tables-2
LD Power Adjustment(DFU)
2105* Adjusts the LD power for each mode.

Each LD power setting is decided by the process control.
001 LD1: Copy

[–50 to 79 / 5 /1 ]
002 LD2: Copy
003 LD1: Printer/Fax

[–50 to 79 / 5 /1 ]
004 LD2: Printer/Fax
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
2106* POL REV TIME (Polygon motor rotation time)
PRE TIME [0 to 60 / 10 /1 sec]
001 Adjusts the time of polygon motor rotation before a job.
If this is set to "0", this SP is not activated.
POST TIME [0 to 60 / 0 /1 sec]
Adjusts the time of the polygon motor rotation after a job.

002 If this is set to "0", the polygon motor never switches off in standby mode.
However, if the machine enters the energy saver mode, the polygon motor
will ignore the zero setting and switch itself off.

Engine SP Tables-2
2109 Test Pattern
[0 to 24 / 0 /1 ]
001 Pattern Selection
Test pattern of the GAVD
0: None
14: Trimming Area
15: Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
16: Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
17: Black Band (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line
18: Black band ( Vertical)
6: Grid Horizontal Line
19: Checker Flag Pattern
7: Grid pattern small
20: Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
8: Grid Pattern Large
21: Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
9: Argyle Pattern Small
22: Two Beam Density Pattern
10: Argyle Pattern Large
23: Full Dot Pattern
11: Independent pattern (1 dot)
24:All white Pattern
[0 to 15 / 15 /1 ]
002 Density Set the density of the test pattern which is output in
SP2109-001. This SP is not used for the Grayscale
patterns.
2201* Development Bias Adjustment
Development Bias [200 to 700 / 560 / 10V ]
001 Adjusts the development bias for copying.
Use as a temporary measure to correct faint copies from an aging drum.
ID Sensor Pattern [200 to 700 / 400 / 10V ]

002
Adjusts the development bias for the ID sensor pattern for VSP

Engine SP Tables-2
Forced Toner Supply
2207 Forces the toner bottle to supply toner at 1-second intervals for up to 30
seconds. To start, press [EXECUTE].
Toner Supply Mode [0: Sensor, 1: pixel ]
Selects the toner mode.

2208* If you select "1", SP2-209-002 should be set to its default value. Use image
pixel count modes only as a temporary measure if the ID or TD sensor is
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
defective.
Service
2209* Toner Supply Rate
Toner Rate [10 to 800 / 60 mg/s / 5 mg ]
Sets the amount of toner supplied every second by the toner supply motor.
The length of time the motor remains on is determined by the data read by
001 the TD sensor and ID sensor.
Increasing this value reduces the toner supply clutch on time. Use a lower
value if the user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of
black.
Correction Data [25 to 300 / 300 / 25 ]
Displays the toner supply correction coefficient (K). It can also be used to
adjust K, but the value is changed again when VT is measured for the next
002 copy.
The toner supply rate depends on the amount of toner in the toner bottle.
This change is corrected using this coefficient. This SP can be used to
check the toner supply condition. The lower the value of K, the lower the
toner density

Engine SP Tables-2
P Pattern Cycle
2210*
Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern prints.
Job Page Count [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 sheet]
001* Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing. For users that do not
make many copies daily, set a smaller interval to compensate for the effects
of seasonal and weather changes.
Forced Page Count [2 to 999 / 100 / 1 sheet]
002* Sets the interval between ID sensor pattern printing.

Forces creation of the ID sensor pattern to prevent low density copies for
customers who use the copier for long copy jobs.
Toner End Setting
Selects the detection type for toner end.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 step]
[0: 90 copies, 1: No copies, 2: 10 copies]
2213*
 90 copies: Toner end is determined if a low density image (Vref <
Vt(10)) is detected 90 times after toner near end.
 If "1" is selected, the machine stops printing when the TD sensor
output drops below the prescribed level.
 Select 1 or 2 if the customer normally makes copies of very high
density.

Engine SP Tables-2
Vref Setting
Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref). Change this value after
replacing the development unit with another development unit that contains
toner.
[1 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 ]
2220* 1. Check the value of SP2-220 in both the machine containing the test unit
and the machine that you are going to move it to.
2. Install the test development unit, and then input the VREF for this unit
into SP2-220.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
3. After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2-220
Program
Service
back to the original value.
Reverse Interval Drum,Transfer [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheets]
2221* Adjusts the threshold for the reverse rotation of the drum and
development/transfer motors. This helps the drum and transfer belt cleaning
operations. This reverse rotation will interrupt a multiple printing job.
2223* Vt Display
Current [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01]
001
Displays the TD sensor output voltage for the immediately previous copy.
Average 10 copies [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01]
002 Displays the average of the most recent TD sensor outputs (from the
previous 10 copies).
Rate of Change [-10000 to 10000 / 0 / 1]

003
Displays the rate of change in the TD sensor output.
GAIN [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004 Displays the GAIN value used to calculate the on time for the toner supply
motor.

Engine SP Tables-2
Image Pixel Count [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

005
Displays the image pixel count.
Developer Lot
2228* Displays the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on
the top edge of the developer pack.)
Transfer Current Adjustment
2301* If the transfer current of image area is set highly than normal, the print
image is easily come out. If the leading transfer current is set as same, the
black line is come out due to exfoliation leave.
Image Area: 1st Side [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the first side of the paper
Image Area: 2nd Side [10 to 100 / 40 / 1 A]

002
Adjusts the transfer current for printing the second side of the paper
Leading Edge: 1st Side [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the first side of the
003 paper.
Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high
humidity and high temperature conditions.
Leading Edge: 2nd Side [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the second side of
004 the paper.
By-pass: Image Area [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A]
005 Adjusts the transfer current for copying from the by-pass tray.
If the user normally feeds thicker paper from the bypass tray, use a higher
setting.

Engine SP Tables-2
By-pass: Leading Edge [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A ]
Adjusts the transfer current for copying at the leading edge of paper fed
006 from the by-pass tray.
No Image Area (SSP) [10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A ]

008
Adjusts the transfer current for copying.
Mode Tables
2309* Current: Paper Size Correction (SSP)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Paper Lower Width (a) [1 to 150 / 150 / 1 mm ]
Adjusts the lower paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge
voltage, and development bias corrections.
001 Use this SP when an image problem (e.g., insufficient toner transfer) occurs
with a small width paper. If the paper width is smaller than this value, the
transfer current will be multiplied by the factor in SP2-309-3 (paper tray) or
SP2-309-5 (by-pass).
Paper Upper Width (a) [151 to 296 / 216 / 1 mm ]
Adjusts the upper paper width threshold for the transfer current, charge
002 voltage, and development bias corrections.
As for SP2-309-1, but the factors are in SP2-309-4 (paper tray) and
SP2-309-6 (by-pass).
Paper Tray: Plain (alpha) [1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
003 Adjusts the transfer current correction coefficient used if the paper width is
less than the setting of SP2-309-1.
Paper Tray: Plain (beta) [1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
By-pass: Plain (gamma) [1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]

Engine SP Tables-2
By-pass: Plain (delta) [1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
007 Paper Tray: Thick 1 (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
008 Paper Tray: Thick 1 (beta)
009 By-pass: Thick 1 (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
010 By-pass: Thick 1 (delta)
011 Paper Tray: Thick 2 (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
012 Paper Tray: Thick 2 (beta)
013 By-pass: Thick 2 (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.5 / 0.1 ]
014 By-pass: Thick 2 (delta)
015 Paper Tray: M-Thick (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
016 Paper Tray: M-Thick (beta)
017 By-pass: M-Thick (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
018 By-pass: M-Thick (delta)
019 Paper Tray: Thin (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
020 Paper Tray: Thin (beta)
021 By-pass: Thin (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
022 By-pass: Thin (delta)
023 Paper Tray: Special 1 (alpha)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]
024 Paper Tray: Special 1 (beta)
025 By-pass: Special 1 (gamma)

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
026 By-pass: Special 1 (delta)

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]

Engine SP Tables-2

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]

[1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ]

[1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ]
Mode Tables
Current: Paper Type Correction (SSP)
Appendix:
Program
Service
2310* Adjusts the transfer current for each paper type. If the transfer current of the
image area is set higher than normal, the print image easily comes out. If
the leading edge transfer current is set the same, black lines come out.
Image 1st Side: Thick 1 [10 to 100 / 18 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the transfer current for the first side of the paper (Thick 1).
Leading Edge 1st Side: Thick 1 [10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A]
002 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of the first side of the paper.
humidity and high temperature conditions (Thick 1).
Image 2nd Side: Thick 1 [10 to 100 / 18 / 1 A]

003
Adjusts the transfer current for the second side of the paper (Thick 1).
Leading Edge 2nd Side: Thick 1 [10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A]
004 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of the second side of the
paper (Thick 1). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum
properly in high humidity and high temperature conditions.

Engine SP Tables-2
Image: Thick 2 [10 to 100 / 18 / 1 A]

005
Adjusts the transfer current (Thick 2).
Leading Edge: Thick 2 [10 to 100 / 15 / 1 A]
006 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of paper (Thick 2). Increase
the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity
and high temperature conditions.
Image: OHP [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]

007
Adjusts the transfer current (OHP).
Leading Edge: OHP [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
008 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of paper (OHP). Increase
the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity
and high temperature conditions.
Image: Envelope [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]

009
Adjusts the transfer current (Envelopes).
Leading Edge: Envelope [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
010 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of paper (Envelopes).
Image 1st Side: M-Thick [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]

011
Adjusts the transfer current for the first side of the paper (M-Thick).
Leading Edge 1st Side: M-Thick [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
012 Adjusts the transfer current for the leading edge of the first side of the paper
(M-Thick). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum

Engine SP Tables-2
Image 2nd Side: M-Thick [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]

013
Adjusts the transfer current for the second side of the paper (M-Thick).
Leading Edge 2nd Side: M-Thick [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
paper (M-Thick). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum
Image 1st Side: Special 1 [10 to 100 / 45 / 1 A]

015
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Adjusts the transfer current for the first side of the paper (Special 1).
Service
Leading Edge 1st Side: Special 1 [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
(Special 1). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum
Image 2nd Side: Special 1 [10 to 100 / 40 / 1 A]

017
Adjusts the transfer current for the second side of the paper (Special 1).
Leading Edge 2nd Side: Special 1 [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A]
paper (Special 1). Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum

019
Leading Edge 1st Side: Special 2 [10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]

Engine SP Tables-2

021

023
Leading Edge 1st Side: Special 3 10 to 100 / 32 / 1 A]

025

Engine SP Tables-2
PTL Control (SSP)
Use this SP when an image problem occurs caused by the pick-off pawls.
2602* This SP is for line speeds of 230 or 180 mm/s. Set PTL control
(SP2603-001) to “1: ON” after installing the PTL. If PTL control is set to ON,
black lines come out. Set SP2911-002 (or 005, 008, 011) to “20” when using
the PTL.
1st Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

001
Sets the PTL control setting for printing the first side of the paper.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
1st Side: OFF Timing [-10 to 10 / 2 / 1]
002 Sets the PTL control time for printing the first side of the paper when
SP2602-001 is set to “1”.
2nd Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

003
Sets the PTL control setting for printing the second side of the paper.
2nd Side: OFF Timing [-10 to 10 / 2 / 1]
004 Sets the PTL control time for printing the second side of the paper when
SP2602-003 is set to “1”.
PTL Control: 154 mm/s (SSP)
2603* This SP is for the line speed of 154 mm/s. Set PTL control (SP2603-001) to
“1: ON” after installing the PTL. If the PTL control is set to ON, black lines
come out. Set SP2911-002 (or 005, 008, 011) to “20” when using the PTL.
1st Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

001

Engine SP Tables-2
SP2602-001 is set to “1”.
2nd Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

003
SP2602-003 is set to “1”.
PTL Control: 90 mm/s (SSP)
2604* This SP is for the line speed of 90 mm/s. Set PTL control (SP2603-001) to
“1: ON” after installing the PTL. If the PTL control is set to ON, black lines
come out. Set SP2911-002 (or 005, 008, 011) to “20” when using the PTL.
1st Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

001
SP2602-001 is set to “1”.
2nd Side: OFF/ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

003
SP2602-003 is set to “1”.

Engine SP Tables-2
TD Sensor Initial Setting Initialization
Performs the TD sensor initial setting and allows the service technician to
enter the lot number of the developer. (The lot number is embossed on the
edge of the developer package.) This SP mode controls the voltage applied
2801* to the TD sensor to make the TD sensor output about 3.0 V. Press
"Execute" to start. After finishing this, the TD sensor output voltage is
displayed.
Use this mode only after installing the machine, changing the TD sensor, or
adding new developer.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
TD Sensor Manual Setting
2802*
Allows you to adjust the TD sensor output manually for the following.
VTS [1 to 5 / 4.78 / 0.01vol ]
Adjusts the TD sensor output (VT).
001 Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one
that already contains toner. For example, when using a development unit
from another machine for test purposes. To adjust VT, use a similar
procedure as for SP2-220.
VTMAX [1 to 5 / 4.78 / 0.01vol ]

002
Adjusts the maximum value for SP2802 1.
VTMIN [1 to 5 / 1 / 0.01vol ]
003
Adjusts the minimum value for SP2802 1.
Process Setting
2805 Performs the developer initialization. Press "Execute" to start. This SP

should be performed after doing SP2801 at installation and after replacing
the drum.

Engine SP Tables-2
Grayscale Setting
2810 Initializes the LD power setting. This SP should be done after replacing the
drum.
2812* Drum Reverse Rotation (SSP)
Reverse time [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 ]
001
Sets the reverse time of the drum motor after the end of a job.
Interval time [0 to 19 / 9 /1 ]
002
Sets the waiting time of the drum motor reverse after the end of a job.
2911* Transfer Current On/Off Timing (SSP)
La (On Timing) [-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 mm]

001
Adjust the timing to turn on the transfer current for the leading edge.
Lb (Switch Timing) [0 to 30 / 10 / 1 mm]
002 Adjust the timing to switch transfer current from the leading edge to the
image area.
Lc (Off Timing) [-20 to 20 / -5 / 1 mm]

003
Adjust the timing to turn off the transfer current for the image area.
La (On Timing): Special 1 [-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 mm]
004 Adjust the timing to turn on the transfer current for the leading edge (Special
1).
Lb (Switch Timing): Special 1 [0 to 30 / 10 / 1 mm]
image area (Special 1).

Engine SP Tables-2
Lc (Off Timing): Special 1 [-20 to 20 / -5 / 1 mm]
006 Adjust the timing to turn off the transfer current for the image area (Special
1).
2).
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
2).
2).
2).
2912* Transfer Reverse Rotation
Interval [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 ]
002 Sets the reverse time of the transfer/development motor after the end of a
job.

Engine SP Tables-2
2914* Paper Setting
C-alpha [0 to 400 / 150 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed
from the by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts
001 depends on the value of SP2-309-1.
Use this SP when an image problem (such as white spots at the center of
black dots or breaks in thin black lines) occurs when paper with a small
width is fed from the by-pass feed tray.
C-beta [0 to 400 / 0 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed
002 from the by-pass tray. The paper width below which the correction starts
depends on the value of SP2-309-2.
Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1) occurs when paper with
a small width is fed from the by-pass feed tray.
B-gamma [0 to 300 / 200 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed
B-delta [0 to 300 / 50 / 10vol ]
Adjusts the development bias used when paper with a small width is fed

Engine SP Tables-2
2940* Toner consump. (SSP)
[0: OFF 1: ON] [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 If this SP is set to ON, the toner bottle consumes toner when SP2801 (TD
Sensor Initial Setting) is executed. This prevents image offset.
Setting [0 to 1 / 0.06 / 0.01]
002 Specifies the threshold value for the toner consumption mode if
SP2940-001 is set to ON.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Toner Overflow Sensor [0 = OFF, 1= ON]
2960*
Selects whether or not the toner overflow sensor is activated.
Trans Cleaning Blade Forming (SSP)
Applies a pattern of toner to the transfer belt at a defined interval between

sheets on the transfer belt in order to reduce friction between the belt
surface and the cleaning blade.
2964* Under conditions of high temperature and high humidity, the density control
feature may reduce the amount of toner, which also reduces the amount of
toner on the surface of the transfer belt. With less toner on the belt, the
friction between the belt and the blade increases, and could cause the blade
to bend or scour the surface of the belt.
001 0: OFF, 1: ON [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Pattern Interval [1 to 100 / 15 / 1 sheet]
003 Pattern Number [1 to 3 / 1 / 1 line]
004 Pattern LD Power [0 to 15 / 2 / 1 ]

Engine SP Tables-2
Grayscale Limit (SSP)
2972* Controls the halftone density level to prevent deterioration of the OPC. The
halftone density is detected by the ID sensor, and the machine adjusts the
intensity of the LD beam according to the upper/lower limit setting.
Upper Limit [0 to 100 / 63 / 1vol ]
Defines the upper limit for grayscale.

001 A larger value allows a wider range of halftones at the pale end of the scale.
If the image contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark
areas, reduce this value to make the borders clearer.
Lower Limit [0 to 100 / 57 / 1vol ]
002 Defines the lower limit for grayscale.

A smaller value allows a wider range of halftones at the dark end of the
scale.
Grayscale Cycle (SSP) [0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 sheets ]
2973* Set s the halftone operation interval in order to prevent deterioration of the
OPC. If the number of copies exceeds this setting, at the end of the job, or if
the door is opened and closed, charge correction is executed.
2974* Image Density
Adjustment Mode [1 to 5 / 3 / 1 ]
001 Adjusts image density. Changing this setting adjusts development bias and
ID sensor output voltage that in turn raises or lowers image density.

Engine SP Tables-2
Near End Setting
Detection Time [0 to 2000 / 0 / 10 sec ]
Sets a time for toner supply motor rotation for issuing the toner near end
2975*
warning on the operation panel. The time may need to be shorter for
customers who run especially large print jobs (working at night, for example)
to ensure earlier warning of the toner near end condition so toner out does
not interrupt a long job.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Bottle Motor Time
Service
Displays the total ON time of the toner supply motor, calculated from when
the toner bottle was replaced. Use this to check that the toner end count
(SP2975) is working properly.
2976*
When SP2975 is set to any value other than "0", this value is displayed
when it matches the setting of SP2975. When SP2975 is set to "0", SP2976
is disabled. SP2976 is automatically set to zero by toner end recovery.)
Time [0 to 7,000,000 / 0 / 1 msec]

Engine SP Tables-2
Toner End Status

2977*
Indicates the toner near end or end condition.
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not detected
1: Detected by SP2975-001
001 Near End 2: Vt (10) - Vref > 0.2 and Vsp > 0.6
3: Vt (10) - Vref > 0.45
4: 0.45 > Vt (10) - Vref > 0.2 and toner end counter > 300
5 to 10: Not used
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not detected
1: Vsp > 2.0
2: Toner end counter > 90 when SP2213-001 is set to "0".
3: Toner end counter < 90 and Vt (10) > (Vref + 0.3) when
002 End
SP2213-001 is set to "0".
4: When SP2213-001 is set to "2"
5: Vsp > 0.9 when SP2213-001 is set to "2"
6: Special order
7 to 10: Not used
Charge Counter [0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 sheets ]
Set the number of pages to print after toner and carrier initialization before
the charge input is increased to compensate for deterioration over time in
2980* the polarity of the carrier.
The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually
decrease and cause lower charge output. Setting the charge output to
increase after a specified number of copies can compensate for this effect.

Engine SP Tables-3
3.4.1 SP3-XXX: PROCESS
3001 P Sensor Setting
Current [0 to 43 / 13 / 0.1 mA ]
001* Allows you to reset the PWM of the ID sensor LED to avoid a service call
error after clearing NVRAM or replacing the NVRAM.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
The PWM data is stored by executing SP-3001-2.
Program
Service
Initialization -
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. ID sensor output for the bare drum
002 (VSG) is adjusted automatically to 4.0 ±0.2 V.
Press "Execute" to start. Perform this setting after replacing or cleaning the
ID sensor, replacing the drum, or clearing NVRAM.
3045* Toner End Setting DFU
001 ON/OFF [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=Off, 1=On
P Sensor Output
Displays the current VSG, VSP, VSDP, and grayscale control.
3103* If the P sensor does not detect the P pattern, "VSP = 5.0 V/VSG = 5.0 V" is
displayed and an SC code is generated.
If the P sensor does not detect the bare area of the drum, "VSP = 0.0
V/VSG =0.0 V" is displayed and an SC code is generated.
001 Vsg [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
002 Vsp [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
003 Vsdp [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
004 Vsm/Vsg [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]

Engine SP Tables-3
3902* New PCU Detection (Not used)
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
ON/OFF Setting
0: On, 1: Off
001
Turns on or off the new unit detection for the transfer belt unit and fusing
unit.
Hot Roller Stripper Cleaning
3905* "Cleaning A": 15 sec. off/on cycle for the fusing motor.
"Cleaning B": Off (45 sec.) and On (15 sec.) cycle for the fusing motor.
1st Cleaning: Interval
001 Sets the threshold for the 1st cleaning mode.

"Cleaning A" is done once.
[0 to 5 / 5 / 1 sheets]
1st Cleaning: Mode Setting
002 Sets the number of additional execution times of the 1st cleaning mode.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
2nd Cleaning: Interval
003 Sets the threshold for the 2nd cleaning mode.

"Cleaning A" is done twice.
[6 to 49 / 30 / 1 sheets]
2nd Cleaning: Mode Setting
004 Sets the number of additional execution times of the 2nd cleaning mode.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]

Engine SP Tables-3
3rd Cleaning: Interval
Sets the threshold for the 3rd cleaning mode.

005 "Cleaning A" is done twice and "Cleaning B" is done "N" times.
"N" is specified with SP3905-006.

[50 to 999 / 100 / 1 sheets]
3rd Cleaning: Mode Setting
Sets the number of execution times of the 3rd cleaning mode.
006 [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
 All fans remain on during cleaning and then switch off 60sec after
the cleaning cycle ends.
Cleaning Priority Setting
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 sheets]
0: Priority to printing (No job interruption)
1: Priority to cleaning (Job interruption)

Engine SP Tables-4
3.5.1 SP4-XXX: SCANNER

There are no Group 4 SP modes for this machine.

Engine SP Tables-5
3.6.1 SP5-XXX: MODE
5009* Add Disp. Lang Bit SW
Adds language available in user choice. (Only the languages registered in

the machine)
Refer to the displayed language list to set in the way showed below.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
List Num. Assigned Bit Switch
No.1~8 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-201)
No.9~16 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-202)

201,202,203,204
No.17~24 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-203)
No.25~32 BIT1 to 8 (SP5009-204)
Example: To add American(No.3 in the list) or Czech (No.15)

Turn Bit 3 of “SP5009-201” 0 to 1 for American.
Turn Bit 7 of “SP5009-202” 0 to 1 for Czech.
After setting, turn the main power switch off and on to make the setting valid.
0: Europe/Asia (mm)
mm/inch Display Selection
1: North America (inch)
5024*
Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.

Engine SP Tables-5
Accounting counter
Selects whether the printer counter is displayed on the LCD.

5045* [0-1 / 0 / 1]
0: Displays the total counter only.
1: Displays both total counter and printer counter.
5047* Paper Display
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5056* Coverage Counter Display
Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5061* Toner Remaining Icon Display Change
Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not display, 1: Display
Home Screen Login

5074*
Sets the application that appears when the home key is pressed.
Setting
002 [0 to 11111111 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Home Key Customization
091 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 ]
0: OFF (Function disabled), 1: SDK, 2: Reserve (Legacy application)

Engine SP Tables-5
Product ID
092 Sets the Application product ID.
[0x00 to 0xffff / 0x00 / 1]
Application Screen ID
093 Sets the display category of the application that is specified in SP5075-001.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
5075* USB Keyboard
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Function Setting
Service
001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
5083* LED ON-OFF setting at Toner Near End
Turns LED yellow lighting ON and OFF at Toner Near End.

001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5104* A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. "Yes" counts except
from the bypass tray. When "Yes" is selected, A3 and DLT paper are
counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively.
5112* Non-Std. Paper Sel.
Non-Standard Paper Selection

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not use, 1: Use

Engine SP Tables-5
Paper Size Type Selection
Selects the paper size (type) for both originals and copy paper.
5131* [0 to 2 / - / 1 step]
0: Japan, 1: North America, 2: Europe
After changing the setting, turn the copier off and on. If the paper size of the
archive files stored on the HDD is different, abnormal copies could result.
Bypass Length Setting
Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.
5150 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off [Default]
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.
5166* Lump Delete Form Setting
Last Deleted Time
021 Displays the last delete time.
[0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1]
By-pass Tray Paper Size Error [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON
5179* This SP determines whether a paper size error prompt appears when the
machine detects the wrong paper size for the job and during feed from the
by-pass tray.

Engine SP Tables-5
Paper Size Setting

5181*
Adjusts the paper size for each tray. [0 to 1 / - / 1]
001 Tray 1: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
002 Tray 1: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
003 Tray 1: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
Mode Tables
005 Tray 2: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
006 Tray 2: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
007 Tray 2: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
009 Tray 3: 1 (Tandem) 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
010 Tray 3: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
011 Tray 3: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
013 Tray 4: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
014 Tray 4: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT
015 Tray 4: 3 0: B4, 1: LG
017 LCT [0 to 2 / - / 1 ] 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF

Engine SP Tables-5 Rev. 8/15/2013
5186 RK4: Setting (Japan only)
Enable or distance the prevention for RK4 (Accounting device)

Disconnection. If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is
set to "1 (Enable)", the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and
stops.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Paper Exit After Staple End
This SP determines whether the machine can output paper if staples run
5199 out.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF. Paper cannot exit if no staples are available.
1: ON. Paper can exit with no staples.
5302* Set Time
Time Difference
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory
before delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[–1440 to 1440 / - / 1 min.]
Japan: +540 (Tokyo)
002 NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +60 (Paris)

CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
KO: +540 (Korea)
5305 Blue Angel Compliance
⇒ Settings items and the range regarding sleep mode suitable for Blue Angel
101 regulations.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-5
5307 Summer Time
[0 to 1 / 1 (NA/EU), 0 (ASIA) / 1 /step]

Setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
001 Enables or disables the summer time mode.
 Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise,
this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Rule Set (Start)
Program
Service
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the
first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
003 4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March.
Rule Set (End)
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
004 3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".

Engine SP Tables-5
Access Control (DFU)

5401
This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data.
Whenever a new login user is added to

the address book in external certification
mode (for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the
default document ACL is updated
according to this SP setting.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
103 Default Document ACL 0: View
1: Edit
2: Edit/Delete
3: Full control
Note: This SP setting is ignored on a
machine that is not using document
server.
Specifies the timeout of the

authentication.
104 Authentication Time [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sec./step]
0: 60 seconds
1 to 250 seconds
Selects the log out type for the extend

authentication device.
162 Extend Certification Detail Bit 0: Log-out without an IC card
0: Not allowed (default)
1: Allowed
200 SDK1 Unique ID
201 SDK1 Certification Method

"SDK" is the "Software Development
210 SDK2 Unique ID Kit". This data can be converted from
211 SDK2 Certification Method SAS (VAS) when installed or uninstalled.

(DFU)
220 SDK3 Unique ID
221 SDK3 Certification Method

Engine SP Tables-5
230 SDK certification device
Enables or disables the log out

confirmation option.
Bit 0: Log out confirmation option
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
Selects the automatic log out time.
240 Detail Option
Bit 1 and 2: Automatic log out timer
reduction
00: 60 seconds (default), 01: 10
seconds,
Mode Tables
Appendix:
10: 20 seconds, 11: 30 seconds
Program
Service
Access Control (DFU)
5402
Sets limited uses for SDKJ application data.
[ / 0x00 / 0x01/step]
bit0: SDKJ Authentication
-0: Panel Type
-1: Remote Type
bit1: Using user code setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
bit2: Using key-counter setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
bit3: Using billing external device setup
SDKJ1 Limit Setting….. SDKJ30
101 to 130 -0: OFF, 1: ON
Limit Setting
bit3: Using external billing device setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
bit4: Using extended external billing
device setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
bit5~6: Not used
bit7: Using extended function J limit
users
-0: OFF, 1: ON
SDKJ1 Product ID….. SDKJ30

141 to 170 [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1/step]
Product ID

Engine SP Tables-5
User Code Count Clear
5404 Clears the counts of the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict
the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
5411 LDAP-Certification
Turns simple authentication on or off for

LDAP.
004 Simplified Certification [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: OFF
1: ON
This SP is enabled only when SP5411-4

is set to "1" (ON).
005 Password Null Not Permit [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: Password null is permitted.
1: Password null is not permitted.
Determines whether LDAP option

(anonymous certification) is turned on or
006 Detail Option off.
[0 or 11111111 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5412 Krb-Certification
Sets the level of Kerberos Certification.

[0x01:AES256-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 /
0x02:AES128-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96 /
100 Encrypt Mode
0x04:DES3-CBC-SHA /
0x08:RC4-HMAC / 0x10:DES-CBC-MD5
/ 0xFF:ALL / 0xFF / 1bit]

Engine SP Tables-5
5413 Lockout Setting
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Lockout On/Off
001 0: OFF, 1:ON
Turns on or off the account lock for the local address book account.
Lockout Threshold [1 to 10 / 5 / 1/step]

002
Sets the maximum trial times for accessing the address book account.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
0: OFF (Lockout is not cancelled.)
Service
1: ON (Lockout is cancelled if a user ID
Cancellation On/Off
003 and password are correctly entered after
the lockout function has been executed
and a specific time has passed.)
Turns on or off the cancellation function of the account lockout.
Cancellation Time [1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min]
004 Sets the interval of the retry for accessing the local address book account
after the lockout function has been executed.
This setting is enabled only if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (ON).
5414 Access Mitigation
Mitigation ON/OFF
Permits or does not permit consecutive access to the machine with the
001 same ID and password.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF (Permitted)
1: ON (Not permitted)
Mitigation Time
002 Sets the prohibiting time for consecutive access to the machine with the
same ID and password.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min]

Engine SP Tables-5
5415 Password Attack
Permissible Number [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 times]
001 Sets the threshold number of attempts to attack the system with random
passwords to gain illegal access to the system.
Detect Time [1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec]

002
Sets a detection time to count a password attack.
5416 Access Information
Access User Max Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1/step ]
001 Sets the number of users for the access exclusion and password attack
detection function.
Access Password Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1/step ]
002 Sets the number of passwords for the access exclusion and password
attack detection function.
Monitor interval [1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]

003
Sets the interval of watching out for user information and passwords.
5417 Access Attack
Access Permissible number [0 to 500 / 100 / 1/step]

001
Sets a limit on access attempts to prevent password cracking.
Access Detect Time [10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec]

002
Sets a detection time to count password cracking.
Productivity Fall Weight [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec]
003 Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive
number of access attempts have been detected.
004 Attack Max Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1/step]

Engine SP Tables-5
Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to

slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of access
attempts have been detected.
User Authentication
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

5420
 These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has
been enabled.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1/step] 0: ON. 1: OFF
Service
Determines whether certification is
041 Printer
required before a user can use the
051 SDK1 [0 or 1/ 0 / 1/step] 0: ON. 1: OFF

Determines whether certification is
061 SDK2
required before a user can use the SDK
071 SDK3 application.
5430 Auth Dialog Message Change
Turns on or off the displayed message

change for the authentication.
001 Message Change On/Off
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Off, 1: On
Executes the message download for the

002 Message Text Download
authentication.
Inputs message text for the

003 Message Text ID
authentication.

Engine SP Tables-5
Authentication Error Code

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF [Default], 1: ON
001 System Log Disp Determines whether an error code
appears in the system log after a user
authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: OFF, 1: ON [Default]
002 Panel Disp Determines whether an error code
appears on the operation panel after a
user authentication failure occurs.
5501* PM Alarm
PM Alarm Level
001 Sets the PM alarm level.

[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 k copies/step]
0: No PM alarm
Original Count Alarm (DFU)
002 Selects whether the PM alarm for the number of scans is enabled or not.
If this is "1", the PM alarm function is enabled.
[0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Jam Alarm
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are
not included).
5504* [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)

Engine SP Tables-5
Error Alarm
Sets the number of sheets to clear the error alarm counter.

The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the
5505* error alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a
set number of copied sheets (for example, default 5000 (C1b) or 10000
(C1c) sheets). The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter
reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / 60 / 100 copies / step]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
5507* Supply Alarm
Switches the control call on/off for the

paper supply. (DFU)
0: Off, 1: On
Paper supply Alarm 0: No alarm.
001
(0:Off 1:On) 1: Sets the alarm to sound for the
specified number transfer sheets for
each paper size (A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT,
LG, LT, HLT)

stapler installed in the finisher. (DFU)
Staple Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
002
(0:Off 1:On) 0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples
used.

toner end. (DFU)
Toner Supply Alarm
003 0: Off, 1: On
(0:Off 1:On)
If you select "1" the alarm will sound
when the copier detects toner end.
006 Waste Toner Bottle Alarm 0: Off, 1: On

Engine SP Tables-5
Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply

Call" via the @Remote, when the
080 Toner Call Timing following conditions occur.
0: At replacement
1: At near end
128 Interval: Others
132 Interval: A3
134 Interval: A5
141 Interval: B4 The "Paper Supply Call Level: nn" SPs

specify the paper control call interval for
142 Interval: B5
the referenced paper sizes. (DFU)
160 Interval: DLT [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
164 Interval: LG
166 Interval: LT
172 Interval: HLT
5508 CC Call
001 Jam Remains Enables/disables initiating a call.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 Continuous Jams
0: Disable
003 Continuous Door Open 1: Enable
Sets the length of time to determine the

011 Jam Detection: Time Length length of an unattended paper jam.
[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute]
Sets the number of continuous paper

Jam Detection Continuous
012 jams required to initiate a call.
Count
[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 time]
Sets the length of time the remains

opens to determine when to initiate a
013 Door Open: Time Length
call.
[3 to 30/ 10 / 1 minute]

Engine SP Tables-5
SC/Alarm Setting
5515* With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when
an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when
an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call
003 Service Parts End Call
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
004 User Call
Service
Communication Information Test
006
Call [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF
007 Machine Information Notice
1: ON
008 Alarm Notice
009 Non-genuine Toner Alarm
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
Individual PM Part Alarm Call
5516 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call
when one of SP parts reaches its yield.
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

001
send, 1: Send) 0: Not send, 1: Send
Percent yield for triggering PM

004 [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
alert

Engine SP Tables-5 Rev. 05/09/2013
5730 Extend Function Setting
Expiration Prior Alarm Set [0 to 999 / 20 / 1/step]
[Counter Effect]
5731 Charge MK1 Cnt (Paper

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
>Combine)
EcoCountTime
5745
- [0 to 1439 / 0 / -/step]
5746 BMLinkS (Japan only)
Displays or enables the BMLinkS

001 available feature.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -/step]
Displays the polling interval when the

BMLinsS monitor service monitors the
002 interval:mon
machine status.
[10 to 3600 / 60 / 1 sec./step]
Displays the sending feature status of

the BMLinkS log service.
004 Available:log
[0 or 1 / 1 / -/step ]
⇒ 5749 Import/Export (Refer to Section 3.14 Import/Export for more information)
1 Export
101 Import
251 Export Result Print (SP)
252 Import Result Print (SP)

Engine SP Tables-5
Job Access Log
Changes the capacity of log storage.
5750 SP7-750-001 Job Log Access Log Eco Log
0:OFF (Default) 2000 6000 2000
1:ON 8000 1000 1000
Memory Clear
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
5801 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these
SP codes, print an SMC Report.
001 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 19 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and

002 Engine
copy process settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System

003 SCS Control Service) settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,

008 Printer Application the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS
counter.
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and

thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
010 Web Service
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server
using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings

(IP addresses also), the SmartDeviceMonitor for
011 NCS Admin settings, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the
TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)

Engine SP Tables-5
014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)

015 Clear UCS Setting
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report

016 MIRS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager)

018 SRM Memory Clr
settings.
019 LCS Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
FreeRun
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
5802* The correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is
not fed.
The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode
for a test.
001 TRAY1:A4LEF -
002 TRAY2:A3 -
003 TRAY2:A4SEF -
Input Check
5803
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches. ( p.3-165)
Output Check
5804 Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes.

( p.3-176)

Engine SP Tables-5
Anti-Condensation Heater
5805 [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0:OFF / 1:ON
5810 SC Reset
Resets all level A service call conditions, such as

fusing errors. To clear the service call, touch
001 Fusing SC Reset
"Execute" on the LCD, then turn the main power
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
switch off/on.
Service
5811 MachineSerial
002 Display Displays the machine serial number.
004 BCU Inputs the serial number.
5812* Service Tel. No. Setting
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a

001 Service
service call condition occurs.)
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the

002 Facsimile
Counter Report (UP mode).
Inputs the telephone number of the supplier displayed on the

003 Supply
user mode screen.
Allows the service center contact telephone number to be

004 Operation
displayed on the user mode screen.
Allows the inquiry display to be displayed on the user mode

screen.
101 DispInquiry
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed

Engine SP Tables-5
5816 Remote Service
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
001 [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
002 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”.
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.
003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
NOTE: This SP setting is changed to "1" after @Remote registration has been
completed.
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification

1: Does no use the RCG certification
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]

Engine SP Tables-5
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
011 Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.
Service
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
RFU (Remote Firmware Update) Timing
Selects the RFU timing.

013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received.

1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode.
RCG Error Cause
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
014 0: Normal
1: Fails to reflect the client/server certificate settings by network failure to

reboot. Transitions to 0 on restarting the machine.
RCG–C Registed
021 This SP displays the Embedded RC Gate installation end flag.

0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method.

023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection

Engine SP Tables-5
Cert. Expire Timing DFU

061
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between
Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the
customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set up
063 Embedded RC Gate-N.
 The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond

the 128 character are ignored.
 This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to
064 set up Embedded RC Gate-N.
 This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065  The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character

report.

Engine SP Tables-5
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066  The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character

report.
CERT: Up State
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Displays the status of the certification update.
Program
Service
0 The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received

1
from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified

2
of the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
3
failed update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update
4
067 is being sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue

11
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being

12
notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed

13 successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update
request from the rescue GW URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
14
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
15
the successful completion of this event.

Engine SP Tables-5
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
16
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
17
completed, but a certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL
18
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update
of the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has

1
expired.
068 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
2
has expired.
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual

3
certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT: Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This SP setting determines if the operator can

confirm the previous version of the firmware before
the firmware update execution. If the option to
085 Firm Up User Check confirm the previous version is selected, a
notification is sent to the system manager and the
firmware update is done with the firmware files
from the URL.

Engine SP Tables-5
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of

086 Firmware Size the firmware data files during the firmware update
execution.
Displays the macro version of the @Remote

087 CERT: Macro Ver.
certification.
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote

088 CERT: PAC Ver.
certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification.

Mode Tables
Appendix:
089 CERT: ID2 Code Asteriskes (*) indicate that no @Remote
Program
Service
Displays the common name of the @Remote

certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes.
090 CERT: Subject
Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote certification
exists. "000000___________" indicates "Common
certification".
Displays serial number for the @Remote

091 CERT: SerialNo. certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no
@Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the

@Remote certification. CN = the following 30
092 CERT: Issuer
bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no @Remote
certification exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the

093 CERT: Valid Start
Displays the end time of the period for which the

094 CERT: Valid End
Server CN Check
095
Not used

Engine SP Tables-5
GW Host
096
Not used
GW URL Path
097
Not used
Debug RescueG/WURL Set

099
Not used
102* CERT: Encrypt Level
Displays the encryption level for the NRS certificate.

[1 or 2 / 1 / – ]
Manual Polling
200
Executes the manual polling.
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
1: The Embedded RCG Gate is being set. Only Box registration is completed.
201 In this status, @Remote device cannot communicate with this device.
2: The Embedded RCG Gate is set. In this status, the @Remote device
cannot communicate with this device.
3: The @Remote device is being set. In this status the Embedded RCG Gate
cannot be set.
4: The @Remote module has not started.
Allows entry of the request number needed for the

202 Letter Number
Embedded RCG Gate.
Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote

203 Confirm Execute
Gateway.

Engine SP Tables-5
204 Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Confirmation number error
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
8: Other error
9: Confirmation executing
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the Gateway in
answer to the confirmation request. Displayed only when the result is
registered at the Gateway.
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

8: Other error
9: Registration executing

Engine SP Tables-5
Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error

Illegal Modem
-11002 Chat execution error
Parameter
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without

-12002
acquiring device status.
Attempted registration without execution of

-12003
an inquiry and no previous registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for

-12004
208 certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited.

-12005 The device has an Embedded RC
gate-related problem.
Operation Error,
A confirmation request was made after the
Incorrect Setting -12006
confirmation had been already completed.
The request number used at registration

-12007 was different from the one used at
confirmation.
Update certification failed because

-12008
mainframe was in use.
ID2 mismatch between an individual

-12009
certification and NVRAM
-12010 Certification area is not initialized.

Engine SP Tables-5
Attempted dial up overseas without the

-2385 correct international prefix for the
telephone number.
Error Caused by -2387 Not supported at the Service Center
Response from GW -2389 Database out of service

URL
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
-2392 Parameter error
Service
-2393 RCG device not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal
-2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG Gate

setup.
209 Instl Clear
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after
this setting has been changed.
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.

Engine SP Tables-5
5821* Remote Service Address
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote

002 RCG IP Address
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1]
Sets the port number of the RCG (Remote

003 RCG Port
[0 to 65535 / 443 / 1]
Sets the URL path of the RCG (Remote

004 RCG URL Path
[0 to 16 characters / /RCG/services/ /-]
NV-RAM Data Upload
5824 Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card. Push Execute.

Note: When uploading data in this SP mode, the front door must be open.
NV-RAM Data Download
5825 Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After
downloading is completed, remove the card and turn the machine power off
and on.

Engine SP Tables-5
5828 Network Setting
IPv4 Address (Ethernet/IEEE 802.11)
001 This SP allows you to check and reset the IPv4 address for Ethernet and
wireless LAN (802.11): aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Enables and disables bi-directional

communication on the parallel connection
1284 Compatibility
050 between the machine and a computer.
(Centro)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
0:Off, 1: On
Program
Service
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284
Mode) for data transfer.
052 ECP (Centro)
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Switches the job spooling on and off.

065 Job Spooling [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
This SP determines whether the job interrupted

at power off is resumed at the next power on.
This SP operates only when SP5828-065 is set
Job Spooling Clear: Start
066 to "1".
Time
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: OFF Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: ON Clears spooled job.
This SP determines whether job spooling is

enabled or disabled for each protocol. This is a
Job Spooling (Protocol) 8-bit setting.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
069 0: No spooling, 1: Spooling enabled
0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
1 FTP (Not Used) 5 DIPRINT
2 IPP 6 SFTP

Engine SP Tables-5
3 SMB 7 WSPRND
Delete Passward
084
Executes NCS related parameter list printing
087 @Remote Protocol Cnt (DFU)
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP

TELNET is disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
090
(0:OFF 1:ON) [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Disables or enables the Web operation.

Web
091 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
(0:OFF 1:ON)
This is the IPv6 local address referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11) in the format:
"Link-Local address" + "Prefix Length"
Active IPv6 Link Local
Address
configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. These
notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6
Addresses " below this table.

147
Address 1
These SPs are the IPv6 stateless addresses (1
Active IPv6 Stateless to 5) referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
149
Address 2 (802.11) in the format:
Active IPv6 Stateless "Stateless Address" + "Prefix Length"

Address 3
configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
153
Address 4

Engine SP Tables-5

155
Address 5
IPv6 Manual Address
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or

wireless LAN (802.11) in the format:
156 "Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
each. These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6 Addresses"
below this table.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
IPv6 Gateway Address
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless

158 LAN (802.11). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8
blocks of 16 bits each. These notations can be abbreviated. See "Note: IPV6
Addresses" below this table.
Note: IPV6 Addresses

Ethernet and the Wireless LAN (802.11) reference the IPV6 "Link-Local address + Prefix
Length". The IPV6 address consists of 128 bits divided into 8 blocks of 16 bits:
aaaa:bbbb:cccc:dddd:eeee:ffff:gggg:hhhh:
The prefix length is inserted at the 17th byte (Prefix Range: 0x0 to 0x80). The initial
setting is 0x40 (64).
For example, the data: "2001123456789012abcdef012345678940h" is expressed:
"2001:1234:5678:9012:abcd:ef01:2345:6789": prefixlen 64
However, the actual IPV6 address display is abbreviated according to the following rules.

Engine SP Tables-5
Rules for Abbreviating IPV6 Addresses

1. The IPV6 address is expressed in hexadecimal delimited by colons (:) with the
following characters:
0123456789abcdefABCDEF
2. A colon is inserted as a delimiter every 4th hexadecimal character.
fe80:0000:0000:0000:0207:40ff:0000:340e
3. The notations can be abbreviated by eliminating zeros where the MSB and digits
following the MSB are zero. The example in "2" above, then, becomes
fe80:0:0:0207:40ff:0:340e
4. Sections where only zeros exist can be abbreviated with double colons (::). This
abbreviation can be done also where succeeding sections contain only zeros (but
this can be done only at one point in the address). The example in "2" and "3" above
then becomes:
fe80::207:40ff:0:340e (only the first null sets zero digits are abbreviated as "::")
-or-
fe80:0:0:0:207:40ff::340e (only the last null set before "340e" is abbreviated as "::")
Enable or disables the automatic setting for IPv6

IPv6 Stateless Auto stateless.
161
Setting [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
1: Enable, 0: Disable
Web Item visible
Displays or does not display the Web system items.
236 [0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed

bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Web shopping link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link
237 page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-5
Web supplies Link visible
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top
238 page and link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Web Link1 Name
239 This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web
system. The maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Web Link1 URL
240 his SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web
system. The maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Web Link1 visible
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web
241 system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"
DHCPv6 DUID
Sets DHCPv6 DUID.

249 [0000000000000000000000000000h to
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh /
0000000000000000000000000000h / -]
UUID
251
DFU

Engine SP Tables-5
Compatible ID
252 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0= Disabled , 1= Enabled
HDD
5832 Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info)
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
009 HDD Formatting (Data for Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder)
Operation Panel Image Exposure Function

5834
DFU

Engine SP Tables-5
5840* IEEE 802.11
Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This
006 bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 11 (NA), 13 (EU), 14 (JPN) / 1]

JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Channel MIN
Mode Tables
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN.
Appendix:
Program
Service
007 This bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14 / 1 / 1]
JPN: 1 to 14, NA: 1 to 11, EU: 1 to 13
Transmission speed [0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix 0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix 0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
008 0 x 0F - 36M Fix 0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix 0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 0D - 12M Fix 0 x 12 - 72M (reserved)
0 x 0B - 9M Fix 0 x 09 - 22M (reserved)
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
WEP Key Select
Selects the WEP key.
011 Bit 1 and 0

00: Key1, 01: Key2 (Reserved),
10: Key3 (Reserved), 11: Key4(Reserved)
RTS/CTS Thresh
013 Adjusts the RTS/CTS threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.

[0 to 3000 / 2432 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-5
Fragment Thresh
042 Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.

[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
11g CTS to Self
043 Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
11g Slot Time
044 Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
WPA Debug Lvl
045 Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application.

[1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
Supply Name Setting
5841* Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
007 OrgStamp
011 StapleStd1
012 StapleStd2
013 StapleStd3
014 StapleStd4
021 StapleBind1
022 StapleBind2

Engine SP Tables-5
023 StapleBind3
GWWS Analysis (DFU)
Bit Groups
0 System & other groups (LSB)
This is a debugging tool. It 1 Capture related
5842* sets the debugging output 2 Certification related

mode of each Net File
Mode Tables
3 Address book related
Appendix:
process.
Program
Service
Bit SW 0011 1111 4 Machine management related
5 Output related (printing, delivery)
6 Repository related
Default: 00000000 – do not change

Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document
001 Setting 1
server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder
software
Adjusts the debug program mode setting.

Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting
002 Setting 2 0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msec.
0 to 6: Not used
5844 USB
Transfer Rate
001 Sets the speed for USB data transmission.

[0 x 01 or 0 x 04 / 0 x 04 /-]
0 x 01 [Full Speed], 0 x 04 [Auto Change]
002 Vendor ID

Engine SP Tables-5
Sets the vendor ID:

Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
Product ID
003 Sets the product ID.
Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004 [0000 to 9999 / 100 / 1] (DFU)
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal

number recognized as the BCD.
005 Fixed USB Port
This SP standardizes for common use the model name and serial number
for USB PnP (Plug & Play). It determines whether the driver requires
re-installation.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
006 PnP Model Name
This SP sets the model name to be used by the USB PnP when "Function
Enable (Level 2) is set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name
(SP5844-5).
Default: Laser Printer (up to 20 characters allowed).

Engine SP Tables-5
007 PnP Serial Number
This SP sets the serial number to be used by the USB PnP when "Function
Enable (Level 2)
set so the USB Serial No. can have a common name (SP5844-5).
Default: None (up to 12 characters allowed for entry).
 Make sure that this entry is the same as the serial number in use.
 At initialization the serial number generated from the model name is
used, not the setting of this SP code.
 At times other than initialization, the value set for this SP code is used.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
100 Notify Unsupport
This SP determines whether an alert message appears on the control panel

when a USB device (unsupported device) that cannot use an A-connector is
connected.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Function enable
1: Function disable
 An unsupported device is a device that cannot use the functions of the
USB device. For example, a USB mouse cannot be used even if it
connected.
 If the PictBridge option is not mounted, even if a digital camera is
connected it cannot be used because it is an unsupported device.

Engine SP Tables-5
Delivery Server Setting

5845*
These are delivery server settings.
Delivery Retry Interval
003 [60 to 900 / 300 / 1 /step]
Sets the wait time from the error action to the retry.
Delivery Retry times
004 [0 to 99 / 3 / 1time(s) /step]
Sets how many times to retry.
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
Rapid Sending Control
022
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
error.
5846* UCS Setting
LDAP Search Timeout
010 Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1 to 255 / 60 /1 step]
Initial Value of Upper Limit Count

022
[0 to 999999 / 500 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-5
041 Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a

basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However,
the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
Mode Tables
Appendix:
1. Turn the machine off.
Program
Service
2. Install the new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD
automatically. However, at this point the address book can be accessed
by only the system administrator or key operator.
5. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes
successfully, any user can access the address book.
Addr Book Media
Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.

[0 to 30 / - /1]
043
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1 20: HDD
2: SD Slot 2 30: Nothing
4: USB Flash ROM
Initialize All Setting & Addr Book

046
Initializes all settings and the address book.
Initialize Local Address Book
047 Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a
machine managed with UCS.

Engine SP Tables-5
Initialize LDAP Addr Book
049 Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the
LDAP address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize All Addr Book
050 Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information

managed by UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system
administrators are not deleted.
Backup All Addr Book
051 Copies all directory information to the SD card. Do this SP before replacing
the controller board or HDD. The operation may not succeed if the controller
board or HDD is damaged.
Restore All Addr Book
052 Copies back all directory information from the SD card to the flash ROM or
HDD. Upload the address book from the old flash ROM or HDD with
SP5846-51 before removing it. Do SP5846 52 after installing the new HDD.
Clear Backup Info
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot 2. Deletes
053 only the files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the
card is write-protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not
remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.

Engine SP Tables-5
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS
local address book.
Bit Meaning
0 Checks both upper/lower case characters
1
060
2 Japan Only
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
3
4 --- Not Used ---
5 --- Not Used ---
6 --- Not Used ---
7 --- Not Used ---
Complexity Option 1
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]


Engine SP Tables-5
Complexity Option 2
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case
and defines the length of the password.
063 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Complexity Option 3
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and
064 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Complexity Option 4
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and
065 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step]

Encryption Start
094 Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the
LDAP server.
[0 to 255 / 1 ] No default

Engine SP Tables-5
Web Service
5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.
5848* Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848-100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
004 Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4 Bits)
009 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits) Switches access control on
and off.
011 Acc. Ctrl: Device Management (Lower 4 Bits) 0000: OFF, 0001: ON
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
022 Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower 4 Bits)
Service
210

211
Setting: Log Type: Access

212
Setting: Primary Srv

213
Setting: Secondary Srv

214
Setting: Start Time

215
Setting: Interval Time

216
Setting: Timing
217

Engine SP Tables-5
Installation Date
5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to

001 Display
"Installation Date" or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is printed on

the printout for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print [0 to 1 / 1 / -]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
When the total number of pages that are made reaches

this value, the current date becomes the 'official'
003 Total Counter
installation date for this machine.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Bluetooth
5851* Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0: Public] / [1: Private]
5856 Remote ROM Update
When set to "1" allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE
1284) during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the
machine is cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware
002 using a parallel cable
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed

Engine SP Tables-5
5857 Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until
001 this feature is switched on.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Mode Tables
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the
Appendix:
Program
Service
002 event selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2 to 3 / 2 / 1]
2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Save to HDD
005
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
006
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies
009 them to the SD Card.

A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can
be copied one by one to each SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it
to the SD Card.
010 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can

be copied one by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is
no log on the HDD with no key specified.

Engine SP Tables-5
Erase HDD Debug Data

011
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging
012 files generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when
SP5857 010 or 011 is executed.

To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
Free Space on SD Card

013
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
Debug Save When
5858* These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to
the destination selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-003 stores one SC specified by number.
Stores SC codes generated by copier

001* Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
engine errors.
Controller SC Error (0:OFF Stores SC codes generated by GW

002*
1:ON) controller errors.
003* Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1step]
004* Jam (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores jam errors.
5859* Debug Save Key No.
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
003 Key 3 functions that use common memory on the controller board.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
004 Key 4
005 Key 5

Engine SP Tables-5
006 Key 6
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860* SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
Mode Tables
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
Appendix:
Program
Service
[1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail
is not received during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply

021 mail.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: No, 1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
022 validated account after the SMTP server is validated.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From" item switched.

Engine SP Tables-5
SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Select the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
025 Bit 2: CRAM_MD5

Bit 3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit 4 to Bit 7: Not Used
 This SP is activated only when SMTP authentication is enabled by

UP mode.
S/MIME: MIME Header Setting
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent by S/MIME.
026 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
S/MIME: Authentication Check
When sending S/MIME mail, specifies whether to check the destination
028 authentication.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not checked
1: Checked
5866 E-Mail Report
Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.

001 Report Validity
Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the
alert mail.
005 Add Date Field
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: Not added, 1: Added

Engine SP Tables-5
5869 RAM Disk Setting
Enables or disables the Mail function.

001 Mail Function
5870 Common Key Info Writing
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the

001 Writing
device for @Remote specifications.
Mode Tables
003 Initialize Initializes the data area of the common proof for validating.
Appendix:
Program
Service
SD Card Appli. Move
5873 Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see
"SD Card Appli Move" in the chapter "System Maintenance (Main Chapters).
001 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another.
002 Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
5878 Option Setup
Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite

Security option for the copier. For more, see
001 Data Overwrite Security
"DataOverwriteSecurity Unit" in the chapter
"Installation".
Fixed Phase Block Erasing

5881
Detects the Fixed phrase.

Engine SP Tables-5
SD Get Counter
5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower

slot). The operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root
directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text
001 file (*.txt) prefixed with the number of the machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
Personal Information Protect
Selects the protection level for logs.

5888* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs)
SDK Application Counter

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6

Engine SP Tables-5
Plug & Play Maker/Model Name
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
5907 This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these
names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5919* HDD Encryption
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Shows the status of the encryption function for the HDD.
001 [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Not Activated
1: Activated
5930 Meter Charge
001 0: OFF
1: ON

Engine SP Tables-5
Device Setting
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this
SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is
limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC

 Other network applications than @Remote or
LDAP/NT authentication are not available when
this SP is set to "2". Even though you can
change the initial settings of those network
applications, the settings do not work
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
SP Print Mode
5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP

Engine SP Tables-5
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
SP Text Mode
5992
Writes the SMC sheets into the SD card.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
026 Print SP

Engine SP Tables-6
3.7.1 SP6-XXX: PERIPHERALS
Punch Position: Sub Scan

6128
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction. (For D636/D637)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU [-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
004 5-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Punch Position: Main Scan

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction. (For D636/D637)
002 3-Hole: NA
003 4-Hole: EU [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.4 mm]
004 4-Hole: SCAN
005 2-Hole: NA
Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.
6130* Adjusts the paper buckle at the punch unit for each paper size. (For
D636/D637)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF [-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.25 mm]
003 A4 SEF

Engine SP Tables-6
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
011 12" x 18"
Service
012 Other
Skew Correction Control

6131*
Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. (For D636/D637)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other

Engine SP Tables-6
Jogger Fence Fine Adj.
6132* This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
stack on the finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher D636/D637. The
adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
[-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Other
Staple Position Adjustment
Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (D636/D637).

6133* + Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
[-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
Saddle Stitch Position Adj.
6134* Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper
is stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher (D637).
001 A3 SEF [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF + Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.

Engine SP Tables-6
003 A4 SEF - Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Folder Position Adj.
6135* This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the
Booklet Finisher D637.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
[-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12" x 18"
009 Other
Book Fold Repeat
6136* Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher D637.
[2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]

Engine SP Tables-6
Finisher Free Run

6137
These SPs are used for the D588 or D636/D637.
D588: System free run

001 Free Run 1
D636/D637: Free run for paper edge stapling.
D588: Free run for durability testing

002 Free Run 2
D636/D637: Not used
003 Free Run 3 Not used
004 Free Run 4 Not used
Entrance Sensor
6139 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet)
finisher. (D588) ( p.3-165)
FIN (EUP) INPUT Check
finisher. (D636/D637) ( p.3-165)
FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check
finisher. (D588) ( p.3-176)
FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check
finisher. (D636/D637) ( p.3-176)

Engine SP Tables-6
6148 Jogger Fine Adj.
001 A3T
002 B4T
003 A4T
004 A4Y
005 B5Y
Adjusts the jogger location [Horizontal
Mode Tables
006 A5Y
Appendix:
direction]
Program
Service
007 DLT-T [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 /mm]
*Jogger is optional equipment.
008 LG-T
009 LT-T
010 LT-Y
011 HLT-Y
012 Other
Max. Pre-Stack Sheet [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheets step]
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149*
 You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding
thick or slick paper.
6150 Jogger Control
Enables or disables the jogger.

001
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

Engine SP Tables-6
Extra Staples
More than the standard number of sheets can be stapled. This SP sets the
additional number of sheets (This Setting + Standard Number = maximum
number of sheets).
 If the number of the maximum for staples is increased, and the
6830* mechanical warranty of the unit can be guaranteed, then the setting can
take effect without changing the controller software.
 However, assurance that mechanical performance can be guaranteed is
required before changing the setting to increase the staple load for more
than the maximum in the feed/exit specifications. Raising this setting
without quality assurance could damage the machine.
Staple positions other than booklet stapling

1
[0 to 50 / 0 /1]
2 Booklet stapling
2
[0 to 50 / 0 /1]

Engine SP Tables-7
3.8.1 SP7-XXX: DATA LOG
7401* Total SC Counter
SC Counter
001 Displays the total number of service calls that have occurred.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Reset).
Program
Service
Total SC Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of service calls that have occurred.
Reset).
7403* SC History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9

Engine SP Tables-7
7404* SC991 History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the 10 most recently detected SC991 codes.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
7502* Total Paper Jam
Jam Counter
001 Displays the total number of paper jams.

Reset).
Total Jam Counter
002 Displays the cumulative sum of paper jams.

Reset).

Engine SP Tables-7
Total Jams Location
These SPs display the total number of paper jams by location. A "Check-in"
7504* (paper late) error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the
precise time. A "Check-out" ("paper lag") paper jam occurs when the paper
remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time.
001 At power On
003 Tray 1: On
Mode Tables
004 Tray 2: On
Appendix:
Program
Service
005 Tray 3: On
006 Tray 4: On
007 LCT: On
008 Bypass: On
009 Duplex: On
017 Registration: On
019 Fusing Exit: On
020 Paper Exit: On
021 Bridge Exit On
022 Bridge Transport: On
024 Junction Gate Sensor: On

Engine SP Tables-7
025 Duplex Exit: On
026 Duplex Entrance: On (In)
027 Duplex Entrance: On (Out)
057 Registration Sensor: Off
058 LCT Feed Sensor: Off
060 Paper Exit: Off
061 Bridge: Exit: Off
062 Bridge: Transport: Off
064 Junction Gate Sensor: Off
065 Duplex Exit: Off
066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In)
067 Duplex Entrance: Off (Out)
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN
101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN
102 Finisher Staple: KIN
103 Finisher Exit: KIN
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN

Engine SP Tables-7
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP
Mode Tables
194 Finisher Staple Exit: EUP
Appendix:
Program
Service
195 Finisher Exit: EUP
198 Finisher Folder: EUP
199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP
200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP
202 Finisher Staple Moving Motor: EUP
203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP
206 Finisher Punch Motor: EUP
7506* Jam Count by Paper Size
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size.
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF

Engine SP Tables-7
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
7507* Plotter Jam History
001 Last
002 Latest 1
Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
003 Latest 2 Sample Display:

CODE:007
004 Latest 3
SIZE:05h
005 Latest 4 TOTAL:0000334

DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Latest 5 where:
007 Latest 6 CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.

SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
008 Latest 7 TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7502)
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9

Engine SP Tables-7
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
ROM No./Firmware Version
7801 This SP code displays the firmware versions of all ROMs in the system,
including the mainframe, the ARDF, and peripheral devices.
PM Counter Display
7803*
Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
Paper [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the paper counter (pages)
Page: PCD [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

002
Displays the PCD (Drum and Development unit) counter (pages)

003
Displays the transfer unit counter (pages).

004
Displays the fusing unit counter (pages).

005
Displays the PCD rotation counter (distance).

Engine SP Tables-7

006
Displays the transfer unit rotation counter (distance).

007
Displays the fuser unit rotation counter (distance).
Rotation(%): PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]

008
Displays the PCD (%) rotation counter (Distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
009
Displays the transfer unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010
Displays the fuser unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
Rotation(%):Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
011
Displays the web unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM).
PM Counter Reset
7804 Resets the PM counter.

Touch [Execute] two times > "Completed" > [Exit]
Paper
001
Resets the PM counter of the paper.
PCD
002 Resets the PM counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit except
developer).
Transfer
003
Resets the PM counter of the transfer unit.

Engine SP Tables-7
Fuser
004
Resets the PM counter of the fuser unit.
Web
005
Reset the PM counter of the web unit.
All Clear
006
Resets all PM counter
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
7805 Parts Counter
Page: OPC [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the OPC.
Page: Charge Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

002
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the charge roller.
Page: Developer [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

003
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the developer.
Page: Belt Blade [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

004
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the transfer belt cleaning blade.
Page: Heat Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

005
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the hot roller.
Page: Pressure Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

006
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the pressure roller.
Page: Cleaning Roller [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

007
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the cleaning roller.

Engine SP Tables-7
Page: Thermistor [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

008
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the thermistors.
Page: Stripper [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

009
Displays the parts counter (pages) of the strippers.
Rotation: OPC [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

010
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the OPC.
Rotation: Charge Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

011
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the charge roller.
Rotation: Developer [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

012
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the developer.
Rotation: Belt Blade [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

013
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the transfer belt, blade.
Rotation: Heat Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

014
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the hot roller.
Rotation: Pressure Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

015
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the pressure roller.
Rotation: Cleaning Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

016
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the cleaning roller.
Rotation: Thermistor [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

017
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the thermistors.
Rotation: Stripper [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ]

018
Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the strippers.
Page(%): Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]

019
Displays the parts counter (rotations/PM %) of the cleaning web.

Engine SP Tables-7
7806 Counter Clear
OPC
001
Resets the parts counter of the OPC.
Charge Roller
002
Resets the parts counter of the charge roller.
Developer
003
Mode Tables
Resets the parts counter of the developer.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Belt: Blade
004
Resets the parts counter of the transfer belt cleaning blade.
Heat Roller
005
Resets the parts counter of the hot roller.
Pressure Roller
006
Resets the parts counter of the pressure roller.
Cleaning Roller
007
Resets the parts counter of the cleaning roller.
Web
008
Resets the parts counter of the cleaning web.
Thermistor
009
Resets the parts counter of the thermistors.
Stripper
010
Resets the parts counter of the strippers.
All Clear
011
Resets all parts counters.

Engine SP Tables-7
SC/Jam Counter Reset
7807 Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press Execute on the touch
panel.
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7507, SP7508.
Self-Diagnose Result Display
Execute to open the "Self-Diagnostics Result Display" to view details about

7832 errors. Use the keys in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all
the information. If no errors have occurred, you will see the "No Error"
message on the screen.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
7853 Replacement Counter
PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
001
Displays the replacement counter of the PCD (Drum and Development unit).
Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
002
Displays the replacement counter of the transfer unit.
Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
003
Displays the replacement counter of the fusing unit.
Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ]
004
Displays the replacement counter of the cleaning web.

Engine SP Tables-7
zero cross [0 to 255 / 60 / 1 ]
7856* Stores and displays the detected zero cross frequency of the main ac power
supply from the wall socket.
Assert Info. DFU
7901 These SP numbers display the results of the occurrence of the most recent
SC code generated by the machine.
Mode Tables
001* File Name Module name
Appendix:
Program
Service
002* Number of Lines Number of the lines where error occurred.
003* Location Value
7904 Near End Setting
001* PCD Toner Near End timing setting

[0 to 2/ 1 / 1 /step]
002* Transfer
0: Earlier
1: Normal
003* Fuser
2: Later
7906 Prev Counter
Page: PCD [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 page]

001
Displays the counter (pages) of the previous PCD

002
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous transfer unit.

003
Displays the previous counter (pages) of the previous fusing unit.

Engine SP Tables-7

004
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous PCD

005
Displays the previous counter (rotations) of the previous transfer unit.

006
Rotation(%):PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

007
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous PCD
Rotation(%):Transfer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

008
Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous transfer unit.
Rotation(%):Fuser [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm]

009
Rotation(%):Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %]
010 Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous cleaning
web.
7950 Replacement Date
PCD
001
Displays the replacement date of the PCD.
Transfer
002
Displays the replacement date of the transfer unit.
Fuser
003
Displays the replacement date of the fusing unit.
Web
004
Displays the replacement date of the web unit.

Engine SP Tables-7
7951 Remaining Counter
PCD(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

001
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the PCD.
Transfer(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

002
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Page) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

003
Mode Tables
Displays the remaining counter (pages) of the fusing unit.
Appendix:
Program
Service
PCD(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]
005
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the PCD.
Transfer(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

006
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the transfer unit.
Fuser(Rotation) [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 days]

007
Displays the remaining counter (rotations) of the fusing unit.
PCD (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

009
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the PCD.
Transfer (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

010
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the transfer unit.
Fuser (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

011
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the fusing unit.
Web (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %]

013
Displays the remaining counter (%) of the cleaning web.

Engine SP Tables-7
Rev. 6/4/2013
7952 PM Yield Setting
Sets the each yield of the following.
001 PCD(Page) [0 to 99999999/ 80000 / 1 sheet]
⇒ Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Pages).
002 Transfer(Page) [0 to 9999999 / 90000 / 1 sheet]
⇒ Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Pages).
003 Fuser(Page) [0 to 9999999 / 90000 / 1 sheet]
⇒ Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Pages).
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 71990000 / 1 mm]

PCD(Rotation)
005 C2c: [0 to 999999999 / 75500000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the PCD (Rotations).
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 62770000 / 1 mm]

Transfer(Rotation)
006 C2c: [0 to 999999999 / 65420000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the transfer unit (Rotations).
C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 54880000 / 1 mm]

Fuser(Rotation)
007 C2b: [0 to 999999999 / 55800000 / 1 mm]
Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Rotations).
Web (%) [0 to 255 / 92 / 1 %]

009
Sets the PM yield (%) of the web unit.

Engine SP Tables-7
7953 Operation Env Log
T<10 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

001
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: T<10°C
10<=T<=17 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

002
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 10°C<=T<=17°C
17<T<23 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

003
Mode Tables
Displays the PCU rotation distance in the environment: 17<=T<=23
Appendix:
Program
Service
23<=T<=27 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]
004
27<=T<=32 [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

005
32<T [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm]

006
Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 32<T
Env Log Clear

7954
Resets the environment logs (SP7953).

Engine SP Tables-8
3.9.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending
color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination
with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

 How is the document server actually being used?
 What application is using the document server most frequently?
 What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications

T: Total: (Grand Total).
(C, F, P, etc.).
P: Print application.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example) group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on
the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations
below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations

Engine SP Tables-8
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Mode Tables
Bk Black
Appendix:
Program
Service
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,

DesApl Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode

Engine SP Tables-8
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
GPC
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
ImgEdt
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

NRS machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in
Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows

print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the
Palm 2
network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.

PGS Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two
pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam

Engine SP Tables-8
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2

R only. This machine is under development and currently not
available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters

SMC
are recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
 All of the Group 8 SPs are able to reset by “SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear”.
T:Total Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of times

8001 each application is used to do a job.
8004 P:Total Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-8
 These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
 When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
 Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
 When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
 When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified
by the application.
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method
is specified by the application.
O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a

stored copy job is set for Sort and then stored on
806x 1 Sort
the document server, the L: counter increments.
(See SP8-066-1)
806x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the

806x 4 Booklet machine is in staple mode, the Staple counter
also increments.

Engine SP Tables-8
Number of jobs started In any mode other than

8 06x 5 Z-Fold
the Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When

806x 6 Punch Punch is set for a print job, the P: counter
increments. (See SP8-064-6.)
806x 7 Other (Reserved)
806x 8 Inside-Flod Not used
Mode Tables
806x 9 Three-In-Fold Not used
Appendix:
Program
Service
806x 10 Three-OUT-Fold Not used
806x 11 Four-Fold Not used
806x 12 KANNON-Fold Not used
806x 13 Perfect-Bind Not used
806x 14 Ring-Bind Not used
T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs
(Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages
in the job.
807x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
807x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
807x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages

Engine SP Tables-8
807x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
807x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
807x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
807x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages
 Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
 If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
 When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
8381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
printed by the customer. The counter
8384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL
for the application used for storing the
pages increments.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of
pages stored from within the document
8387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL
server mode screen at the operation
panel. Pages stored with the Store File
button from within the Copy mode
screen go to the C: counter.
 When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
 When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted
for the application that stored them.
 These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.

Engine SP Tables-8
LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are
also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
This SP counts the amount of paper

(front/back counted as 1 page) used for
8411 Prints/Duplex *CTL duplex printing. Last pages printed only
Mode Tables
on one side are not counted.
Appendix:
Program
Service
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the printer application.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by Other applications
842x 1 Simplex> Duplex
842x 4 Simplex Combine
842x 5 Duplex Combine
842x 6 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)

Engine SP Tables-8
842x 12 Booklet
842x 13 Magazine
 These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve
their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
 Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
 Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:

Engine SP Tables-8
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
Mode Tables
5 3 5 4
Appendix:
Program
Service
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
below, regardless of which application was used.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted.

843x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet The count for a cover printed on both sides
counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side)

843x 2 Series/Book or printed as a book with booklet right/left
pagination.

Engine SP Tables-8
The number of pages printed where stamps were

843x 3 User Stamp applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8441 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8444 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
844x 1 A3
844x 2 A4
844x 3 A5
844x 4 B4
844x 5 B5
844x 6 DLT
844x 7 LG
844x 8 LT
844x 9 HLT
844x 10 Full Bleed
844x 254 Other (Standard)
844x 255 Other (Custom)
 These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.

Engine SP Tables-8
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
8451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
Bypass Tray
001 Bypass Tray *CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Tray 1 *CTL Copier
003 Tray 2 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 Tray 3 *CTL Paper Tray Unit (Option)
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
005 Tray 4 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
LCT (Option)
006 Tray 5 *CTL
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
 These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter
8461 is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the
feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
 Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
 During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8464 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
846x 1 Normal
846x 2 Recycled
846x 3 Special
846x 4 Thick
846x 5 Normal (Back)
846x 6 Thick (Back)
846x 7 OHP
846x 8 Other

Engine SP Tables-8
PrtPGS/Mag
8471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
001 < 49% *CTL
002 50% to 99% *CTL
003 100% *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 101% to 200% *CTL
Mode Tables
005 201% < *CTL
Appendix:
Program
Service
 Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
 Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
 Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
 Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
 The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a
rate of 100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.

Engine SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
printed.
8 51x 1 RPCS
8 51x 2 RPDL
8 51x 3 PS3
8 51x 4 R98
8 51x 5 R16
8 51x 6 GL/GL2
8 51x 7 R55
8 51x 8 RTIFF
8 51x 9 PDF
8 51x 10 PCL5e/5c
8 51x 11 PCL XL
8 51x 12 IPDL-C
8 51x 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 51x 14 Other
8 51x 15 IPDS
 SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
 Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.

Engine SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
all applications.
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
the Print application.
8 52x 1 Sort
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
8 52x 2 Stack
Service
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
8 52x 8 Inside Fold Half-Fold (FM2) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 9 Three-IN-Fold Letter Fold-in (FM4) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 10 Three-OUT-Fold Letter Fold-out (FM3) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 11 Four Fold Double Parallel Fold (FM5) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 12 KANNON-Fold Gate Fold (FM6) (Multi Fold Unit)
8 52x 13 Perfect-Bind Perfect Binder
8 52x 14 Ring-Bind Ring Binder
 If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
 The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries
are counted.

Engine SP Tables-8
This SP counts the amount of staples

8531 Staples *CTL used by the machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8551 T:FIN Books

Not used
002 Ring-Bind *CTL
8554 T:FIN Books

Not used
002 Ring-Bind *CTL
8561 T:A Sheet Of Paper

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8564 P:A Sheet Of Paper

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-8
8567 O:A Sheet Of Paper

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:Counter
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
8581 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of
the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
001 Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
O:Counter
8591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
001 A3/DLT *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 Duplex *CTL
T: Coverage Counter
8601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages
for each printing mode.
001 B/W *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
011 B/W Printing Pages *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-8
P:Coverage Counter
8604
-
001 B/W *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
SDK Apli Counter

8617
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK application.
001 SDK-1 *CTL
002 SDK-2 *CTL
003 SDK-3 *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 SDK-4 *CTL
005 SDK-5 *CTL
006 SDK-6 *CTL
Func Use Counter

8621
-
005 Function-005 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-8

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-8

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-8
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Dev Counter
8771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
001 Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Toner_Bottle_Info. *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8781 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
001 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles

Engine SP Tables-8
Toner Remain
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
8801 allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is
better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments
of 10 (10% steps).
001 K *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% /step]
Eco Counter
8811
-
001 Eco Total *CTL
004 Duplex *CTL
005 Combine *CTL

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008 Duplex (%) *CTL
009 Combine (%) *CTL
010 Paper Cut (%) *CTL
101 Eco Totalr:Last *CTL
104 Duplex:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
105 Combine:Last *CTL
108 Duplex (%):Last *CTL
109 Combine (%):Last *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1% /step]
110 Paper Cut (%):Last *CTL

Engine SP Tables-8
Cvr Cnt: 0-10%
011 0 to 2%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
021 3 to 4%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
031 5 to 7%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
041 8 to 10%: BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
CVr Cnt: 11-20%
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CVr Cnt: 21-30%
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
CVr Cnt: 31%-
each color is 31% or higher.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Page/Toner Bottle
8891
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

Engine SP Tables-8
Page/Toner_prev1
8901
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Page/Toner_prev2
8911 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each
color.
001 BK *ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Cvr Cnt/Total
8921
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Coverage (%) Bk *CTL [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1% /step]
011 Coverage /P: Bk *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Machine Status *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time

001 Operation Time while controller is saving data to HDD (while
engine is not operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while

controller saves data to HDD. Does not include
002 Standby Time
time spent in Energy Save, Low Power, or Off
modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing

003 Energy Save Time

Engine SP Tables-8
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine

004 Low Power Time on. Includes time while machine is performing
Includes time while machine is performing

background printing. Does not include time
005 Off Mode Time
machine remains powered off with the power
switches.
006 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Total time when paper jams have been staying
Program
Service
007 PrtJam
during printing.
Total time when original jams have been staying

008 OrgJam
during scanning.
009 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying
Electricity Status
8961
-
001 Ctrl Standby Time *CTL
002 STR Time *CTL
003 Main Power Off Time *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Reading and Printing

004 *CTL
Time
005 Printing Time *CTL
006 Reading Time *CTL
007 Eng Waiting Time *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008 Low Power State Time *CTL
009 Silent State Time *CTL

Engine SP Tables-8
Admin. Counter List

8999
-
001 Total
007 Printer: BW
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012 A3/DLT
013 Duplex
027 Printer: BW(%) [0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]

Input Check
3.10 INPUT CHECK
3.10.1 COPIER
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Input Check
5803 Reading
Description
0 1
Tray 1:
005
Tray 1:
006
Tray 2:
011
Tray 2:
012

Input Check
017 LCT: Paper Feed Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
022 Relay Sensor: LCT No paper detected Paper detected
023 By-pass: Paper End Sensor Not end Paper end
024 By-pass: Paper Size Sensor See the table 3 following this table.
025 Registration Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
026 Fusing Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
027 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
028 Junction Gate Relay Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
029 Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
030 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full
031 Right Cover Open/Close Close Open
032 Duplex Unit Open/Close Open Close
033 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
034 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected

Input Check
035 Bank Right Cover Open/Close Close Open
036 Tray Cover Open/Close Close Open
037 LCT Set Set Not set
038 Bridge/Exit Tray: Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
039 Bridge/Exit Tray: Relay Sensor Paper detected No paper detected
040 Bridge/Exit/Shift: Set Detection Set Not set
Mode Tables
Bridge/Exit Tray: Left Guide
Appendix:
Program
041 Close Open
Service
Open/Close
Bridge/Exit Tray: Right Guide

042 Close Open
Open/Close
043 Transfer Belt Unit HP Sensor Not HP HP
046 Fusing Unit Set Set (Bit1) Not set (Bit1)
047 Toner Overflow Sensor Not full Full

open. close.

open. close.
055 New U. Det. :PCDU
057 Cleaning Web End Not end End
058 Punch Switch
Bypass Tray Paper Length

065 Paper detected No paper detected
Detection
200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close

Input Check
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full 0 0
Nearly full 1 0
Near end 1 1
Almost empty 0 1
Table 2: Paper Size Switch

Switch 1 is used for the tray set detection.
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 0 1
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF *2 B4 SEF *2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 1 0
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 1 1
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 0 0
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1

Input Check
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-002 (Tray 1) or -006 (Tray 2).
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-003 (Tray 1) or -007 (Tray 2).
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-001 (Tray 1) or -005 (Tray 2).
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of
SP 5-181-004 (Tray 1) or -008 (Tray 2)..
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
Models Bit No.
North America Europe/Asia 3 2 1 0
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 1 1 0
(11" x 8.5" LEF) (A4 LEF)
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

1 1 0 0
(11" x 8.5" LEF) (A4 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1 A4 SEF*1

1 1 0 1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2) (A5 LEF)
8.5" x 11" SEF*1 A4 SEF*1

1 0 0 1
(8.5" x 11" SEF*2) (B5 LEF)
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 1 0 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 0 0 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 0 1 1 1
5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 1 1 1 1
 *1: When the machine determines that the paper feed direction is "LEF", it considers that
the paper size is bracketed size.

Input Check
APS Original Size Detection
Width
Original Size Length Sensor SP4-301
Sensor
display
Metric version Inch version L3 L2 L1 W1 W2
A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 00011111
B4 10" x 14" O O O O X 00011110
F4
8.5" x 13", 8.25" x
13", or 8" x 13" 8.5" x 14" O O O X X 00011100
SP 5126 controls the
size that is detected
A4 LEF 8.5" x 11" X X X O O 00000011
B5 LEF - X X X O X 00000010
A4 SEF 11" x 8.5" X O O X X 00001100
B5 SEF - X X O X X 00000100
5.5" x 8.5",
A5 LEF/ SEF X X X X X 00000000
8.5" x 5.5"

Input Check
3.10.2 OPTIONS
3000/2000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)
Reading
0 1
001 Entrance Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
002 Proof Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
003 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full
No paper Paper
004 Upper Tray Exit Sensor
005 Staple Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
006 Shift Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
007 Shift Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
008 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
009 Lower Tray Height Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
010 Upper Tray Height Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
011 Upper Tray Full Sensor Not Full Full
012 Stack Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
013 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
014 Feed Out Belt HP Sensor HP Not HP
015 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
016 Corner Stapler HP Sensor Not HP HP
017 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor Not HP HP
018 Upper Tray Limit SW Not Limit Limit
019 Door Switch Closed Open

Input Check
Reading
0 1
020 Corner Stapler Operation Not HP HP
021 Staple Detection No staple detected Staple detected
022 Staple Dip Detection No staple detected Staple detected
023 Punch Movement HP Sensor Not HP HP
024 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor Not HP HP
025 Paper Position Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
026 Punch Full Sensor Not Full Full
027 Punch HP Sensor Not HP HP
030 Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor Not HP HP
031 Stack Present Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
032 Clamp Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
033 Fold Entrance Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
034 Bottom Fence HP Sensor Not HP HP
035 Fold Cam HP Sensor Not HP HP
036 Fold Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
037 Fold Unit Exit Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
No paper Paper
038 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Front
No paper Paper
039 Lower Tray Full Sensor: Rear
040 Booklet Stapler 1: Operation Not HP HP
041 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Front) No staple detected Staple detected

Input Check
Reading
0 1

(Leading Edge)
Booklet Stapler 1: Operation

043 Not HP HP
(Rotation/Rear)
044 Booklet Stapler 1: Staple In (Rear) No staple detected Staple detected
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
(Leading Edge/Rear)
Service
046 Upper Tray Full Sensor: 3000 Not Full Full
047 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Front - -
048 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Rear - -
049 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Upper - -
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type
0 0 Japan
1 0 Europe
0 1 North America
1 1 North Europe
*2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (D637 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "3000/2000 (Booklet)
Finisher".

Input Check
Reading
0 1
No paper
001 Entrance Sensor Paper detected
detected
Shift Exit Sensor

002 No paper detected Paper detected
(Lower Tray Exit Sensor)
Staple Entrance Sensor No paper

003 Paper detected
(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor) detected
Staple Moving HP Sensor

004 Not HP HP
(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
005 Not HP HP
(Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
006 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor HP Not HP
007 Staple Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected
Staple Rotation Sensor

008 Not HP HP
(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
No staple
009 Staple Sensor Staple detected
detected
No staple
010 Staple READY Detection Staple detected
detected
Exit Guide Plate HP

011 Not HP HP
(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)

Input Check
Reading
0 1
012 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper Sensor No output tray Output tray

013
(Stack Height Sensor) detected detected
Tray Lower Sensor

014 Lower limit Not lower limit
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Proof Full Sensor
Service
015 Not full Full
(Paper Limit Sensor)

Output Check
3.11 OUTPUT CHECK
3.11.1 COPIER
5804 Output Check
001 Exit Motor: 350
002 Exit Motor: 175
003 Exit Motor: 230

Paper exit motor (Mainframe)
004 Exit Motor: 180
005 Exit Motor: 154
006 Exit Motor: 90
007 Feed Motor: 300
008 Feed Motor: 255
009 Feed Motor: 230
010 Feed Motor: 215 Paper feed motor (Mainframe)
011 Feed Motor: 180
012 Feed Motor: 154
013 Feed Motor: 90

Paper feed motor (Optional paper
feed unit)

Output Check
5804 Output Check
Mode Tables
024 LCT: Feed Motor: 215 Paper feed motor (Optional LCT)
Appendix:
Program
Service

Paper feed clutch 1/2 (Mainframe)
030 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 3 Paper feed clutch 3/4 (Optional
031 Bank: Paper Feed Clutch 4 paper feed unit)
032 LCT: Paper Feed Clutch Paper feed clutch (Optional LCT)

Pick-up Solenoid 1/2 (Mainframe)
035 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 3 Pick-up Solenoid 3/4 (Optional
036 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 4 paper feed unit)
037 LCT: Pick-up Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (LCT)

-

Output Check
5804 Output Check
042 Paper Tray Lock Solenoid Not used
Tray lock solenoid (Optional paper

043 Bank: Paper Tray Lock Solenoid
feed unit)

-
048 Exit: Junction Gate Solenoid Junction gate 1 solenoid
049 Duplex: Inverter Gate Solenoid Not used

-

-

Output Check
5804 Output Check
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
066 By-pass Feed Clutch -
067 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid -
068 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: 230

Drive motor (Bridge unit)
Bridge/Exit Tray: Junction Gate Junction Gate Solenoid (Bridge

072
Solenoid unit)
073 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: Reset -
074 Bridge/Exit Tray: Drive Motor: Enable -
075 Bridge: Cooling Fan Motor Not used
076 Transfer Belt Contact Motor -
077 OPC Motor: 230
078 OPC Motor: 180

Drum motor
079 OPC Motor: 154
080 OPC Motor: 90

Output Check
5804 Output Check

-

-
089 Development Puddle Motor -
090 PTL Control -
091 Fusing Fan Motor: High

Fusing exhaust fan motor
092 Fusing Fan Motor: Low
093 Exhaust Fan Motor: High

Exhaust fan motor
094 Exhaust Fan Motor: Low
095 Duct Fan Motor Cooling fan motor
096 Exit Fan Motor: High

Paper exit cooling fan motor
097 Exit Fan Motor: Low
098 PSU Fan Motor -

-

Output Check
5804 Output Check
104 LD 1
-
105 LD 2
106 Toner Bottle Motor: Fwd Toner supply motor
Mode Tables
107 Quenching Lamp -
Appendix:
Program
Service
108 Charge Bias -
109 Development Bias -
110 Transfer Belt Voltage -
111 ID Sensor LED -
115 Cleaning Web Motor Web motor
117 CTL Cooling FAN Controller fan

Output Check
Output Check
6144
Display Description
001 Upper Relay Motor Upper Transport Motor
002 Lower Relay Motor Lower Transport Motor
003 Exit Motor -
004 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
005 Lower Tray Lift Motor -
007 Stapler Motor -
008 Stapler Hammer -
009 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid -
011 Stack Feed-out Motor -
012 Shift Motor -

Output Check
3.11.3 3000 /2000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER (D636/D637)
Output
6145
Display Description
001 Entrance Motor -
002 Upper Transport Motor -
003 Lower Transport Motor -
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
004 Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor -
005 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor -
006 Shift Roller Motor -
008 Upper Tray Lift Motor -
009 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor -
011 Feed Out Belt Motor -
012 Corner Stapler Movement Motor -
013 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor -
014 Corner Stapler -
015 Proof Junction Gate Solenoid -
016 Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid -
Stapling Edge Pressure Plate

017 -
Solenoid
019 Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid -
020 Stack Junction Gate Motor -

Output Check
021 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor -
022 Booklet Stapler: Front -
023 Booklet Stapler: Rear -
024 Fold Plate Motor -
025 Fold Roller Motor -
026 Positioning Roller Motor -
027 Punch Drive Motor -
028 Punch Movement Motor -
029 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor -
030 Exit Jogger Motor: Front -
031 Exit Jogger Motor: Rear -
032 Exit Jogger Motor Release Motor -

Test Pattern Printing
3.12 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
Printing Test pattern: SP2-109

Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for
design testing.
 Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, an
SC occurs.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].
Mode Tables
Appendix:
3. When you want to select the single color of Magenta, Yellow or Cyan for printing a test pattern,
Program
Service
select the color with SP2-109-005 (2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4: Cyan).
4. When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern, select the density with
SP2-109-006 to -009 for each color.
 If you select "0" with SP2-109-006 to -009, the color to be adjusted to "0" does not
come up on a test pattern.
5. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, touch "Yes" to select the test pattern for
printing.
6. Touch "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print
(paper size etc.).
 If you want to use black and white printing, touch "Black & White" on the LCD. If you
want to use color printing, touch "Full Colour" on the LCD.
7. Press the "Start" key to start the test print.
8. After checking the test pattern, touch "SP Mode" on the LCD to return to the SP mode display.
9. Reset all settings to the default values.
10. Touch "Exit" twice to exit SP mode.
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None 11 Independent Pattern (1-dot)
1 Vertial Line (1dot) 12 Independent Pattern (2-dot)
2 Vertial Line (2dot) 13 Independent Pattern (4-dot)
3 Horizontal Line (1dot) 14 Triming Area

Test Pattern Printing
4 Horizontal Line (2dot) 16 Tooth Check (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 17 Band (Horizontal)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 18 Band (Vertical)
7 Grid Pattern Small 19 Checker Flag Pattern
8 Grid Pattern Large 20 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 21 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern

Rev. 05/09/2013 SP5749 IMPORT/EXPORT
⇒ 3.14 SP5749 IMPORT/EXPORT

3.14.1 IMPORT/EXPORT
5749 Import/Export
1 Import [- / - / - ]
Target: [System] [Printer] [Fax]

[Scanner]
Option: [Unique] [Secret]
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
[Execute]
101 Export [- / - / - ]
Option: [Unique]
Encryption key (if selected)
[Execute]
251 Export Result Print (SP) [-/-/-]
[Execute]
252 Import Result Print (SP) [-/-/-]
[Execute]
3.14.2 DATA THAT CAN BE IMPORTED AND EXPORTED:

Copier / Document Server Features
Printer Features
Scanner Features
Facsimile Features
Extended Feature Settings
Program (Document Server)
Program (Copier)
Program (Scanner)
Web Image Monitor Setting
Web Service Settings
System Settings

SP5749 IMPORT/EXPORT Rev. 05/09/2013
3.14.3 DATA THAT CANNOT BE IMPORTED OR EXPORTED:

Address book
Programs (fax function)
Programs (printer function)
Scanner function programs that include password settings
User stamp in the copy default settings
Settings for configuring from telnet
@Remote-related data
Counters
EFI printer unit settings (At the time of EFI printer unit connection)
Settings that can be specified using Web Image Monitor or Web Service only (such as
Bonjour or SSDP settings)
Some System Settings*1 *2
*1 The setting for the date, those settings that require the device certificate, and those
settings that need to be adjusted for each device (for example, image adjustment settings)
cannot be imported or exported.
*2 Settings only for executing functions and settings only for viewing cannot be imported or
exported.
3.14.4 IMPORT/EXPORT CONDITION:

Import/export is possible between devices only if their models, region of use, and the following
device configuration match.
Input Tray
Output Tray
Whether or not equipped with the duplex function
Whether or not equipped with a finisher and the type of finisher
ADF
Whether or not equipped with a hard disk
Whether or not equipped with the Remote Machine function
Location of stored data (log):

The log is stored in the same location as the exported device setting information file.
To use this function, it is necessary to create the device setting information file with special
software and store it on the web server. For details, contact your sales representative.

Possible solutions for import/export problems:

If an error occurs, check the log's result code first. Values other than 0 indicate that an error
occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service

If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note
down the error log entry, and then contact your service representative.
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 A file import was attempted Import files exported from the same model with
between different models or the same device configurations.
(INVALID REQUEST) machines with different
device configurations.
4 Failed to write the device Check whether the destination device is
information to the operating normally.
(INVALID OUTPUT destination device.
DIR)
7 An unexpected error Switch the power off and then back on, and
occurred during import or then try the operation again. If the error
( MODULE ERROR) export. persists, contact your service representative.
8 The available storage Execute the operation again after making sure
space on the external there is enough storage space.
(DISK FULL) medium is insufficient.
9 Failed to write or read the Check whether the path to the folder for storing
log file. the file or the folder in which the file is stored is
(DEVICE ERROR) missing.
10 The hard disk is faulty. Contact your service representative.
(LOG ERROR)
20 Failed to import some The reason for the failure is logged in
"NgCode". Check the code.
(PART FAILED) settings. ♦ Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the allowable
range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is missing.
4. NOT EXIST
The setting does not exist in the system.
5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed because of the
system status or interlocking with other
specified settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
The setting cannot be changed for some other
reason.
21 Failed to import the file Check whether the file format is correct. The log
because it is in the wrong is in the form of a CSV file
(INVALID FILE) format in the external
medium.
22 The encryption key is not Use the correct encryption key.
valid.
(INVALID KEY)
NOTE:
- When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only on an
SD card.
- The file format for exports is CSV.

3.14.5 EXPORTING DEVICE INFORMATION

When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5749-001
4. Select target SP settings to be exported.
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
5. Select the option settings.
Item Specification Note
Unique Information unique to the Information unique to the machine that can be updated:
machine is included in the 1. Items that are used to identify the machine among a group of
exported file if you have multiple devices.
selected the “Unique” Ex: IP address, host name, information associated with the FAX
setting number, mail address assigned to the machine
2. Items for specifying the options installed on the machine.
Ex: Lot number for developer
Information unique to the machine that cannot be updated:

3. Items for which the problem may occur by importing
Ex: Serial number, information related to @Remote
4. Items for managing the history of the machine
Ex: Time and date, counter information, installation date
5. Engine settings

Item Specification Note
Secret Confidential information is Confidential information:

exported if you select the
"Secret" setting. #1. Data that absolutely cannot be exported.
(Asterisks ("*") are used to mask this information inside the
exported file.)
Ex: Password, encryption key, PIN code
#2. Confidential information
Ex: User name, user ID, department code, e-mail addresses,
phone numbers
#3. Personal information
Example: Document name. image data
#4. Sensitive information
Ex: IP address, MAC address, Network parameters
6. Select an encryption setting.
Encryption Select whether or not If the encryption function is used, the encryption key must be set
encryption will be through direct input
performed when exporting.
- Type an arbitrary password using the software keyboard
If the "Encryption" key is - The password can be up to 32 characters in length
pressed, you can export
confidential information (in
an encrypted state)
7. Press “Execute”.
8. Press [OK].
NOTE:
- If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.

3.14.6 IMPORTING DEVICE INFORMATION

Import device information saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5749-101
Mode Tables
Appendix:
Program
Service
4. Select a unique setting.
5. Press “Encryption key”, if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
Unique To import unique information Refer to the above information

to the machine, press the
“Unique” key.
Encryption If the encrypted file is selected
as the file to be imported, this
setting is required.
6. Press “Execute”.
7. Press [OK].
Note:
- If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.

SR790(B408)/SR3090(D588)
1000-SHEET FINISHER
REVISION HISTORY
Page Date Added/Updated/New
None
1000-SHEET FINISHER B408/D588
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................1

1.1 MAIN PCB .................................................................................................... 1
1.2 STAPLER UNIT ............................................................................................ 2
1.3 MOTORS ...................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR .................................................................................... 3
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR .............................................................................. 3
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ........................... 4
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................................... 4
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS ........................................................................... 5
1.4.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................... 5
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR .................................................................. 6
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR..................................................... 6
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR .............................................................. 7
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR ............................................................... 7
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................8
2.1 JAM DETECTION......................................................................................... 8
3. SERVICE TABLES..........................................................................9
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ............................................................................. 9
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .........................................................10

4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 10
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 11
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................................ 13
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
4.5 JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16
Upper Tray Mode ................................................................................... 16
Sort/Stack Mode .................................................................................... 16
Staple Mode ........................................................................................... 16
4.6 UPPER TRAY............................................................................................. 17
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ................................................ 18
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM ..................................................................... 19
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 20
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE ................................................................................. 21
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM .......................................................................... 22
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM ........................................... 23
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM ........................................................... 24
SM i B408/D588
MAIN PCB
CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning
any of the procedures in this section.
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.

 : See or Refer to  : Screws  : Connector  : Clip ring
 : E-ring
1.1 MAIN PCB
[A]
SR790/SR3090
[B]
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
B408R109.WMF B408R110.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Main PCB [B] ( x 4, All )
SM 1 B408/D588
STAPLER UNIT
1.2 STAPLER UNIT

1. Side cover [A] ( x 2) [B]
[C]
2. Open exit guide plate [B]
3. Upper side cover [C] ( x 2)
[A]
B408R102.WMF
[D]
4. Front cover support plate [D] ( x 1)
[E]
5. Front cover [E]
[F]
6. Front inner cover [F] ( x 2)
B408R113.WMF
7. Harness [G]
8. Unhook the spring [H]
9. Turn the stapler unit [I] and take it
out. [J]
10. Bracket [J] ( x 2)
[H]
[G] [I]
B408R114.WMF
B408/D588 2 SM
MOTORS
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1) [A]
B408R123.WMF
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR
Finisher
2. Stapler motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
[A]
B408R124.WMF
SM 3 B408/D588
MOTORS
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR

2. Motor assembly [A] ( x 4,  x 2)
[A]
3. Upper transport motor [B] ( x 4)
4. Exit motor [C] ( x 4)
[B]
[C]
B408R112.WMF
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR
1. Main PCB (1.1)

2. Lower transport motor [A] ( x 2,  x
1)
[A]
B408R111.WMF
B408/D588 4 SM
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS

[A]
1.4.1 PREPARATION
1. Front cover and inner cover (1.2) [B]

2. Upper side cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Upper tray [B] ( x 1)
[C]
B408R116.WMF
[E]
4. Lower side cover [C] ( x 2)
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
5. Loosen the 2 screws [D]. [D]
6. Lower the lower tray guide plate [E].
B408R117.WMF
7. Guide plate [F] ( x 4)
[F]
B408R118.WMF
SM 5 B408/D588
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR
1. Stack height sensor assembly [A] ( x

1) [A]
2. Stack height sensor [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B408R121.WMF
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR
1. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
B408R120.WMF
[A]
B408/D588 6 SM
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1. Lower tray lift motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
[A]
B408R119.WMF
SR790/SR3090
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
1. Stack feed-out motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
[A]
B408R122.WMF
SM 7 B408/D588
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode
Jam Content
Shift Staple
Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn on
  On check within the normal time after the main
machine exit sensor turns on
Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn off
 
Off check within the normal time after it turns on.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower tray exit sensor does not turn
 On check on within the normal time after the
entrance sensor turns off.
Tray exit sensor: The tray exit sensor does not turn off

Off check within the normal time after it turns on.
Stapler tray entrance sensor: The stapler tray entrance sensor does
 On check not switch on within the normal time
after the entrance sensor switched on.
Stapler tray entrance sensor: The staple tray entrance sensor does
 Off check not turn off within the normal time after it
turns on.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower exit sensor does not turn on
 On check after the feed-out pawl feeds out the
outputs.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower exit sensor turns on when the
 Off check feed-out pawl returns to its home
position after feeding out the outputs.
B408/D588 8 SM
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those listed in
the table below.
SW100
Description
1 2
0 0 Normal operation mode (Default)
1 0 Packing mode.
• Before packing the machine, do the following: Set switch 1 to 1 then back to
zero. The lower tray moves to the lowest position. Then turn off the main switch.
• After unpacking the machine, do the following: After turning the main switch back
on, the lower tray returns to home position automatically.
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
SM 9 B408/D588
GENERAL LAYOUT
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
2 3
1
13 4
5
6
12
7
11
10
8
9
B408D101.WMF
1. Upper Tray 8. Stapler

2. Upper Tray Exit Roller 9. Stack Feed-out Belt
3. Entrance Roller 10. Positioning Roller
4. Tray Junction Gate 11. Shift Roller
5. Upper Transport Roller 12. Lower Tray
6. Stapler Junction Gate 13. Lower Tray Exit Roller
7. Lower Transport Rollers
B408/D588 10 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3
11
4
5
10
9 7
8 6 12
B408D102.WMF
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
19
13
18 14
20
15
16
21 17
B408D103.WMF
1. Upper Cover Switch 12. Jogger Fence HP Sensor

2. Paper Limit Sensor 13. Positioning Roller Solenoid
3. Entrance Sensor 14. Stapler HP Sensor
4. Exit Guide Plate Motor 15. Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
5. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor 16. Stapler Tray Paper Sensor
6. Front Door Safety Switch 17. Stapler Hammer Motor
7. Stack Height Sensor 18. Staple Sheet Sensor
8. Lower Tray Exit Sensor 19. Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor
9. Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch 20. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
10. Shift HP Sensor 21. Staple Sensor
11. Shift Motor
SM 11 B408/D588
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
22
32
31
30
29
28
27 23
26
25
24 B408D104.WMF
22. Tray Junction Gate Solenoid

23. Lower Tray Lift Motor
24. Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor
25. Stapler Motor
26. Jogger Fence Motor
27. Stack Feed-out Motor
28. Main Board
29. Lower Transport Motor
30. Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
31. Exit Motor
32. Upper Transport Motor
B408/D588 12 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
Upper Drives the entrance roller and upper transport
M1 32
Transport rollers.
Lower Drives the lower transport rollers and the
M2 29
Transport positioning roller.
M3 Jogger Fence Drives the jogger fences. 26
M4 Staple Hammer Drives the staple hammer. 17
M5 Stack Feed-out Drives the stack feed-out belt. 27
M6 Exit Guide Plate Opens and closes the exit guide plate. 4
M7 Exit Drives the exit roller. 31
M8 Lower Tray Lift Moves the lower tray up or down. 23
M9 Shift Moves the shift roller from side to side. 11
M10 Stapler Moves the stapler unit from side to side. 25
Sensors
Entrance Detects copy paper entering the finisher and
S1 3
checks for misfeeds.
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Paper Limit Detects when the paper stack height in the
Finisher
S2 2
upper tray is at its limit.
Jogger Fence Detects when the jogger fence is at home
S3 12
HP position.
S4 Shift HP Detects when the shift roller is at home position. 10
Stack Feed-out Detects when the stack feed-out belt is at home
S5 19
Belt HP position.
S6 Stapler HP Detects when the stapler is at home position. 14
Exit Guide Plate Detects when the exit guide plate is at home
S7 5
HP position.
Stapler Tray Detects copy paper entering the stapler tray and
S8 15
Entrance checks for misfeeds.
S9 Lower Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds. 8
S10 Stack Height Detects the top of the copy paper stack. 7
Lower Tray Detects when the lower tray is at its lower limit
S11 24
Lower Limit position.
Stapler Tray Detects when there is copy paper in the stapler
S12 16
Paper tray.
S13 Staple Sheet Detects the leading edge of the staple sheet. 18
Stapler Rotation Detects when the staple hammer is at home
S14 20
HP position.
Staple Detects whether there are staples in the staple
S15 21
cartridge.
Solenoids
Tray Junction Drives the tray junction gate.
SOL1 22
Gate
Stapler Junction Drives the stapler junction gate.
SOL2 30
Gate
SM 13 B408/D588
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Positioning Moves the positioning roller.
SOL3 13
Roller
Switches
Lower Tray Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit
SW1 9
Upper Limit position.
Front Door Cuts the dc power when the front door is
SW2 6
Safety opened.
Upper Cover Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is
SW3 1
opened.
PCBs
Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the
PCB1 28
copier/printer.
B408/D588 14 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
1
2 5
4
SR790/SR3090
B408D106.WMF
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
B408D105.WMF
Finisher
7
B408D107.WMF
1. Exit Motor 6. Lower Tray Lift Motor

2. Upper Transport Motor 7. Stack Feed-out Motor
3. Lower Transport Motor 8. Jogger Motor
4. Shift Motor 9. Stapler Motor
5. Exit Guide Plate Motor
SM 15 B408/D588
JUNCTION GATES
4.5 JUNCTION GATES
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B408D108.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combination of the tray junction gate [A] and stapler junction gate [B].
These gates are controlled by the tray junction gate solenoid [C] and stapler
junction gate solenoid [D].
Upper Tray Mode

The tray junction gate solenoid remains off. The copies go up to the upper tray.
Sort/Stack Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid
remains off. The copies are sent to the lower tray directly.
Staple Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on.
The copies go down to the jogger unit.
B408/D588 16 SM
UPPER TRAY
4.6 UPPER TRAY
[A]
B408D109.WMF
SR790/SR3090
When the paper limit sensor [A] switches on during feed-out for each of three
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
consecutive sheets of paper, paper overflow is detected.
SM 17 B408/D588
LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
[G]
[B] [F]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B408D112.WMF
The vertical position of the lower tray [A] depends on the height of the copied paper
stack on the lower tray. The stack height sensor feeler [B] contacts the top of the
stack, and the lower tray lift motor [C] controls the tray height.
When the lower tray reaches its lowest possible position, the actuator [D] turns on
the lower tray lower limit sensor [E], and copying stops.
Tray Up
When the copy paper on the tray is removed, the stack height sensor [F] turns off
and the tray lifts up. Then, the tray stops when the sensor turns on again (the tray
pushes up the feeler).
If the stack height sensor fails, the lower tray upper limit switch [G] detects the tray
and stops the motor. This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure.
Sort/Stack Mode (Tray Down)

Every five sheets of paper, the tray goes down until the sensor turns off again.
Then, it goes up until the sensor is on again.
Staple Mode (Tray Down)

After a stapled copy is fed out, the tray goes up for 220 ms and stops for 300 ms.
Then, it goes down for 1 second, waits for 500 ms, then goes up until the sensor
turns on.
B408/D588 18 SM
PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
[F] [C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
B408D110.WMF
In the sort/stack mode, the shift roller [A] moves from side to side to separate the
sets of copies.
The horizontal position of the shift roller is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the
shift gear disk [C]. After the trailing edge of the copy passes the upper transport
roller, the shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the link [D].
After the paper is delivered to the lower tray [E], the shift roller moves to its home
position, which is detected by the shift HP sensor [F]. Then, when the trailing edge
of the next copy passes the upper transport roller, the shift roller shifts again. This
operation is done every sheet.
When the trailing edge of each page in the next set of copies passes the upper
transport roller, the shift roller shifts in the opposite direction.
SM 19 B408/D588
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
B408D113.WMF [B] [F]
[E]
[A]
[C]
B408D114.WMF
[D]
In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned
when it arrives in the jogger unit.
For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly
after the stapler tray entrance sensor [B] turns off, and the positioning roller [C]
pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper [D].
For the horizontal paper alignment, the jogger front fence [E] and the rear fence [F]
move to the waiting position, which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper.
When aligning the paper vertically, the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the
waiting position. After the vertical position has been aligned, the jogger fence
pushes the paper 4 mm against the rear fence to align the paper horizontally. Then
the jogger fence moves back to the previous position.
B408/D588 20 SM
EXIT GUIDE PLATE
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE
[B] [C] [A]

[D]
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
B408D111.WMF
Finisher
When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the
leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from
running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A]
is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers. This operation is done for all
paper sizes, but is only needed for the larger sizes.
The exit guide plate motor [B] and exit roller release cam [C] control the exit guide
plate movement. When the exit guide plate motor starts, the cam turns and the exit
guide plate moves up. When stapling is finished, the exit guide plate motor turns on
again to close the exit guide plate. When the exit guide plate HP sensor [D] turns
on, the motor stops.
SM 21 B408/D588
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM
[E] [B]
[D]
[C]
B408D116.WMF
[A]
The staple hammer motor [A] drives the staple hammer.

The staple sheet sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the staple sheet at the
stapling position to prevent the hammer from operating if there are no staples at
the stapling position.
If there is no staple cartridge in the stapler unit or no staples in the staple cartridge,
staple end is indicated on the operation panel. The stapler sensor [C] detects this.
The stapler rotation HP sensor [D] checks whether the staple hammer mechanism
returns to home position after each stack has been stapled.
When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor, the copier detects a
staple jam. When a staple jam has occurred, the jammed staple is inside the staple
cartridge [E]. Therefore, the jammed staple can be removed easily after pulling out
the staple cartridge.
B408/D588 22 SM
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
B408D117.WMF
The stapler motor moves the stapler [A] from side to side. After the start key is
SR790/SR3090
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
If two-staple-position mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling
position first, then moves to the rear stapling position. However, for the next copy
set, it staples in the reverse order (at the rear side first, then at the front side).
After the job is completed, the stapler moves back to its home position. The stapler
HP sensor [B] detects this.
SM 23 B408/D588
PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B408D118.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift roller. The shift roller takes over stack feed-out after the leading edge
reaches this roller.
Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor, the stack-
feed-out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to
the lower tray. Then, the stack-feed-out motor turns on again until the pawl [B]
actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor [D].
B408/D588 24 SM
D386/D634
BRIDGE UNIT BU3030/BU3060
P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New
None
BRIDGE UNIT BU3030/BU3060
(D386/D634)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................... 1

1.1 BRIDGE UNIT CONTROL BOARD................................................................1
1.2 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR......................................................................2
1.3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR ....................................................................................3
1.4 RELAY SENSOR ...........................................................................................4
2. DETAILS ........................................................................................ 5
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ........................................................5
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT.............................................................................................6
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .........................................................7
2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ...............................................8
2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM ...................................................................9
SM i D386/D634
READ THIS FIRST
Safety and Symbols
Replacement Procedure Safety
 Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the
replacement procedures in this manual.
When taking apart the bridge unit, first take the unit out of the copier.
Symbols Used in this Manual
This manual uses the following symbols.
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
Bridge Unit Control Board
1.1 BRIDGE UNIT CONTROL BOARD
1. Bridge unit ( "Installation Procedure" in the base copier manual)

2. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Bridge unit control board [B] ( x 3,  x 4)
(D386/D634)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
SM 1 D386/D634
Bridge Unit Drive Motor
1.2 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR

2. Rear cover ( "Bridge Unit Control Board")
3. Bracket [A] ( x 3,  x 2)
4. Bridge unit drive motor [B] ( x 4,  x 1)
D386/D634 2 SM
Tray Exit Sensor
1.3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR

2. Rear cover ( "Bridge Unit Control Board")
3. Paper tray [A]
4. Exit guide [B] ( x 1)
5. Tray exit sensor [C] ( x 1)
(D386/D634)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
SM 3 D386/D634
Relay Sensor
1.4 RELAY SENSOR

2. Paper tray [A]
3. Relay sensor [B] ( x 1)
D386/D634 4 SM
Mechanical Component Layout
2. DETAILS
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Upper Exit Roller 5. Relay Sensor

2. Tray Exit Sensor 6. 2nd Transport Roller
3. Junction Gate 7. Left Exit Roller
4. 1st Transport Roller 8. Paper Tray
(D386/D634)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
SM 5 D386/D634
Drive Layout
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Left Exit Roller

2. 2nd Transport Roller
3. 1st Transport Roller
4. Upper Exit Roller
5. Bridge Unit Drive Motor
D386/D634 6 SM
Electrical Component Layout
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Left Guide Switch

2. Right Guide Switch
3. Junction Gate Solenoid
4. Tray Exit Sensor
5. Bridge Unit Control Board
6. Bridge Unit Drive Motor
7. Relay Sensor
(D386/D634)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
SM 7 D386/D634
Electrical Component Description
2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Motors
M1 Drive Motor Drives the bridge unit. 6
Sensors
S1 Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds. 4
S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds. 7
Switches
SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened. 2
SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened. 1
Solenoids
Moves the junction gate to direct the paper

SOL1 Junction Gate to the upper tray (on top of the bridge unit) or 3
to the finisher.
PCBs
Bridge Unit
PCB1 Controls the bridge unit. 5
Control Board
D386/D634 8 SM
Junction Gate Mechanism
2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
The junction gate [A] directs any paper reaching the bridge unit to either the upper tray (on top of
the bridge unit) or to the finisher, depending on which has been selected.
If the junction gate solenoid has been activated, the junction gate [A] points downward and directs
the paper to the upper tray [B] (dotted line path in illustration). When the solenoid is off, the
junction gate points upward and the paper is fed out to the finisher [C] by the transport and left exit
rollers (solid line).
(D386/D634)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
SM 9 D386/D634
PB3110(D537)/PB3130(D580)
PAPER FEED UNIT
None
PAPER FEED UNIT (D537/D580)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1

1.1 EXTERIOR COVER ....................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 REAR COVER ...................................................................................... 1
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...................................................................... 2
1.2.1 LIFT MOTORS...................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 UPPER AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES ............................... 3
1.2.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR ......................................................................... 4
1.2.4 MAIN BOARD ....................................................................................... 4
1.3 FEED ............................................................................................................. 5
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT.............................................................................. 5
1.3.2 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS .................... 6
1.3.3 LIFT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS ....................................... 7
SM i D537/D580
Exterior Cover
1.1 EXTERIOR COVER
1.1.1 REAR COVER
Unit PB3110/
Paper Feed
D537/D580
PB3130
1. Securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each)
2. Rear cover [B] ( x 2)
SM 1 D537/D580
1.2.1 LIFT MOTORS
1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

2. Lift motors [A][B] ( x 2, x 1 each)
D537/D580 2 SM
1.2.2 UPPER AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES
Unit PB3110/
Paper Feed
D537/D580
PB3130
2. Upper paper feed gear unit [A] ( x 3, x 1)
3. Upper paper feed clutch bracket [B] ( x 1, x 2, bushing x 1)
4. Upper paper feed clutch [C]
5. Lower paper feed clutch bracket [D] ( x 1, bushing x 1, x 2)

6. Lower paper feed clutch [E] ( x 1)
SM 3 D537/D580

2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1, x 2)
 When installing the paper feed motor, make sure that the gear of the paper feed
motor holds the timing belt [B].
1.2.4 MAIN BOARD

2. Main board [A] (All s, x 2, snap pin x 2)
D537/D580 4 SM
Feed
1.3 FEED
Unit PB3110/
Paper Feed
D537/D580
PB3130
1. Right cover [A] ( x 2)
2. Vertical transport guide [B] of the paper feed unit
3. Pull the tray 3 (or 4).

4. Paper guide [C]
5. Paper feed unit [D] ( x 2, x 1, x 2)
When replacing the paper feed unit of tray 4, do the same.
SM 5 D537/D580
Feed
1.3.2 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
1. Paper feed unit ( "Paper Feed Unit)

2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1)
3. Pick-up roller [B]
4. Paper feed roller [C]
5. Separation roller [D] ( x 1)
D537/D580 6 SM
Feed
1.3.3 LIFT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS
Unit PB3110/
Paper Feed
D537/D580
PB3130
1. Paper feed unit ( "Paper Feed Unit")
2. Vertical transport sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Vertical transport sensor [B] ( x 1)
4. Paper feed sensor bracket [C] ( x 1)
5. Paper feed sensor [D] ( x 1)
6. Paper end sensor filler [E]
7. Paper end sensor [F] ( x 1)
8. Lift sensor [G] ( x 1)
SM 7 D537/D580
PB3110(D538)/PB3140(D581)
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
None
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (D538/D581)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1

1.1 EXTERIOR COVER ....................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 LEFT AND RIGHT TRAY ...................................................................... 1
1.1.2 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE ............................................................... 2
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...................................................................... 3
1.2.1 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS ON PAPER STORAGE SIDE ................. 3
1.2.2 END FENCE HP SENSOR/PAPER END SENSOR 2 .......................... 3
1.2.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ............................................................................. 4
1.2.4 TRAY MOTOR ...................................................................................... 5
1.2.5 MAIN BOARD ....................................................................................... 5
1.2.6 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH ........................................................... 6
1.3 FEED ............................................................................................................. 7
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT.............................................................................. 7
1.3.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ................................. 8
1.3.3 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS ............... 9
SM i D538/D581
Exterior Cover
1.1 EXTERIOR COVER
1.1.1 LEFT AND RIGHT TRAY
Capacity Tray
D538/D581
PB3110/
PB3140
Large
1. Pull the LCT drawer.
 If the right tray comes up with the left tray, push the right tray into the LCT.
2. Left tray [A] ( x 2)
3. Remove the right tray [B] pressing down the stopper [C].
 When reinstalling the tray, set the tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray
in, making sure to keep the tray level.
SM 1 D538/D581
Exterior Cover
1.1.2 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE
1. Remove the fence screws ( x 5).

2. Change the position of the fences.
 Before fastening the screws, set paper in the tray.
D538/D581 2 SM
1.2.1 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS ON PAPER STORAGE SIDE
Capacity Tray
D538/D581
PB3110/
PB3140
Large
1. Tray ( "Left and Right Tray")
2. Rear fence [A] ( x 1)
3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x 2)
4. Paper height sensors [C] ( x 1 each)
1.2.2 END FENCE HP SENSOR/PAPER END SENSOR 2
1. Bottom cover [D] ( x 1)

2. End fence HP sensor [E] ( x 1)
3. Paper end sensor 2 (paper storage side) [F] ( x 1)
SM 3 D538/D581
1. Securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each)

2. Rear cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Tray lift motor [C] ( x 1, x 3)
D538/D581 4 SM
1.2.4 TRAY MOTOR
Capacity Tray
D538/D581
PB3110/
PB3140
Large
1. Rear cover ( "Tray Lift Motor")
2. Tray motor [A] ( x 1, x 2)
 When installing the tray motor, make sure that the gear of the tray motor holds the
timing belt [B].
1.2.5 MAIN BOARD
1. Rear cover ( "Tray Lift Motor" )

2. Main board [A] (All s, x 2, snap x 2)
SM 5 D538/D581
1.2.6 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
1. Rear cover ( "Tray Lift Motor")

2. Stack transport clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)
D538/D581 6 SM
Feed
1.3 FEED
Capacity Tray
D538/D581
PB3110/
PB3140
Large
1. Right cover [A]
2. Open the vertical guide plate [B]
3. Guide plate [C]
4. Pull the LCT drawer [D].

5. Paper feed unit [E] ( x2 x 1)
SM 7 D538/D581
Feed
1.3.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

2. Separation roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Roller holder [B] ( x 1)
4. Feed roller [C] and pick-up roller [D]
D538/D581 8 SM
Feed
1.3.3 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS
Capacity Tray
D538/D581
PB3110/
PB3140
Large
2. Vertical transport sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
3. Relay sensor [B]
4. Paper feed sensor bracket [C]
5. Paper feed sensor [D]
6. Paper end feeler [E]
7. Paper end sensor holder [F] (hook x 3)
8. Paper end sensor [G] ( x 1, hook x 3)
9. Lift sensor ( x 1, hook x 3)
SM 9 D538/D581
D631
RT3020 - 1200-SHEET LCT
None
RT3020 - 1200-SHEET LCT (D631)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 COVERS ........................................................................................................1
1.1.1 REAR COVER ......................................................................................1
1.1.2 RIGHT DOOR .......................................................................................1
1.1.3 FRONT AND TOP COVERS ................................................................2
1.2 PAPER FEED ................................................................................................3
1.2.1 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ....................3
1.3 DRIVE ............................................................................................................4
1.3.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH........................................................................4
1.3.2 PAPER FEED MOTOR .........................................................................4
1.3.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR..............................................................................5
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......................................................................6
1.4.1 MAIN BOARD .......................................................................................6
1.4.2 LCT SET SWITCHES ...........................................................................6
Rear .........................................................................................................6
Front .........................................................................................................7
1.4.3 DOWN SWITCH ...................................................................................7
1.4.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, TRAY LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS .....8
1.4.5 STACK SENSOR ..................................................................................9
1.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE .............................................................10
2. DETAILS ...................................................................................... 11
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................................................11
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .....................................................................11
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................12
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ..................................13
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................15
2.2 PAPER FEED ..............................................................................................16
2.2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM ..............................................................16
2.2.2 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM ...................................................................17
Tray lifting conditions..............................................................................17
Tray lowering conditions (Paper supply position) ...................................17
Tray lowering conditions (Full-down position) ........................................17
SM i D631
2.2.3 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION ..........................................18
Paper Height ..........................................................................................18
Paper End ..............................................................................................18
D631 ii SM
Read This First
Safety and Symbols

: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
: Clamp
Covers
1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 REAR COVER
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
1. Cover [A] ( x 1)
2. Rear cover [B] ( x 3)
1.1.2 RIGHT DOOR
1. Right lower cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Right door [B] ( x 1)
SM 1 D631
Covers
1.1.3 FRONT AND TOP COVERS

1. Right door ( p.1 "Rear Cover")
2. Switch cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Front cover [B] ( x 4)
4. Top cover [C] ( x 2)
D631 2 SM
Paper Feed
1.2 PAPER FEED
1.2.1 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2)
3. Rollers [B], [C], [D] ( x 1 each)
[B]: Paper feed roller
[C]: Pick-up roller
[D]: Separation roller
SM 3 D631
Drive
1.3 DRIVE
1.3.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

1. Rear cover ( p.1 "Rear Cover")
2. Bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 2, bushing x 1)

3. Paper feed clutch [B] ( x 1,  x 1)

1. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 2)
D631 4 SM
Drive

1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
2. Tray lift motor unit [A] ( x 4,  x 1)
SM 5 D631
1.4.1 MAIN BOARD

2. Main board ( x 2, all 's)
1.4.2 LCT SET SWITCHES
Rear
2. Switch bracket [A] ( x 3)

3. Rear LCT set switch [B]
D631 6 SM
Front
1. Front cover ( p.2 "Front and Top Covers")
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
2. Front LCT set switch [A] ( x 1)
1.4.3 DOWN SWITCH

2. Switch base [A] ( x 2,  x 1)

3. Down button [B] (spring x 1)
4. Down switch [C] (hook)
SM 7 D631
1.4.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, TRAY LIFT AND RELAY

SENSORS
2. Top Cover ( Front and Top Covers)
3. Rear ground plate [A] ( x 1)

4. Front ground plate [B] ( x 1)
5. Paper feed unit [C] ( x 2,  x 1,  x 1)
6. Paper feed unit cover [D] ( x 5,  x 1)
 Before you re-install the paper feed unit cover, make sure that the pick-up solenoid
holds the pick-up roller lever ([a]: correct, [b]: incorrect) and the pick-up roller works
properly.
D631 8 SM
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
7. Sensors [E], [F], [G], [H] ( x 1, hooks each)
[E]: Tray lift sensor
[F]: Relay sensor
[G]: Paper feed sensor
[H]: Paper end sensor
1.4.5 STACK SENSOR

1. Open the right door
2. Paper feed unit ( p.8 "Paper Feed, Paper End, Tray Lift and Relay Sensors")
3. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2)

4. Stack sensor [B] ( x 1)
SM 9 D631
Side Fence Position Change
1.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE
1. Open the right door of the LCT.

2. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position.
3. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] ( x 1 each).

4. Install the side fences in the correct position (A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF).
5. Pull the end fence [C] for B5 size paper as shown ( x 1) if the the side fences are adjusted
for B5 size paper.
6. Close the right door.
7. Turn on the main power switch, and then go into the SP mode.
8. Input the correct paper size for the1200-sheet LCT with SP5181-017.
D631 10 SM
Component Layout
2. DETAILS
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
1. Rear LCT Set Switch
12. Sub Paper Height Sensor
2. Pick-up Roller Solenoid
13. Tray Down Switch
3. Tray Lift Sensor
14. Paper Height Sensor 3
4. Paper Feed Roller
15. Paper Tray
5. Paper Feed Sensor
16. Lower Limit Sensor
6. Paper End Sensor
17. Stack Sensor
7. Pick-up Roller
18. Separation Roller
8. Tray Lift Motor
19. Front LCT Set Switch
20. Relay Sensor 5
10. Interlock Switches
21. Relay Roller
SM 11 D631
Component Layout
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Front LCT Set Switch

11. Pick-up Roller Solenoid
2. Rear LCT Set Switch
12. Paper Feed Sensor
3. Paper Feed Clutch
13. Paper End Sensor
4. Paper Feed Motor
5. Tray Lift Motor
6. Interlock Switches
16. Sub Paper Height Sensor
7. Main Board
8. Tray Down Switch
18. Lower Limit Sensor
9. Relay Sensor
19. Stack Sensor
10. Tray Lift Sensor
D631 12 SM
Component Layout
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Motors
M1 Paper Feed Drives all rollers. 4
M2 Tray Lift Drives the paper tray up or down. 5
Sensors
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
Detects whether the paper is jammed at
(D631)
LCT
S1 Paper Feed 12
the LCT.
Detects the copy paper coming to the

S2 Relay 9
relay roller and checks for misfeeds.
Informs the mainframe when the paper in

S3 Paper End the tray has been used up and indicates 13
paper end.
Detects when the paper is at the correct

S4 Tray Lift 10
paper feed height.
S5 Paper Height 1 14
Detects the amount of paper remaining in
Sub Paper the tray.
S7 16
Height
Detects when the tray is completely

S9 Lower Limit 18
lowered, to stop the tray lift motor.
SM 13 D631
Component Layout
Detects a) when the tray has moved

down to the paper supply position after
paper end, to stop the tray lift motor or b)
S10 Stack when the top of the paper stack has 19
moved down to the paper supply position,
to stop the tray lift motor after the down
switch has been pressed.
Switches
Detects whether the right door is open

SW1 Right Door 6
and starts to drive the tray lift motor.
SW2 Front LCT Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set. 1
SW3 Rear LCT Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set. 2
Lowers the tray to the paper supply

SW4 Down 8
position if pressed.
Magnetic Clutches
MC1 Paper Feed Drives the paper feed unit. 3
Solenoids
SOL1 Pick-up Pushes the pick-up roller up or down. 11
PCBs
Controls the LCT and communicates with

PCB1 Main 7
the copier/printer.
D631 14 SM
Component Layout
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
1. Tray Lift Motor
5. Relay Roller
2. Paper Feed Motor
6. Separation Roller
3. Pick-up Roller
7. Tray Drive Belt
4. Paper Feed Clutch
SM 15 D631
Paper Feed
2.2 PAPER FEED
2.2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM
This machine uses the FRR paper feed system (paper feed roller [E], separation roller [H], pick-up
roller [G]).
When the right door is closed, the tray lift motor raises the tray to the position where the top of the
paper stack in the tray interrupts the tray lift sensor [D]. The paper feed motor switches on, then
the pick-up solenoid [C] switches off and the pick-up roller drops onto the top of the stack of paper.
The paper feed clutch transfers drive to the paper feed roller [E], pick-up roller [G] and separation
roller [H].
The rotating pick-up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top of the stack.
The separation roller [H], in contact with the feed roller, only allows one sheet out of the tray.
As soon as the paper feed sensor [F] detects the leading edge of the paper, it switches off the
pick-up solenoid which raises the pick-up roller. The feed roller feeds the sheet to the registration
roller in the main machine through the relay roller [B].
This process is repeated for each sheet.
The paper feed sensor [F] detects "JAM7" and the relay sensor [A] detects "JAM58".
D631 16 SM
Paper Feed
2.2.2 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
The lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the tray through the timing belts [B].
Tray lifting conditions

When the tray lift sensor [C] turns off in the following conditions, the tray lift motor raises the tray
bottom plate until the tray lift sensor [C] turns on again.
 Just after the main switch is turned on
 During copying
 Just after the tray cover is closed
 Just after leaving the energy saving mode
Tray lowering conditions (Paper supply position)

In the following conditions, the tray lift motor lowers the tray until the stack sensor [D] turns on
(this is the correct tray position for supplying paper).
 Just after the paper end sensor turns on
 Just after the down switch is pressed by the user
Tray lowering conditions (Full-down position)

In the following condition, the tray lift motor lowers the tray until the lower limit sensor [E] turns on
(this is the correct tray position for adding 500 sheets of paper after installing the first stack of
paper in the LCT tray).
 Just after the down switch [F] is pressed for 3 seconds or more when the tray is at the paper
supply position.
SM 17 D631
Paper Feed
2.2.3 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION
Paper Height
The amount of the paper in the tray is detected by combination of high (1)/low (0) outputs from
three sensors (paper height sensor 1 [A], 2 [B], 3 [D] and sub paper height sensor [C]).
Indicator on the
Amount of paper PH S-1 PH S-2 PH S-3 Sub PH S
operation panel
100% 0 0 0 0 Four lines
0 0 1 -
70% Three lines
0 0 0 1
30% 0 1 - - Two lines
10% 1 - - - One line
End - - - - No line
0: No interruption (low), 1: Interruption (high), -: No checking

PH S: Paper Height Sensor
Paper End
The paper end sensor [E] monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the
stack.
When the last sheet feeds, the cutout [F] is exposed, and the paper end sensor receives no
reflected light from below because there is no paper. As a result, this signals paper end.
D631 18 SM
SM
19
D631
Paper Feed
RT3020 -
1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
BOOKLET FINISHER SR3020 (B803)/
SR3110 (D637)/SR4020 (D373)
FINISHER SR3030 (B805)/
SR3120 (D636)/SR4010 (D374)
None
BOOKLET FINISHER SR3020 (B803)/
SR3110 (D637)/SR4020 (D373)
FINISHER SR3030 (B805)/
SR3120 (D636)/SR4010 (D374)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 COVERS ........................................................................................................1
1.1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS ...........................................................................1
1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE ................................................................2
1.2 MAIN UNIT.....................................................................................................3
1.2.1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH ..................................3
1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER .......................................................................4
1.2.3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR .............................................................5
1.2.4 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 ...............................................5
1.2.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR ...........................6
1.2.6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR .............................................................7
1.2.7 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR ........................................................7
1.2.8 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR ......................................................8
1.3 STAPLER UNIT .............................................................................................9
1.3.1 CORNER STAPLER .............................................................................9
1.3.2 POSITIONING ROLLER .....................................................................10
1.4 FOLD UNIT ..................................................................................................11
1.4.1 FOLD UNIT .........................................................................................11
1.4.2 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR ....................................................13
1.4.3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR ................................................................14
1.4.4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR ..............................................................15
1.4.5 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY) 16
1.4.6 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY) ............19
1.5 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT .........................................................................21
1.5.1 BOOKLET STAPLER..........................................................................21
1.5.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR ...........................................................22
To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor ..................................................23
SM i B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 24
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................................................24
2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ...........................................................................24
Paper direction .......................................................................................24
Proof tray................................................................................................25
Upper tray ..............................................................................................25
Pre-stack tray .........................................................................................25
Lower tray ..............................................................................................25
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...........................................................26
Upper Area B804/B805 ..........................................................................26
Lower Area B804/B805 ..........................................................................27
Punch Unit B702 ....................................................................................28
Stacker/Stapler - B804/B805 ..................................................................29
B804 Fold unit ........................................................................................30
2.1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ..................................31
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................41
2.2 JUNCTION GATES ......................................................................................42
2.2.1 PROOF MODE ...................................................................................42
2.2.2 SHIFT MODE ......................................................................................42
2.2.3 STAPLE MODE ..................................................................................43
2.3 PRE-STACKING ..........................................................................................44
2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM ...............................................................46
2.4.1 UPPER TRAY .....................................................................................46
2.4.2 LOWER TRAY (B804 ONLY) ..............................................................48
2.5 CORNER STAPLING ...................................................................................51
2.5.1 STACKING AND JOGGING ...............................................................51
2.5.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT ......................................................................52
2.5.3 CORNER STAPLING..........................................................................53
2.6 BOOKLET STAPLING (B804 ONLY) ...........................................................54
2.6.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM ...............................................54
2.6.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING ...............................................55
Overview ................................................................................................55
2.6.3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS......................61
2.7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT ..............................................................................64
2.7.1 FEED OUT..........................................................................................64
2.7.2 FEED OUT STACKING ......................................................................65
2.8 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B804/B805) ........................................................66
2.8.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION ............................................................66
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 ii SM
Skew Correction before Punching ..........................................................66
Punch Unit Position Correction ..............................................................67
2.8.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS ......................................................................69
Paper Position Detection ........................................................................69
Punch Unit Movement ............................................................................70
Punch Selection and Firing ....................................................................71
2.8.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM ........................................................72
2.9 FINISHER JAM DETECTION ......................................................................73
SM iii B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Read This First
Safety and Symbols

: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
Covers
1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1. Open the front door [D].
2. Small upper cover [A] ( x1)
3. Upper cover [B] ( x2)
4. Front door bracket [C] ( x1)
5. Front door [D]
6. Front left side cover [E] ( x2)
7. Cover [F]
8. Paper exit cover [G] ( x2)
9. Rear cover [H] ( x2)
SM 1 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Covers
1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE

1. Remove the rear cover. ( "Exterior Covers")
1. Support the tray [A] with your right hand.

2. Pull gear [B] toward you  to release.
3. Slowly lower the tray  until it stops.
4. Front side cover [C] ( x1)

5. Rear side cover [D] ( x1)
6. Upper tray [E] ( x1)
7. Tray bracket [F] ( x4,  x1 shoulder screw )
8. End Fence [G]( x3)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 2 SM
Main Unit
1.2 MAIN UNIT
1.2.1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1. Front door, front left side cover, rear cover, upper cover ( "Exterior Cover")
2. End fence ( "Upper Tray, End Fence")
3. Upper tray exit mechanism [A] ( x4,  x3)
4. Upper tray limit sensor [B] ( x1,  x1)
5. Upper tray limit switch [C] ( x2)
SM 3 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Main Unit
1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

2. Pull out the stapling unit [B].
3. Positioning roller [C] ( x1, timing belt x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 4 SM
Main Unit
1.2.3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR
1. Small upper cover ( "Exterior Cover")

2. Proof tray exit sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
Booklet Finisher
3. Proof tray exit sensor [B] ( x1)
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1.2.4 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2
1. Small upper cover, upper cover ( "Exterior Cover")

2. Upper tray paper height sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
3. Upper tray paper height sensor [B] – staple mode (S08) ( x1)
4. Upper tray paper height sensor [C] – non-staple mode (S09) ( x1)
SM 5 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Main Unit
1.2.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR
1. Rear cover, Upper covers, Front door, Cover, Paper exit cover ( "Exterior Cover")
2. Inner cover [A] ( x2)
3. Exit guide plate [B] ( x1, Link and spring,  x1,  x1)
4. Upper tray exit sensor [C] (S6) ( x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 6 SM
Main Unit
1.2.6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR
1. Exit guide plate. ( "Exit Guide Plate, Upper Tray Exit Sensor")
2. Guide plate [A] (hook x 2)
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
3. Sensor bracket [B] ( x1)
4. Proof tray full sensor [C] (S11) ( x1)
1.2.7 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR
1. Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
3. Finisher entrance sensor [B] (S1) ( x1)
SM 7 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Main Unit
1.2.8 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR
1. Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.

2. Sensor bracket [A]
3. Pre-stack tray exit sensor [B] (S2)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 8 SM
Stapler Unit
1.3 STAPLER UNIT
1.3.1 CORNER STAPLER
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
2. Pull out the stapler unit.
3. Inner cover [A] ( x3)
4. Stapler unit holder [B] ( x1)
5. Corner stapler [C] (M20) ( x1)
SM 9 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Stapler Unit
1.3.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

2. Pull out the stapling unit [B].
3. Positioning roller [C] ( x1, timing belt x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 10 SM
Fold Unit
1.4 FOLD UNIT
1.4.1 FOLD UNIT
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1. Remove the back cover ( "Exterior Covers").
 The stapler unit is heavy.

3. Ground cable [A] ( x1)
4. Harness [B] ( x6,  x6)
5. Stapler unit [C] ( x4)
SM 11 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
 Support the fold unit with your hand to prevent it from falling.
 The fold unit is heavy.

6. Folding unit [D] ( x4,  x2,  x6)
If you have replaced the folding unit:
1. Read the DIP SW settings on the decal [A] attached to the back of the new folding unit.
2. Check the DIP SW settings on the main board [B] of the finisher.
3. If these settings are different, change these settings to match the settings printed on the decal
attached to the folding unit.
 Set DIP switches 1 to 4 (the switch set on the right). Do not touch the other DIP
switches.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 12 SM
Fold Unit
1.4.2 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR
1. Pull out the stapler unit ( "Positioning Roller").

2. Fold unit entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x2)
3. Fold unit entrance sensor [B] (S26) ( x1,  x1)
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
SM 13 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
1.4.3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR

3. Fold unit vertical guide plate [A]
4. Fold unit inner cover [B] ( x2, Spring pin x1)
5. Fold unit upper cover [C] ( x1)

6. Paper clamp mechanism [D] ( x4)
7. Fold unit exit sensor bracket [E] ( x1)
8. Fold unit exit sensor [F] (S31) ( x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 14 SM
Fold Unit
1.4.4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR
 If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same time,
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
do those adjustments first, then replace the sensor. ( "Folding Horizontal Skew
Adjustment" or "Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment")
1. Remove the stapler unit ( "Fold Unit")
2. Guide plate [A].
3. Stay [B] ( x4)
4. Left plate [C] ( x4)
5. Sensor bracket [D] ( x1)
6. Stack present sensor [E] (S32) ( x1)
SM 15 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
1.4.5 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804

ONLY)
 The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the
factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
1. Switch the copier on and enter the SP mode.
2. Europe, Asia: Use SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper). North America: Use SP6-134-005 (this
is for DLT paper).
 If the original setting of SP6-134-001 or -005 is not "0", then you must do the vertical
skew adjustment ( "Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment") after you finish this horizontal
skew procedure.
3. Use the 10-key pad to input "-2" (mm) for the SP value. (Press  to enter the minus sign.)
4. Press [#] then exit the SP mode.
5. Open the front door and pull the stapler unit [A] out of the finisher.
6. Open the guide plate [B].
7. Loosen the adjustment screw [C] and then tighten until it stops. (Do not over tighten.)
8. Remove the lock screw [D].
9. Raise the tip [E] of the adjustment screw very slightly and allow it to descend under its own
weight.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 16 SM
Fold Unit
10. Push the stapler unit into the finisher and close the front door.
11. Do a folding test.
 Switch the copier on.
 Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
Booklet Finisher
 On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
 Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
12. Remove the sheet from the lower tray.
13. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face-up (the same way that it
came out of the finisher).
14. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is + [F] or - [G].
15. Open the front door of the finisher and pull the stapler unit [H] out.
16. Open the guide plate [I].
17. Turn the adjustment screw [J] to correct the amount of skew you measured from the test
sheet.
 For + skew [F], turn the adjustment screw (clockwise).
SM 17 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
 For – skew [G], turn the adjustment screw to the left (counter-clockwise).
 Every click in the +/– direction adjusts the fold position by 0.1 mm by moving the bottom
fence [K].
18. Raise the tip of the adjustment screw [J] and allow it to lower under its own weight.
19. Attach and tighten the lock screw [L].
20. Push the stapler unit into the machine, close the front door, then turn the copier on.
21. Europe, Asia: Do SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper). North America: Do SP6-134-005 (this is
for DLT paper).
22. Reset it to "0".
23. Do the test again.
24. If the result is satisfactory, this completes the adjustment. -or- If some skew remains, repeat
this adjustment.
 After doing this adjustment, adjust for vertical skew, if necessary. ( "Fold Vertical
Skew Adjustment")
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 18 SM
Fold Unit
1.4.6 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY)
 The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the
factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
1. Switch the copier on.
2. Do a folding test.
 Switch the copier on.
 Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
 On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
 Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
3. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down, and face-up (the same way that it
came out of the finisher).
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
4. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is positive [A] or negative [B].
5. Measure the amount of skew.
6. Enter the SP mode
 Europe, Asia: Use SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper).
 North America: Use SP6-134-005 (this is for DLT paper).
7. Enter one-half the measured amount of skew. Example: If the measure amount of skew is
-1.2 mm, enter -0.6 mm
SM 19 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
 The range for measurement is –3.0 mm to +3.0 mm in 0.2 mm steps for every notch
adjustment.
8. Exit the SP mode and do the test again (steps 2 to 5).
9. Repeat this procedure until the skew is corrected.
The illustration below shows the effects of +/- adjustment with SP6113. (The vertical arrows
show the direction of paper feed.)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 20 SM
Booklet Stapler Unit
1.5 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT
1.5.1 BOOKLET STAPLER
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
3. Harness cover [A] ( x2)
4. Booklet stapler support stay [B] ( x4,  x2,  x4)
5. Stapler [C] ( x4)
SM 21 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
1.5.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR

2. Remove the stapler unit. ( "Fold Unit")
3. Stay [A] ( x4).

4. Left plate [B] ( x4)
5. Harness cover [C] ( x2)

6. Booklet stapler support stay [D] ( x4,  x2,  x4)
7. Booklet stapler [E] ( x4)
8. Booklet stapler motor [F] ( x2,  x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 22 SM
To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor

1. Reattach the booklet stapler motor.
 Do not tighten the screws.
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
2. Attach the special tool [A] and reattach the booklet stapler stay.
 This tool is included with the stapler spare part.

3. Turn the gear [B] with your finger until it stops.
4. Tighten the screws to attach to the booklet stapler motor.
5. Remove the stay again and remove the special tool.
6. Reattach the booklet stapler stay.
7. Push the stapler unit into the machine.
SM 23 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1. Proof Tray Junction Gate 7. Lower Tray (Booklet)*1

2. Punch Unit 8. Folder Rollers*1
3. Stapler Junction Gate 9. Folder Plate*1
4. Pre-Stack Junction Gate 10. Booklet Stapler*1
5. Pre-Stack Tray 11. Upper Tray (Shift)
6. Corner Stapler (M20) 12. Proof Tray
*1: B804 Only
Paper direction
The operation of the proof tray and stapler junction gates direct the flow of the paper once it enters
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 24 SM
Component Layout
the finisher:
Proof Junction Gate Stapler Junction Gate Paper Feeds
Closed Closed Paper feeds straight through
Open Closed Paper feeds to the proof tray
Closed Open Paper feds to the staple tray
Proof tray
Copies are sent to the proof tray (12) when neither sorting nor stapling are selected for the job.
Upper tray
The upper tray (11) receives copies that are sorted and shifted and also receives copies that have
Booklet Finisher
been corner stapled. Corner stapling is provided on both the B804 and the B805.
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Pre-stack tray
The pre-stack tray has a switchback mechanism to increase the productivity of stapling. (
"Pre-Stacking) Pre-stacking is done for corner stapling in the B804/B805 and for booklet stapling
in the B804.
Lower tray
The lower tray (7) receives copies that have been center folded and stapled (booklet stapling).
Booklet stapling is not provided on the B805.
SM 25 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Upper Area B804/B805
1. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4)

10. Upper Tray Limit Switch (SW2)
2. Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
11. Stacking Roller HP Sensor (S13)
(SOL2)
12. Stacking Sponge Roller Motor (M10)
3. Upper Transport Motor (M2)
13. Upper Tray Exit Sensor (S6)
4. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S7)
14. Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S8)
5. Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S10)
(Staple Mode)
6. Proof Tray Full Sensor (S11)
15. Shift Roller HP Sensor (S5)
7. Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1)
16. Shift Roller Motor (M18)
8. Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S9)
17. Exit Guide Plate Motor (M19)
(Non-Staple Mode)
18. Proof Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1)
9. Upper Tray Limit Sensor (S12)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 26 SM
Component Layout
Lower Area B804/B805
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
8. Positioning Roller Motor (M14)
1. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)
9. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Front (S34)*1
2. Lower Transport Motor (M3)
10. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Rear (S33)*1
3. Entrance Motor (M1)
11. Main Board (PCB1)
4. Front Door Safety Switch (SW1)
12. Upper Tray Full Sensor – (S20) *2
5. Pre-Stack Tray Exit Sensor (S2)
13. Upper Tray Full Sensor – (S19)
6. Stapling Edge Pressure Plate
14. Booklet Stapler Board (PCB2)*1
Solenoid (SOL4)
15. Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid – (SOL5)
7. Positioning Roller Solenoid (SOL3)
*1
*1: B804 Only, *2: B805 Only
SM 27 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Punch Unit B702
1. Punch Encoder Sensor (S24) 6. Paper Position Slide HP Sensor (S22)

2. Punch Drive Motor (M24) 7. Paper Position Sensor (S3)
3. Punch HP Sensor (S24) 8. Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4)
4. Punch Unit Board (PCB3) 9. Punch Movement Motor (M9)
5. Paper position sensor slide motor (M7) 10. Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 28 SM
Component Layout
Stacker/Stapler - B804/B805
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
7. Jogger Fence Motor (M15)
1
1. Stack Present Sensor (S32)* 8. Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)
1
2. Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor (S27)* 9. Corner Stapler Movement Motor (M6)
3. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16) 10. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
4. Feed Out Belt Motor (M5) 11. Corner Stapler EH530 (M20)
1
5. Booklet Stapler EH185R – Rear (M23)* 12. Corner Stapler Rotation Motor (M13)
6. Booklet Stapler EH185R – Front 13. Corner Stapler HP Sensor (S17)
1
(M22)* 14. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor (S18)
15. Stack Junction Gate Motor (M17) *1
*1: B804 Only
SM 29 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
B804 Fold unit
1. Clamp Roller HP Sensor (S25) 6. Fold Cam HP Sensor (S30)

2. Fold Roller Motor (M12) 7. Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28)
3. Fold Plate Motor (M11) 8. Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26)
4. Fold Plate HP Sensor (S29) 9. Clamp Roller Retraction Motor (M8)
5. Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor (M16) 10. Fold Unit Exit Sensor (S31)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 30 SM
Component Layout
2.1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Here is a general summary of all the electrical components of the B804/B805 finishers.
 In the table below a number that appears in bold text (M8, etc.) denotes a component that
is on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B804 only.
No. Component Function
Boards (PCB)
PCB1 Main Board The main board that controls the finisher
PCB2 Booklet Stapler Board A separate board that controls booklet finishing.
PCB3 Punch Unit Board The board that controls the punch unit.
Booklet Finisher
Motors
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Finisher Entrance Drives 1) the finisher entrance rollers, 2) and the punch
M1
Motor waste transport belt of the punch unit.
Drives the paper feed rollers that feed paper 1) to the

M2 Upper Transport Motor proof tray, 2) straight-through to the upper tray, 3) the
pre-stack tray entrance roller.
Drives paper feed rollers forward and reverse in the

M3 Lower Transport Motor pre-stack tray for the switchback, and drives the other
rollers in the lower transport area.
Drives 1) proof tray exit rollers, 2) extension and

Upper/Proof Tray Exit
M4 retraction of the stacking sponge roller, 3) upper tray
Motor
exit rollers.
Drives the feed out belt that moves the stapled stacks
M5 Feed Out Belt Motor
out of the stapling tray after stapling.
Moves the corner stapler horizontally on a steel rod to

Corner Stapler position the stapler at the stapling position at 1) the
M6
Movement Motor front, 2) the rear (straight stapling), 3) the rear (diagonal
stapling), or 4) the front and rear for double stapling.
SM 31 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Drives the movement of the paper position slide that

Paper Position Sensor
M7 holds the paper position sensor (S3) that detects the
Slide Motor
position of the paper.
Drives a large cam that alternately clamps and

unclamps the clamp retraction roller, the idle roller of the
clamp roller pair. When these rollers are clamped, they
are part of the paper feed path and feed the stack
Clamp Roller toward the bottom fence of the fold unit. When the idle
M8
Retraction Motor roller is retracted, the stacks falls a very short distance
(3 mm) onto the fold unit bottom fence below. These
rollers remain unclamped while the bottom fence
positions the stack for folding and while the stack is
folded by the fold rollers.
Punch Movement Drives the front/back movement of the punch unit to

M9
Motor position it correctly for stapling the paper below.
Rotates the stacking roller that drags each sheet back

Stacking Sponge
M10 against the end fence to jog the bottom of each sheet
Roller Motor
after feed out to the upper tray.
Drives the fold plate that pushes the center of the stack
M11 Fold Plate Motor
into the nip of the fold rollers to start the fold.
Rotates forward and drives the fold rollers that fold the
stack and feed it out of the fold unit, reverses to feed the
M12 Fold Roller Motor
fold once more into the fold unit, and then rotates
forward again to feed the fold out of the fold unit.
Swivels the corner stapler and positions it so the staple

Corner Stapler
M13 fires at an oblique angle at the rear corner of the paper
Rotation Motor
stack.
Positioning Roller
M14 Drives the positioning roller in the stapling tray.
Motor
Drives the jogger fences in the stapling tray to jog both

M15 Jogger Fence Motor
sides of the stack before stapling.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 32 SM
Component Layout
Raises the bottom fence and stops when the center of

the vertical stack is opposite the edge of the horizontal
fold blade. The distance for raising the blade is
Fold Unit Bottom
M16 prescribed as one-half the size of the paper selected for
Fence Lift Motor
the job. For large paper, (A3, B4) the bottom fence first
lowers the stack 10 mm below the fold position, and
then raises it to the fold position.
Drives the large cam that operates the stack junction

gate at the top of the stapling tray. When this gate is
Stack Junction Gate open, it directs the ascending stack to the upper tray if it
M17
Motor has been corner stapled, or if it is closed the gate turns
the booklet stapled stack down so it falls onto the
bottom fence of the folding unit.
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Drives the shift roller that operates in shift mode to
M18 Shift Roller Motor stagger document sets as they feed out to the upper
tray (making them easier to separate).
Drives the mechanism that raises and lowers the exit

M19 Exit Guide Plate Motor
guide plate.
This is the roving corner stapler, mounted on a steel rail

that staples 1) at the front, 2) at the rear (straight
M20 Corner Stapler EH530
staple), 3) at the rear (diagonal staple), and 4) font and
rear (two staples).
Raises and lowers the upper tray during feed out to

M21 Upper Tray Lift Motor
keep the tray at the optimum height until it is full.
Booklet Stapler Booklet stapler. Staples paper stacks in the center

M22
EH185R: Front before they are folded.
Booklet Stapler Booklet stapler. Staples paper stacks in the center

M23
EH185R: Rear before they are folded.
M24 Punch Drive Motor Fires the punches that punch the holes in the paper.
SM 33 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Sensors
Provides two functions: (1) Detects paper entering the

Finisher Entrance finisher from the copier, and (2) Signals a jam if it
S1
Sensor detects paper at the entrance when the copier is
switched on.
Detects 1) paper fed from the pre-stack tray to the

stapling tray, and detects 2) paper in the pre-stack when
Pre-stack Tray Exit the copier is switched on. (This sensor performs no
S2
Sensor timing function. The entire flow of paper through the
pre-stacking mechanism is controlled by motor pulse
counts.)
The photosensor that detects the edge of the paper and

sends this information to the punch unit board where it
S3 Paper Position Sensor
is used to position the punch for punching the holes in
the paper.
1) A photosensor that detects and signals that the punch

hopper is filled with punch waste and needs emptying,
Punch Hopper Full
S4 and 2) confirms the presence of the punch hopper and
Sensor
signals an error if it is missing or not installed
completely.
Located near the shift roller motor, controls the

S5 Shift Roller HP Sensor front-to-back movement of the shift roller as shifts paper
during straight-through feed.
A flat, photo sensor located inside the guide plate,

detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the paper
as it feeds out to the upper tray during straight-through
jobs (with and without stapling). When paper is fed to
Upper Tray Exit
S6 the upper tray, at the paper output slot this sensor
Sensor
signals an error when it detects (1) paper has failed to
leave the paper exit (lag error), (2) detects paper has
failed to arrive at the paper exit (late error), (3) detects
paper is in the exit slot when the machine is turned on.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 34 SM
Component Layout
Controls the vertical movement of the control exit

Exit Guide Plate HP guide . The guide plate is in the home position when the
S7
Sensor guide plate is down and the actuator interrupts the
sensor gap.
This is the upper sensor of the upper/lower paper height

Upper Tray Paper
sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. This
S8 Height Sensor (Staple
sensor detects the paper height of the stack in the upper
Mode)
tray when the copier is operating in the staple mode.
This is the lower sensor of the upper/lower paper height

Upper Tray Paper sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. When
S9 Height Sensor the machine is switched on, the upper tray rises until the
(Non-Staple Mode) actuator on the tray triggers this sensor to switch off the
Booklet Finisher
upper tray lift motor.
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
This sensor detects and times the feeding of paper to
S10 Proof Tray Exit Sensor the proof tray. It also detects whether paper is present at
the proof tray exit when the copier is switched on.
The top of the stack in the proof tray increases until it

nudges the feeler of this sensor. The sensor then
S11 Proof Tray Full Sensor
signals that the proof tray is full and the job halts until
some paper is removed from the proof tray.
This sensor controls the position of the upper tray 1)

during straight-through feed out, 2) during shift feed out,
3) when the machine is turned on. The machine obeys
the signal of whichever sensor is actuated first.
An actuator attached to an arm triggers this sensor. The
Upper Tray Limit tip of the same arm depresses the upper tray limit
S12
Sensor switch If the sensor fails, the tip of the arm will activate
the upper tray limit microswitch (SW2) and stop the lift
of the upper tray.
Note: When the machine is turned on, the upper tray
position is controlled by either this sensor or the upper
tray paper height sensor (S9).
SM 35 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Controls the forward and back motion of the stacking

roller (a sponge roller) located at the output slot of the
Stacking Roller HP
S13 upper tray. The sponge roller drags each ejected sheet
Sensor
back against the end fence of the upper tray to keep the
bottom of the stack aligned.
A photo sensor that detects whether paper is in the

Stapling Tray Paper stapling tray. When this sensor detects paper, the
S14
Sensor bottom fence motor raises or lowers the bottom fence to
position the selected paper size for booklet stapling.
Detects the home position of the jogger fences. When

Jogger Fence HP the actuator on the jogger fence interrupts this sensor,
S15
Sensor the jogger fence is in its home position and the jogger
fence motor (M15) stops.
Controls the position of the stack feed-out pawl on the

stack feed-out belt. Once the actuator on the feed belt
Stack Feed-Out Belt nudges the feeler of this sensor near the top of the
S16
HP Sensor stapling unit, the feed out belt motor (M5) remains on for
the time prescribed to position the pawl at the home
position to catch the next stack.
Located at the front the stapling tray and mounted

above the steel rod where the corner stapler travels, this
Corner Stapler HP
S17 sensor detects the home position of the corner stapler.
Sensor
The corner stapler is in its home position when the
actuator on the corner stapler unit interrupts this sensor.
Stapler Rotation HP Controls the angle of the position of the corner stapler
S18
Sensor during oblique stapling.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 36 SM
Component Layout
B804: When the actuator on the side of the upper fence

enters the gap of this sensor, the sensor signals that the
upper tray is at its lowest position (full) and stops the
Upper Tray Full
S19 job.
Sensor (B804/B805)
B805: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the
higher tray full sensor for A3 and other heavy paper.
The other upper tray full sensor (20) is for lighter paper.
B804: This sensor is not used on the booklet finisher.

There is only one upper tray full sensor (S18).
Upper Tray Full
S20 B805: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the
Sensor (B805 only)
lower tray full sensor for A4 and smaller paper. The
other upper tray full sensor (19) is for larger paper.
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Switches off the punch movement motor when the
punch unit returns to its home position. Pulse counts
S21 Punch Unit HP Sensor
determine where the punch unit pauses for punching
and reversing.
Controls the movement of the paper position detection

Paper Position Side
S22 unit. Switches on when the horizontal detection unit is at
HP Sensor
the home position (HP is the reference point).
Detects the home position of the punch unit and

S23 Punch HP Sensor controls the vertical movement of the punches when
they fire.
When the punch mode is selected for the job (2-hole,

3-hole, etc.), the machine controls the operation of the
Punch Encoder punch drive (M24) motor which drives a small encoder
S24
Sensor shaped like a notched wheel. This wheel is rotated
forward and reverse precisely to select which punches
are moved up and down during the punch stroke.
SM 37 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Clamp Roller HP Controls the movement of the clamp retraction roller

S25
Sensor (the idle roller of the clamp roller pair).
Detects 1) the leading edge of the stack during booklet

Fold Unit Entrance stapling, and 2) also used to signal an alarm if a paper is
S26
Sensor detected at the entrance of the fold unit when the copier
is turned on.
Controls the opening and closing of the stack junction

Stack Junction Gate
S27 gate. Switches on when the stack junction gate is open
HP Sensor
and at the home position.
Controls the movement of the bottom fence in the

Fold Bottom Fence HP folding unit using pulse counts based on the size of the
S28
Sensor paper selected for the job to position the stack correctly
for feeding.
Along with the fold plate cam HP sensor (S30) this

sensor controls the movement of the fold plate . The fold
S29 Fold Plate HP Sensor
plate has arrived at the home position when the edge of
the plate enters the gap of this sensor.
Along with the fold plate HP sensor (S29), this sensor

controls the movement of the fold plate. The actuator
mounted on the end of the roller that drives the folder
Fold Plate Cam HP
S30 plate forward and back makes three full rotations, i.e.
Sensor
the actuator passes the sensor gap twice and stops on
the 3rd rotation and reverses. This accounts for the left
and right movement of fold plate.
1) Detects the folded edge of the stack as it feeds out

from the nip of the fold rollers, stops the rollers, and
reverses them so the fold feeds back into the nip, 2)
S31 Fold Unit Exit Sensor
when the folded booklet finally emerges from the nip of
the fold rollers, detects the leading and trailing edge of
the booklet to make sure that it feeds out correctly.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 38 SM
Component Layout
This sensor determines whether a there is paper at the

turn junction gate when the machine is turned on. If a
stack is present, this triggers a jam alert. (This sensor
S32 Stack Present Sensor
performs no dynamic function such as pulse counting,
etc. It only detects whether paper is at the top of the
folding unit when power its turned on.)
This rear sensor is the lower sensor of the lower tray full
sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the actuator
arm that touches the top of stapled and folded booklets
Lower Tray Full
S33 as they feed out. The on/off combinations of the two
Sensor - Rear
sensors are used to detect when the tray is full and stop
the job. (The lower tray is stationary. At tray full, the job
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
halts until booklets are removed from the lower tray.)
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
This front sensor is the higher sensor of the lower tray
full sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the
actuator arm that touches the top of stapled and folded
Lower Tray Full booklets as they feed out. The on/off combinations of
S34
Sensor - Front the two sensors are used to detect when the tray is full
and stop the job. (The lower tray is stationary. At tray
full, the job halts until booklets are removed from the
lower tray.)
Solenoids
Opens and closes the proof tray junction gate. When

Proof Junction Gate the solenoid switches on, it opens the gate and paper is
SOL1
Solenoid diverted to the proof tray. When this gate is closed, the
paper goes straight to the upper tray. I
Directs paper to the stapling tray. When this solenoid is

Stapling Tray Junction
SOL2 on, paper feeds straight through. When this solenoid is
Gate Solenoid
off, paper feeds to the stapler tray below.
SM 39 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Engages the stapler transport motor and the positioning

roller of the stapling tray. The positioning roller pushes
Positioning Roller
SOL3 each sheet down against the bottom fence to align the
Solenoid
bottom the stack for stapling. (The jogger fences align
the sides.)
Stapling Edge Operates the pressure plate of the stapling unit. The
SOL4 Pressure Plate pressure plate presses down the edge of stack in the
Solenoid stapling tray so it is tight for stapling.
When the paper stack in the stapling tray feeds to the

Booklet Pressure
SOL5 folding unit, this solenoid turns on and operates the
Roller Solenoid
roller that pushes on the surface of the stack to flatten it.
Switches
Front Door Safety The safety switch that cuts the dc power when the front
SW1
Switch door is opened.
A micro-switch that cuts the power to the upper tray lift

motor when the upper tray reaches its upper limit. This
SW2 Upper Tray Limit SW
switch duplicates the function of the upper tray limit
sensor (S12) and stops the upper tray if S12 fails.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 40 SM
Component Layout
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1. Upper Transport Motor (M2)
6. Folder Plate Motor*1 (M11)
2. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4)
7. Positioning Roller Motor (M14)
3. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)
8. Lower Transport Motor (M3)
4. Feed-Out Belt Motor (M5)
9. Entrance Motor (M1)
5. Fold Roller Motor*1 (M12)
*1: B804 Only
SM 41 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Junction Gates
2.2 JUNCTION GATES
The positions of the proof tray and staple tray junction gates determine the direction of paper feed
after paper enters the finisher.
2.2.1 PROOF MODE
Proof tray junction gate [A] opens. Staple tray junction gate [B] remains closed.
The proof tray junction gate directs paper to the proof tray above.
2.2.2 SHIFT MODE
Proof tray junction gate [A] remains closed. Staple tray junction gate [B] remains closed.
With both junction gates closed, the paper goes to the upper tray.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 42 SM
Junction Gates
2.2.3 STAPLE MODE
Proof tray junction gate [A] remains closed. Staple tray junction gate [B] opens
The staple tray junction gate directs the paper to the staple tray below for jogging and stapling.
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
SM 43 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Pre-Stacking
2.3 PRE-STACKING
This example describes what happens to Set 2 during the feed and stapling cycle of sets that
contain three pages.
 [A]: While the Set 1 is being stapled in the staple tray [1], the 1st sheet of Set 2 [2] feeds to the
pre-stack tray, and the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [3] enters the finisher.
 [B]: The pre-stack junction gate opens and the 1st sheet of Set 2 [4] switches back to the top
of the pre-stack tray as the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [5] starts to descend.
 [C]: As the 2nd sheet of Set 2 continues to descend, the 1st sheet of Set 2 is fed from the
pre-stack tray. At this time the leading edges [6] of both sheets are even.
 [D]: The trailing edges of the 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 pass the junction gate [7] as the 3rd
sheet of Set 2 [8] enters the finisher.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 44 SM
Pre-Stacking
 [E]: The 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 [9] switch back together into the top of the pre-stack and
wait for the 3rd of Set 2 sheet to arrive.
 [F]: The stapling of Set 1 in the staple tray [10] is completed.
 [G]: Set 1 [11] exits the staple tray.
 [H]: The three sheets of Set 2 [12] feed together into the stapler tray for stapling.
Booklet Finisher
Pre-stacking is only done for A4, B5, and LT paper.
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
In one-staple mode, one sheet goes to the pre-stacking tray. Then two sheets go to the stapler
tray at the same time.
In two-staple mode and booklet mode, three sheets go to the pre-stacking tray. Then four sheets
go to the stapler tray at the same time.
SM 45 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Tray Movement Mechanism
2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM
2.4.1 UPPER TRAY
[A]: Upper Tray Lift Motor

[B]: Upper Feeler [E]: Lower Feeler
[C]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1 [F]: Upper Tray Limit Sensor
(Staple Mode) [G]: Upper Tray Limit Switch
[D]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2 [H]: Upper Tray Full Sensors
(Non-Staple Mode)
 The B804 (shown above) has only one upper tray full sensor (the higher sensor at [H]).
 The B805 has two upper tray full sensors (the upper and lower sensor at [H]). On the
B805 the upper sensor detects tray full for heavier paper (A3, DLT, B4, LG, 12 x 18”), and
the lower sensor detects tray full for lighter paper (A4, LT, etc.).
 The tray full capacity is 2,000 sheets (B804) for A4, LT and 3,000 sheets (B805) for A4,
LT.
Five sensors and one switch control the operation of the upper tray lift motor [A].
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 46 SM
Upper Tray Raising and Lowering
Sensors, Switch Action

Operation Mode
[C] [D] [F] [G]
Stops the lift motor is at the standby

position when the actuator of the upper
Standby feeler deactivates sensor [C] (when it is
(Non-Staple OFF OFF between sensors [C] and [D]).
Mode) Note: Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used
as backup if sensor [C] fails or if the
upper tray is not attached.
Straight Through ON Non-staple mode operation: During

operation, tray lift is controlled only by
sensor [F]. When the actuator leaves
Shift ON
Booklet Finisher
sensor [F], the tray lowers until the
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
actuator reactivates sensor [F].
Standby: The upper tray stops and waits

for the paper output when the actuator
activates sensor [C]. [D] is not used for
staple mode
Staple Mode Operation:
 The upper tray lowers the prescribed
Standby distance immediately after the stack
ON
(Staple Mode) exits.
 The upper tray rises until the
actuator activates sensor [C] and
stops the tray lift motor (and the tray)
to wait for the next set.
 Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used
as backup if sensor [C] fails.
SM 47 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Tray Full
When the actuator on the tray activates the upper tray full sensor [H] the tray lift
B804 motor [A] switches off. Operation resumes after some copies are removed from
the tray. Upper Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (A4, LT)
The operation of the upper tray full sensor is the same as the B804. Capacity:
1,500 sheets for A3, B4 or other large paper.
B805
An additional upper tray full sensor (below sensor [H]) allows more sheets to
stack on the upper tray. Capacity: 3,000 sheets (A4, LT)
2.4.2 LOWER TRAY (B804 ONLY)
The lower tray sensor actuator arm [A] rests on the top of the stack of stapled booklets as they are
output to the lower tray. A flap depressor [B] keeps the open ends of the booklets down.
The front lower tray full sensor (S34) [C] and rear lower tray full sensor (S33) [D] detect when the
lower tray is full of booklets.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 48 SM
 The front lower tray full sensor is mounted higher than the rear lower tray full sensor.
 The lower tray is stationary. When it becomes full, the stapling and folding job stops until
booklets are removed from the tray.
 If the lower tray is not installed (this is detected if the front and rear sensors remain OFF),
the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and fold mode. When booklet mode is
selected, the tray full message appears on the operation panel.
The combinations of the two actuators and two sensors as the actuator arm rises determines the
number of booklets that the lower tray can hold before the job stops.
The tray full detection depends on the size of the paper and the number of sheets in one stapled
and folded booklet.
In the table below, the conditions ( Ready  Full 1,  Full 2  Full 3: See the illustration on the
previous page) refer to the states of the sensors described on the previous page.
Condition Front Sensor Rear Sensor
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Ready ON OFF
Full 1 ON ON
Full 2 OFF ON
Full 3 (or lower tray not installed) OFF OFF
In the tables below:

 "Sht" denotes "sheets in a stack".
 "Cnt" denotes "Count" (see below for an explanation).
After a booklet is feed out, the fold roller motor stops the exit roller. The machine then monitors the
tray full sensors every 100 ms. The machine checks for a certain condition, based on the size of
the paper and the number of sheets in the booklet.
An example is shown below. Tell the operators that the number of sheets that the lower tray can
hold will vary greatly.
SM 49 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Lower Tray Full Condition Table

A3 (DLT)
1 Sht 2 Sht 3 Sht 4 Sht 5 Sht 6 Sht 7 Sth 8 Sht 9 Sht …
Full 1 3 Cnt — — — — — — — — …
15
Full 2 — 5 Cnt — — — — — — …
Cnt
13
Full 3 — — — 7 Cnt 4 Cnt 2 Cnt 2 Cnt 2 Cnt …
Cnt
A4 (LT)
1 Sht 2 Sht 3 Sht 4 Sht 5 Sht 6 Sht 7 Sth 8 Sht 9 Sht …
16
Full1 — — — — — — — — …
Cnt
10 10 15 20 15 10
Full 2 — 8 Cnt 8 Cnt …
Cnt Cnt Cnt Cnt Cnt Cnt
Full 3 — — — …
Examples:
After the copier makes a booklet with 1 sheet of A3/DLT paper, the machine checks every 100 ms
for the ‘Full 1’ condition. If the Full 1 condition occurs 3 times (shaded block in the table above),
the machine detects that the tray is full.
After the copier makes a booklet with 5 sheets of A4/LT paper, the machine checks every 100 ms
for the ‘Full 2’ condition. If the Full 2 condition occurs 20 times (shaded block in the table above),
the machine detects that the tray is full.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 50 SM
Corner Stapling
2.5 CORNER STAPLING
2.5.1 STACKING AND JOGGING
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
[A]: Jogger Fence Motor (M15)
[B]: Jogger Fences
[C]: Positioning Roller
[D]: Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)
[E]: Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid (SOL4)
[F]: Pressure Plate
At the beginning of the job, the jogger fence motor (M15) [A] switches on and moves the jogger
fences [B] to the standby position (7.5 mm from the sides of the selected paper size).
When each sheet passes the pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2) and enters the stapling tray:
 The jogger fence motor switches on and moves the jogger fences to within 5.5 mm of the
sides of the selected paper size.
 The positioning roller solenoid (SOL3) switches on for the time prescribed for the paper size.
This pushes the positioning roller [C] onto the sheet and pushes it down onto bottom fence.
This aligns the edge of the stack.
Next, the jogger fence motor:
 Switches on again and moves the jogger fences to within 2.6 mm of the sides of the stack to
align the sides of the stack.
 Reverses and moves the fences to the standby position (7.5 mm away for the sides) and
waits for the next sheet.
SM 51 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Corner Stapling
 The jogger fence HP sensor [D] switches off the jogger motor at the end of the job.
After the last sheet feeds:
 The stapling edge pressure plate solenoid [E] (SOL4) switches on and pushes the pressure
plate [F] onto the stack to press down the edge for stapling.
 The corner stapler staples the stack.
2.5.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT
[A]: Stapler Movement Motor

[B]: Stapler
[C]: Stapler Rotation Motor
The stapler performs horizontal and rotational movement in each of the four staple modes:
 Front 1 staple
 Rear 1 staple
 Rear diagonal staple
 Rear/Front 2 staples
The stapler movement motor [A] drives a timing belt that moves stapler [B] left and right on its
stainless steel rail.
The stapler rotation motor [C] rotates the stapler into position for diagonal stapling at the rear.
 The stapler movement motor switches on and moves the stapler the standby stapling position.
(This is the stapling position for the paper size selected for the job.)
 The stapler movement motor switches off and the stapler waits for the signal to fire (or swivel
and for diagonal stapling).
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 52 SM
Corner Stapling
If the stack is to be stapled at two positions:

 The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the front position and staples the front.
 The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the rear and the stapler staples the rear.
If the stack is stapled at the rear with a diagonal staple, the staple moves to the rear. When it is
time for stapling, the rotation motor rotates the stapler to the correct angle and holds the stapler in
that position while the stapler fires.
The stapling positions can be fine adjusted with SP6-133-001.
2.5.3 CORNER STAPLING
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor [A] inside the stapler unit. The stapler hammer [B] fires
the stapler [C].
The cartridge set sensor [D] detects the cartridge at the correct position.
The staple end sensor [E] detects the staple end condition.
SM 53 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
2.6 BOOKLET STAPLING (B804 ONLY)
2.6.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM
[A]: Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5)

[B]: Booklet Pressure Roller Arm
[C]: Booklet Pressure Roller
As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences, the stack feed
out belt moves.
In booklet mode, immediately after the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and jogger
fences, the booklet pressure solenoid switches on and the booklet pressure roller presses down
on the stack until booklet stapling is finished. This prevents the stack from shifting during stapling.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 54 SM
2.6.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING
Overview
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1. Leading Edge Pressure Roller 13. Corner Stapler (M20)
2. Stack Present Sensor (S32) 14. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
3. Feed Out Belt Pawl 1 15. Feed Out Belt
4. Booklet Staplers x2 (M22, M23) 16. Fold Unit Bottom Fence
5. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16) 17. Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28)
6. Feed Out Belt Pawl 2 18. Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26)
7. Positioning Roller 19. Fold Unit Exit Rollers x2
8. Booklet Pressure Roller (Rear) 20. Fold Unit Exit Sensor (S31)
9. Jogger Fences x2 21. Fold Rollers x2
10. Pre-Stack Exit Roller 22. Clamp Rollers x2
11. Pressure Plate 23. Stack Junction Gate
12. Stapling Tray Bottom Fence 24. Stack Transport Roller
SM 55 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
1:
The last sheet of the stack [1] enters the stapling tray. The jogger fences [2] jog the last sheet into
position (based on the width of the selected paper size) and then retract and stop 1 mm away
from the sides of the stack.
2:
The pressure plate [3] and booklet pressure roller [4] press down on the sheet. The stack feed out
belt switches on and the pawl [5] on the feed out belt catches the bottom of the stack and raises it.
The stapling tray sensor [6] detects the trailing edge of the paper stack.
3:
The feed out belt [7] raises the stack to the prescribed stapling position and stops. The jogger
fences move to the sides of the stack and the booklet staplers [8] staple the stack.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 56 SM
Booklet Finisher
4:
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
The jogger fences remain 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The feed out belt [1] raises the
stack until the top of the stack is 10 mm past the leading edge pressure roller [2] and stops. The
leading edge pressure roller descends and applies pressure to the top of the stack. The stack
junction gate [3] (normally open) closes. The pressure roller [4] and pressure plate [5] retract.
5:
The feed out belt [6], transport rollers [7], [8], and clamp rollers [9] rotate and feed the stack past
the closed stack junction, over the top and down toward the bottom fence [10]. At the same time,
the fold unit bottom fence descends from its home position and stops 10 mm below the fold
position.
6:
The rollers feed the leading edge of the stack to within 3 mm of the stack stopper of the bottom
fence [13]. The fold unit entrance sensor [11] detects the stack and opens the clamp rollers [12].
The stack drops 3 mm onto the fold unit bottom fence [13]. At this time, the first sheet [14] of the
next stack feeds to the stapling tray.
SM 57 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
7:
The bottom fence [1] raises the stack to the prescribed fold position [2].
8:
The fold plate [3] moves to the left and advances 1/3 its maximum horizontal stroke and exerts 20
kg (44 lb.) of pressure at the fold rollers [4].
9:
With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers [5], the fold rollers begin to rotate
and fold the stack as it feeds out.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 58 SM
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
10:
When the fold rollers [1] feed the stack 10 mm past the nip, the fold plate retracts until it no longer
touches the stack. The fold unit exit sensor [2] detects the folded edge of the stack and stops the
fold rollers.
11:
The rotation of the fold rollers [4] reverses and feeds the folded edge back until only 3 mm of the
fold [5] remains at the nip.
12:
The fold rollers [6] rotate forward once again feed out. The fold unit exit sensor [7] once again
detects the edge of the fold.
 You can do SP6-136-001 to increase the sharpness of the fold. The number of forward
and reverse feeds can be set in the range of 2 to 30. The machine repeats Steps 11 and
12. For more, please refer to Section "Service Tables".
SM 59 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
13:
With the feed of the stack halted, the fold plate [1] retracts. The fold plate HP sensor (not shown)
detects the fold plate and stops it at its home position.
14:
The fold rollers [2] and fold unit exit rollers [3] begin to rotate together and feed out the folded
booklet to the lower tray.
15:
Once the trailing edge of the stack passes the fold unit exit sensor [4], the clamp rollers [5] close
to be ready to feed the next stack. The fold unit bottom fence [6] descends. The bottom fence HP
sensor [7] stops the bottom fence when it detects the actuator on the bottom fence.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 60 SM
2.6.3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Booklet Stapler
[A]: Feed Out Belt Pawl. Raises the stack to stapling position.
[B]: Booklet Stapler EH185R – Rear
[C]: Booklet Stapler EH185R – Front
Stack Junction Gate
[D]: Stack Junction Gate Motor. Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam.
[E]: Stack Junction Gate Cam. Opens and closes the stack junction gate.
[F]: Stack Junction Gate. The stack junction gate motor and stack junction gate cam close the
stack junction gate. The feed out belt pawl raises the stapled stack and sends it over the top and
down to the fold unit.
[G]: Leading Edge Pressure Roller. Presses down on the leading edge of the stack after booklet
stapling.
SM 61 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Clamp Roller
[A]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives the stationary clamp drive roller  as well as the fold rollers (see
next page).
[B]: Clamp Rollers.
 Clamp Roller – Drive. Rotated by the fold roller motor, this stationary roller feeds the stack down
with the retracting roller closed.
 Clamp Roller – Retracting. Opened and closed by the retraction motor [C].
[C]: Clamp Roller Retraction Motor. Operates the clamp roller cam that retracts the retracting
clamp roller. The clamp rollers feed the stack to within 3 mm of the bottom fence when closed and
then open to drop the stack onto the bottom fence.
[D]: Clamp Roller HP Sensor. Controls the rotation of the clamp roller retraction motor and cam
that open and close the retracting clamp roller.
[E]: Clamp Roller Cam. Forces open the spring loaded retracting clamp roller.
Bottom Fence
[F]: Bottom Fence. Raises the booklet stapled stack to the fold position.
[G]: Bottom Fence HP Sensor. Detects the actuator on the bottom fence and stops it at the home
position after folding.
[H]: Bottom Fence Lift Motor. Raises the bottom fence and stapled stack to the fold position
prescribed for the paper size.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 62 SM
Fold Plate
[A]: Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers. Catches the stack after it is released by the clamp rollers.
[B]: Fold Plate Motor. Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate.
Booklet Finisher
[C]: Fold Plate Cam. Controls the movement of the fold plate to the left (into the nip of the fold
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
rollers) and right (toward the fold plate home position).
[D]: Fold Plate HP Sensor. Controls operation of the fold plate motor.
[E]: Fold Plate. Moves left and pushes the stack into the nip of the fold rollers and then moves
right to retract.
Fold Rollers
[F]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives forward to feed out the stack at the fold and then reverses to feed
the fold in to sharpen the crease, and then drives forward again to feed out the folded stack. This
reverse/forward cycle is done once.
 This cycle can be repeated by changing the setting of SP6114.

[G]: Fold Rollers. Driven by the fold roller motor, this roller pair feeds out the stack at its fold,
reverses to feed in the stack to, and then feeds forward again (assisted by the fold unit exit rollers
– not shown) to feed out the stack to the lower tray.
SM 63 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Upper Tray Output
2.7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT
2.7.1 FEED OUT
[A]: Feed Out Belt Motor

[B]: Stack Feed-Out Belt
[C]: Pawl
[D]: Exit Rollers
[E]: Exit Guide Plate Motor
[F]: Exit Guide Plate
[G]: Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
[H]: Upper Tray
After the stack is stapled, the feed out belt motor [A] switches on and drives the feed out belt [B].
The pawl [C] attached to the feed out belt catches on the stack and lifts the stack toward the feed
out slot.
The exit guide plate [F] remains open as the stack emerges at a prescribed distance away from
the exit roller.
Next, the exit guide plate closes and the exit roller feeds the stack out.
The opening and closing of the exit guide plate is controlled by the rising and falling of a link
driven by a rotating cam attached to the shaft of the exit guide plate motor [E].
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 64 SM
Upper Tray Output
The feed out belt motor stops 300 ms to prevent the stapled stack from rising too high.
Next, the feed out belt motor switches on again, then the pawl actuates its home position sensor
and switches off the motor.
There are two output pawls on the feed out belt to improve the productivity of the feed out
operation.
2.7.2 FEED OUT STACKING
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Upper/proof exit motor [A] drives feed roller [B] and stacking sponge roller [C].
Stacking sponge roller motor [D] moves the sponge roller forward and back with link [E].
The position of the stacking sponge roller [C] is controlled by the stacking sponge roller motor
which is switched on and off by the stacking roller HP sensor [F].
SM 65 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)
2.8 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B804/B805)
2.8.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION
Skew Correction before Punching
This punch unit corrects for paper skew and then positions the punch unit to punch holes at the
correct position. Each sheet is punched one at a time.
Paper feeds out of the copier. The finisher entrance sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the
sheet.
The finisher entrance roller [B] stops rotating briefly while the copier exit rollers continue to rotate.
This buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to correct skew. The finisher entrance
roller [C] starts to rotate again and feeds the sheet into the finisher.
These SP codes adjust the skew operation in the punch unit:
 SP6130. This SP corrects the punch hole alignment. To do this, it corrects the skew of each
sheet by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off while the exit
roller of the machine remains on. For more, see Section "Service Tables".
 SP6131. This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct skew when
paper enters the finisher. You can use this SP to disable the skew correction. For more, see
Section "Service Tables".
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 66 SM
Punch Unit Position Correction
These operations (skew correction before punching, and punch unit position correction) increase
the accuracy of the punch alignment.
:
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
The trailing edge of the sheet passes the finisher entrance sensor [A].
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
The paper position slide unit [B] moves the paper position sensor [C] forward to the edge of the
paper.
The paper position sensor detects the position of the paper edge and sends this information to the
punch unit board. The machine uses the detected position of the paper edge to calculate the
correct position for punching.
The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers [D] the prescribed distance to
position the paper under the punch unit.
:
Using the result of the position calculation, the punch unit control board moves the punch unit [E]
to the adjusted punch position.
The paper position slide unit and its paper sensor, move back to the paper position slide home
position sensor [F], and the punch unit fires the punches to make the holes.
:
The feed rollers [G] feed the punched paper out of the punch unit and into the paper path.
SM 67 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment:

 SP6-128 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed.
 SP6-129 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed.
For more, see Section "Service Tables".
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 68 SM
2.8.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS
Paper Position Detection
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
[A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1)
[B]: Finisher Entrance Roller
[C]: Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1)
[D]: Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor (M7)
[E]: Paper Position Sensor (S27)
[F]: Paper Position Sensor Slide HP Sensor (S22)
The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the finisher entrance rollers [B] that feed paper from
the copier into the finisher. The finisher entrance sensor (S1) [C] detects paper when it enters the
finisher, and detects paper jams.
The paper position slide sensor motor (M7) [D] extends and retracts the paper position slide that
holds the paper position sensor (S27) [E]. The paper position sensor detects the position of the
paper edge. The detected position of the paper is used to calculate and position the punch unit for
punching.
The paper position slide HP sensor (S22) [F] detects the paper position slide when it retracts and
stops the paper position slide motor so the slide stops at its home position.
SM 69 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Punch Unit Movement
[A]: Punch Movement Motor (M9)

[B]: Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21)
[C]: Punch Drive Motor (M24)
The punch movement motor (M9) [A] extends and retracts the punch unit to position it at the
correct position for punching.
The punch movement HP sensor (S21) [B] detects the position when it retracts, switches off the
punch position movement motor, and stops the punch unit at its home position.
The punch drive motor (M24) [C] fires the punches that punch holes in the paper below.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 70 SM
Punch Selection and Firing
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
[A]: Punch Drive Motor (M24)
[B]: Punch Encoder Wheel
[C]: Punch Encoder Sensor (S24)
[D]: Punch HP Sensor (S23)
The punch drive motor (M24) [A] turns the small, notched encoder wheel [B] through the gap in
the punch encoder sensor [C] (S24). The sensor output is used to control the punch timing.
The timing for 2-hole punching [E] is different from 3-hole punching [F].
When the punch unit is at the punching position, the punch motor turns until the encoder detects
the starting position for 2-hole or 3-hole punching.
SM 71 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
 This is the ‘1’ position in the diagrams (the top diagram is for 2-hole punching, and the bottom
diagram is for 3-hole punching).
Then, the punch drive motor turns counter-clockwise to the ‘2’ position. This movement punches
the holes in the paper.
Then, the punch drive motor turns clockwise to the ‘1’ position, to be ready for the next sheet of
paper.
2.8.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM
[A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1)

[B]: Punch Waste Belt
[C]: Punch Waste Hopper
[D]: Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4)
The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch waste
belt [B].
The punchouts fall from the punch unit onto the belt. The belt moves the punchouts to the front
and dumps them in the punch waste hopper [C].
The punch hopper full sensor [D]:
 Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts that have
collected in the hopper.
 It also detects when the punch hopper is set properly.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 72 SM
Finisher Jam Detection
2.9 FINISHER JAM DETECTION
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Display Mode Jam What It Means
Finisher After main machine exit sensor goes OFF,

entrance finisher entrance sensor does not go ON even
Proof sensor late after enough time to feed 450 mm.
R1 to R3 Shift
Staple Finisher After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, it does
entrance not go OFF after enough time to feed a sheet
sensor lag 1.5 times its length has elapsed.
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, proof

Proof exit
exit sensor does not go ON even after enough
sensor late
time to feed 450 mm.
R3 Proof
After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, proof
Proof exit
exit sensor does not go OFF even after enough
sensor lag
time to feed 450 mm.
SM 73 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Finisher Jam Detection
Display Mode Jam What It Means
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, upper

Upper tray exit
tray exit sensor does not go ON even after
sensor late
enough time to feed 485 mm.
R4 Shift
After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, upper
Upper tray exit
tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after
sensor lag
enough time to feed 650 mm.
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON,

Pre-stack tray
pre-stack tray exit sensor does not go ON even
exit sensor lag
after enough time to feed 650 mm.
R5 to R7 Staple
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON,
Pre-stack tray
pre-stack tray exit sensor does not go OFF
exit sensor late
even after enough time to feed 1650 mm.
The fold unit entrance sensor goes not go ON

Fold unit
after enough time has elapsed to feed 1.5 times
entrance
the length of the stack after the leading edge of
sensor late
the stack reaches the stack present sensor
(S26)
Booklet (S32).
R8 to Staple
Fold unit exit The fold unit exit sensor does not go ON after
R12 (B700
sensor late enough time has elapsed for the stack to feed
Only)
(S31) 1.5 times its length from the fold position.
Fold unit exit After the fold unit exit sensor goes ON, it does
sensor lag not go OFF after enough time has elapsed to
(S31) feed 442.9 mm.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 74 SM

sp8300 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

sp8300 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

sp8300 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M132

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

 2012 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

Ricoh Americas Corporation

1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................................... 1-1

2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 2-1

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE..................................................... 3-1

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 4-1

5. SERVICE TABLES ...................................................................... 5-1

6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-1

7. ENERGY SAVING ....................................................................... 7-1

Health Safety Conditions

 Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

Cautions, Notes, etc.

 FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY

See "Appendices" for the following information:

1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

Item Callout Key Machine Code

Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit [2] C D580

2000-sheet LCT [3] C D581

1200-sheet LCT [4] C D631

External Bridge Unit [5] C D634

3000-Sheet Finisher (See Note 1) [7] C D636

Item Callout Key Machine Code

-Output Jogger Unit (See Note 2) [8] C B703

Memory Unit 512 MB - C D594

IPDS Unit - C M416

Internal VM Card - C D640

IEEE 802.11a/g, g - C M344

IEEE 1284 - C B679

1.3 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH

Controller Type GW+ Controller GW Controller

Operation Panel 4.3” touch panel includes 4-line LCD

USB2.0/SD Slot Standard Not supported

Light Detect Function Available Not supported

SMC data SD card down load or printing Printing only

Safety Shut Down Available Not Available

PDF Direct Standard Not supported

Data Overwrite Standard Option

HDD Encryption Standard Option

1 Paper Exit Sensor 17 By-pass Feed Roller

2 Paper Overflow Sensor 18 By-pass Separation Roller

3 Junction Gate 1 19 Duplex/by-pass transport roller

4 Junction Jam Sensor 20 Upper Relay Belt

5 Duplex Inverter Gate 21 Feed Roller

6 Junction Gate 2 22 Separation Roller

7 Duplex Entrance Sensor 23 Pick-up Roller

8 Duplex Inverter Roller 24 Bottom Plate

9 Hot Roller 25 Development Unit

10 Pressure Roller 26 Charge Roller

11 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 27 F Mirror

12 Duplex Transport Roller 28 Barrel Toroidal Lens (BTL)

13 Transfer Belt 29 Polygonal Mirror Motor

14 OPC Drum 30 Laser Unit

15 Registration Roller 31 Toner Bottle Holder